Drafting

RTA STRUCTURAL DRAFTING AND DETAILING MANUAL
1.
1.1
INTRODUCTION
Purpose This Manual has been prepared for the purpose of standardising the preparation of drawings, simplifying various details and securing uniformity in appearance and style consistent with the subject involved, with resultant saving of time and effort. This Manual has the purpose of maintaining a consistent quality of drafting standard for structural drawings for bridges and related structures prepared by or for the Authority or for bridges and related structures which will become the property of the Authority in the future. Scope This Manual sets RTA policy and guidelines on drafting and detailing issues for bridges and related structures for all new, rehabilitation and other designs for all RTA funded bridges as well as bridges that will become the property of the RTA in the future. What it contains This Manual contains information and advice, including the minimum requirements, for the detailing of drawings for bridges and related structures. Who is it for? This Manual is designed for use by all personnel carrying out work for RTA funded bridges or bridges that will become the property of the RTA in the future, whether responsible for the design, administering the design and documentation or the construction of new bridges or the rehabilitation, maintenance or widening of existing bridges. Amendments to the Manual Any necessary amendments to the Manual, caused by change in policy or process, will be issued as required to maintain currency of the Manual Contact Details For futher information regarding the Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual, please contact: Greg Forster Senior Bridge Engineer, Policy and Specification RTA Bridge Engineering Pod F, Level 5 Octagon Building 110 George Street, Parramatta NSW 2150 Phone: Facsimile: 8837 0850 8837 - 0054
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
STRUCTURAL DRAFTING AND DETAILING MANUAL
BRIDGE ENGINEERING ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY BRANCH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY NEW SOUTH WALES
RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual
Document Control
DOCUMENT CONTROL
DOCUMENT/SECTION RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Table of Contents Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Section 7 Section 8 Section 9 Section 10 Section 11 Section 12 Section 13 Section 14 Section 15 Section 16 Section 17 Section 18 Section 19 Section 20 Section 21 Section 22 Section 23 Section 23 Appendix A Section 24 Section 25 Section 26 Section 27 Section 28 Section 29 Section 30 Section 31 Section 32 ISSUE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 REVISION 0 1 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 COMMENT
Figures revised for new title block information
New section
OTB005
Issue 1 Revision 6 (05 May 2011)
Page 1 of 1
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION No 1 2 TITLE SCOPE DEFINITIONS Figure 2.1 3 TYPES OF DRAWINGS 3.1 General 3.2 Definitions 3.3 Sketches 3.4 Proposal Sketches 3.5 Standard Drawings 3.5.1 RTA Standard Bridge Drawings 3.5.2 Project Specific Standard Drawings 3.6 Registered Drawings 3.7 Registration of Sketches and Drawings in Bridge Engineering 3.8 CAD File Names for Registered Drawings 3.9 CAD Numbers and CAD Filenames for Sketches 3.10 Registration of Drawings with Micrographics Figure 3.4.1 Figure 3.4.2 Figure 3.8.1 Figure 3.9.1 DRAWING SHEETS AND TITLE BLOCKS 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 Sheet Sizes Title Blocks Order of Sheets in a set of Drawings Standard Drawing Sheets Local Government Area Names Figure 4.2.1(a) Figure 4.2.1(b) Figure 4.2.1(c) Figure 4.4.1 Figure 4.4.2 Figure 4.4.3 4.1 4.1 4.2 4.2 4.2 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.3 3.3 3.4 3.4 3.5 3.6 PAGE 1.1 1.1
SETTING OUT 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 General Chainages Compass Bearing Co-ordinates Piles Footings Piers and Abutments Bearings 5.1 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.4 5.4
OTB005
Page 1 of 8
Table of Contents
5.9 5.10 5.11
Girders Deck Barrier Railings Figure 5.1 Sheet 1 Figure 5.1 Sheet 2 Figure 5.3 Figure 5.4 Figure 5.6 Figure 5.9 Figure 5.10(a) Figure 5.10(b) Figure 5.11
5.4 5.6 5.8
FOUNDATIONS 6.1 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.3 6.4 6.5 General Piling Precast Reinforced Concrete Driven Piles Prestressed Reinforced Concrete Driven Piles Cast-in Place Reinforced Concrete Piles Tubular Steel Driven Piles H Section Steel Driven Piles Pile/Pile Cap Combinations Spread Footings Rock Anchors Figure 6.2.5 Figure 6.3.1 Figure 6.4.1(a) Figure 6.4.1(b) Figure 6.4.1(c) Figure 6.5 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.2 6.2 6.4 6.4 6.5 6.5 6.6
DRAWING PRACTICE 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.2 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 Linework Text Dimensions General Order of accuracy for Dimensions Reduced Levels and Chainages Dimension Lines, Projection Lines and Leaders Scales on drawings Plan Views Elevations Sections Views Details Figure 7.1 Figure 7.3.1 Figure 7.3.2 7.1 7.1 7.1 7.1 7.2 7.2 7.3 7.3 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.5 7.5
SLOPING FEATURES 8.1 8.2 Slopes and Batters Grades, Crossfalls and Superelevations 8.1 8.1
OTB005
Page 2 of 8
Table of Contents
CONTOURS 9.1 9.2 9.3 General Lines Levels and Intervals 9.1 9.1 9.1
10
ABBREVIATIONS 10.1 10.2 Standard Abbreviations Table 10.1.1 Acceptable Abbreviations Table 10.2.1 10.1 10.2
11
SYMBOLS 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 Welding Surface Texture of Metals Materials Use of asterisks and similar Symbols Figure 11.3 11.1 11.1 11.1 11.2
12
NOTES AND REFERENCES 12.1 12.2 12.3 General General Notes Particular Notes 12.1 12.1 12.1
13
TITLES AND SUB-TITLES 13.1 13.2 Titles Subtitles Figure 13.2 13.1 13.1
14
CHECKING OF DRAWINGS 14.1 14.2 14.3 General Marking of Check Prints Amendment of Drawings 14.1 14.2 14.2
15
ISSUE AND AMENDMENT OF DRAWINGS 15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4 15.5 15.6 General Submission of Drawings for Approval Issue of Advance Copy Drawings Amendment of Approved Drawings Procedure following Amendment of Approved Drawings Authorisation for release of Amended Drawings Figure 15.2 Figure 15.4.1 Figure 15.4.2 15.1 15.1 15.1 15.1 15.3 15.4
16
WORK-AS-EXECUTED DRAWINGS 16.1 16.2 16.3 General Standard of Work Required Projects Designed and Constructed Under Contract Figure 16.2 16.1 16.1 16.2
OTB005
Page 3 of 8
Table of Contents
17
LOCALITY AND SITE PLANS 17.1 17.2 Locality Plans Site Plans 17.1 17.1
18
CONCEPT AND PROPOSAL SKETCHES 18.1 18.2 18.3 18.4 18.4.1 18.4.2 18.4.3 18.4.4 18.4.5 18.4.6 18.4.7 18.4.8 18.4.9 18.5 18.6 18.6.1 18.6.2 18.7 18.8 18.9 18.10 General Concept Sketches Registration and Numbering Information to be shown on Proposal Sketches Plan View Elevation Typical Cross Section Skew Diagram Vertical Alignment Diagram Site Plan Locality Plan General Notes Title Block Drawing Conventions Orientation Locality Plan Site Plan Issue of Preliminary Sketches Submission of Proposal Sketches for Approval by Client Amendments to Approved Proposals Preparation of Sketches for Heritage Issue Consideration Figure 18.2.1(a) and (b) Figure 18.4.1(a) and (b) Figure 18.10(a) Figure 18.10(b) Figure 18.10(c) Figure 18.10(d) Figure 18.10(e) 18.1 18.1 18.1 18.1 18.2 18.2 18.3 18.3 18.4 18.4 18.4 18.4 18.4 18.5 18.6 18.6 18.6 18.6 18.6 18.6 18.6
19
GEOTECHNICAL INFORMATION 19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 General Minimum extent of Geotechnical Investigation Bridge Construction Contracts invited by the Authority Bridge Construction as part of Design Construct Maintain Projects 19.1 19.1 19.1 19.1
20
COVER SHEETS 20.1 General Figure 20.1.1(a) Figure 20.1.1(b) Figure 20.1.1(c) Figure 20.1.1(d) 20.1
21
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS 21.1 21.2 21.3 21.4 21.5 General Plan View Elevation Typical Cross Section Skew Diagram 21.1 21.1 21.2 21.2 21.3
OTB005
Page 4 of 8
Table of Contents
21.6 21.7 21.8
Vertical Alignment Diagram Site Plan General Notes Figure 21.1.1(a) Figure 21.1.1(b) Figure 21.1.1(c) Figure 21.1.1(d) Figure 21.5
21.3 21.3 21.4
22
CONCRETE DETAILING 22.1 22.2 22.3 22.4 22.5 22.6 General Dimensioning Plan Views Elevations Sections Construction Joints Figure 22.1 Figure 22.2 Figure 22.3 Figure 22.4 Figure 22.5 Figure 22.6 22.1 22.1 22.2 22.2 22.2 22.2
23
STEEL REINFORCEMENT DETAILING 23.1 23.2 23.3 23.3.1 23.3.2 23.3.3 23.3.4 23.3.4.2 23.3.4.3 Layout Bar and Fabric Detailing Development and Lap Lengths General Development Lengths for Bars in Tension Table 23.3.2.1 Table 23.3.2.2 Development Lengths for Bars in Compression Table 23.3.3 Slicing of Reinforcement Lapped Splices for Bars in Tension Lapped Splices for Bars in Compression Table 23.4.3 23.1 23.1 23.2 23.2 23.2 23.3 23.4 23.4 23.5 23.5 23.5 23.5 23.6
24
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 24.1 24.2 24.2.1 24.2.2 24.3 24.3.1 24.3.2 24.3.3 General Pre-tensioned Prestressed Concrete PSC Planks Precast Prestressed Concrete Girders Post-tensioned Prestressed Concrete General Tendon Profiles Ducts Figure 24.2.2 Figure 24.2.2(b) Sheet 1 Figure 24.2.2(b) Sheet 2 Figure 24.3.1(a) Figure 24.3.1(b) Figure 24.3.1(c) 24.1 24.1 24.1 24.1 24.2 24.2 24.2 24.3
OTB005
Page 5 of 8
Table of Contents
Figure 24.3.1(d) Figure 24.3.1(e) Figure 24.3.1(f) 25 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK 25.1 25.2 25.3 25.4 25.5 25.6 25.7 25.8 25.9 25.10 25.11 25.12 General Standard Items Non-standard Items Closing Dimensions Web Diagrams Stud Welded Shear Connectors Web Stiffeners Corner Cuts and Cutouts Lifting Lugs Protective Treatment Plate Nomenclature Intermittent Welds Figure 25.1(a) Figure 25.1(b) Figure 25.1(c) Figure 25.1(d) Figure 25.5.1 25.1 25.2 25.2 25.2 25.2 25.2 25.3 25.3 25.3 25.3 25.4 25.4
26
BARRIER RAILINGS 26.1 26.2 26.2.1 26.2.2 26.3 26.3.1 26.3.2 26.4 26.5 26.5.1 26.5.2 26.6 26.6.1 26.6.2 26.7 General Dimensions Traffic Barrier Railings Pedestrian Railings Geometry Grades and Vertical Curves Horizontal Curves Joints Post Spacing Traffic Barrier Railings Pedestrian Railings Panel Lengths Traffic Barrier Railings Pedestrian Railings Termination of Railings at Ends of Structures Figure 26.3.1 Figure 26.3.2 Figure 26.4 26.1 26.1 26.1 26.1 26.1 26.1 26.1 26.2 26.2 26.2 26.3 26.3 26.3 26.3 26.3
27
BEARINGS 27.1 27.2 27.3 27.3.1 27.3.2 27.3.3 General Reduced Levels of Bearings Bearing Types Elastomeric Bearing Strips and Elastomeric Bearing Pads Laminated Elastomeric Bearings Proprietary Bearing Types Figure 27.3.1 Figure 27.3.4(a) Figure 27.3.4(b) 27.1 27.1 27.1 27.2 27.2 27.3
OTB005
Page 6 of 8
Table of Contents
28
DECK JOINTS 28.1 28.2 28.2.1 28.2.2 28.2.3 28.2.4 28.2.5 28.2.6 28.2.7 General Detailing of Joints Small Movement Joints Compression Seal Joints Steel Fabricated Interlocking Finger Joints Elastomeric Strip Seal Joints Proprietary Aluminium SawTooth Joints Modular Joints Other Joint Types Figure 28.2.2 Figure 28.2.3(a) Figure 28.2.3(b) Figure 28.2.3(c) Figure 28.2.4 Figure 28.2.5 28.1 28.1 28.1 28.2 28.2 28.2 28.2 28.2 28.2
29
MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK 29.1 29.2 29.3 29.4 29.6 29.7 General Protection Angles and Expansion Joint Angles Dowels and Dowel Cap Assemblies Bolt Assemblies Bearing Cover Plates Concrete Safety Barrier Cover Plates for Expansion Joints Figure 29.2.1 29.1 29.2 29.2 29.3 29.4 29.4
30
BRIDGE WIDENINGS 30.1 30.2 30.3 General Drawings Linework and Shading Figure 30.1.1 Figure 30.1.2 30.1 30.1 30.2
31
BRIDGE SAFETY SCREENS 31.1 31.2 31.2.1 31.2.2 31.2.3 31.2.4 31.3 31.4 31.4.1 31.5 31.6 31.7 31.8 31.9 31.10 General Geometry Grades and Vertical Curves Height Horizontal Curves Curvature of Posts and Screens Joints Post Spacing Retrofitting application requirements Steel Mesh Panel Sizes Fixing of Steel Mesh Panels Termination of Safety Screens at Ends of Structure End Treatment Application of Decorative Panels Alternative Safety Screens Figure 31.1 Figure 31.3 Figure 31.4.1 31.1 31.1 31.1 31.1 31.1 31.2 31.2 31.2 31.2 31.3 31.3 31.4 31.4 31.4 31.4
OTB005
Page 7 of 8
Table of Contents
32
BRIDGE SIZE REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX CULVERTS 32.1 32.2 32.3 32.4 32.5 32.6 32.7 32.8 32.9 32.10 32.11 General Cover Sheets General Arrangement Drawings Cast-in-place Base Slabs Cast-in-place Apron Slabs Precast Reinforced Concrete Crown Units and End Units Cast-in-place Headwalls Cast-in-place Wing Walls Inlet and Outlet Protection Culvert Extensions Bar Shapes Diagram Figure 32.2.1 Figure 32.2.2 Figure 32.2.3 Figure 32.2.4 Figure 32.3.1 Figure 32.3.2 Figure 32.4.1 Figure 32.4.2 Figure 32.4.3 Figure 32.7.1 Figure 32.7.2 Figure 32.8.1 Figure 32.10.1 Figure 32.10.2 32.1 32.1 32.2 32.2 32.3 32.3 32.3 32.4 32.4 32.4 32.5
OTB005
Page 8 of 8
SECTION 1
SCOPE
Scope
SCOPE
This Manual has been prepared for the purpose of standardising the preparation of drawings, simplifying various details and securing uniformity in appearance and style consistent with the subject involved, with resultant saving of time and effort. This Manual contains information and advice for the detailing of drawings for bridges (including associated furniture), culverts, tunnels, concrete retaining walls and lined channels. The use of this information should lead to the best and most economical solution to many structural drafting and detailing issues. This Manual has the purpose of maintaining a consistent quality of drafting standard for structural drawings prepared by or for the Authority or which will become the property of the Authority in the future. This Manual sets out the minimum requirements for the preparation of drawings for bridges, culverts, tunnels, concrete retaining walls and lined channels that are required for the purposes of state records and all relevant sections should be read by all designers and drafting officers that are involved in the preparation of design documentation for the Authority. For work commissioned outside of the Authoritys Bridge Engineering Section, any request for approval to relax the standards set out in this Manual must be addressed to the RTA representative that commissioned the work and who must consider the matter in consultation with the Manager, Structural Drafting, the relevant Senior Bridge Engineer or the Principal Bridge Engineer prior to the commencement of any drafting work. Where consultants have been commissioned to complete bridge designs for the Authority or the design of bridges which will become the property of the Authority in the future, the consultant shall supply the Authority with an A1 size set of the approved/accepted drawings on tracing paper, together with individual electronic drawings files (in either dgn, dwg, or dxf format) and a multipage pdf file that can be read by and stored on the Authoritys equipment. See Clause 15.7 of this Manual. Some of the requirements as stated in this Manual may not be required for construction purposes (eg setting out of the bridge deck as detailed in Clause 5.10), however the details are required to be provided in the drawings for the future management and maintenance of bridges, archival of records or other purposes associated with various functions of the Authority. Where this Manual includes methods that are included in AS 1100.501, the Manual generally complies with the Standard. Any exceptions or deviations from AS 1100.501 are noted in the text as appropriate. Any matters of drafting not covered by this Manual shall conform to the requirements set down in the various parts of AS 1100 Technical Drawing Structural Engineering Drawing and all other relevant Australian Standards.
OTB005
Issue 1 Revision 0 (09 July 2007)
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 2
DEFINITIONS
Definitions
DEFINITIONS
The following list of definitions of terms commonly used on bridge drawings is provided for the guidance. The list of definitions listed below as well as those adopted for use by AS 5100 should be used in preference to other terms. A more comprehensive list will be found in: AS/NZS 1100.501 - Technical Drawing AS 1348.1 - Road and Traffic Engineering - Glossary of Terms Road Design and Construction The RTA Road Design Guide Abutment Afflux the part of the substructure which supports the superstructure at its extremities the rise in water level on the upstream side of a construction in a stream (bridge or culvert) relative to the water level on the downstream side of the construction the geometric form of the centreline (or other reference line) of a carriageway with respect to the horizontal and vertical axes horizontal - plan geometry of the road vertical - elevation geometry of the road a relatively short length of carriageway leading up to a bridge, including embankments, pavement and safety barriers a reinforced concrete slab supported on the abutment curtain wall and the approach fill a mixture of bituminous binder and aggregate with or without with a mineral filler produced hot in a mixing plant, delivered spread and compacted while hot used as a road surface a level datum, uniform throughout Australia, based on an origin determined from observations of mean sea level at tide guage stations, located at more than 30 points along the Australian coastline a temporary bridge structure of latticed steel members designed for rapid assembly from prefabricated parts usually used in emergency situations to effect necessary repairs to structures the pegged centreline of the road alignment the slope of an embankment or wall given in the ratio of horizontal to vertical eg 2 to 1, 1.5 to 1 a device for transmitting horizontal and vertical forces of a bridge superstructure to the supporting structure
Alignment
Approaches Approach Slab Asphalt
Australian Height Datum Bailey Bridge
Base Centreline Batter Bearing (structural)
OTB005
Issue 1 - Revision 0 (09 July 2007 )
Page 1 of 7
Definitions
Bearing (surveying)
The bearing of a line is the angle measured clockwise from grid north to the subject line and is given in degrees, minutes and seconds. The bearing of the Control Line shall always be given in the direction of increasing chainage along the line. a defined mark of a permanent nature, the level of which, relative to some datum, has been determined or assumed and to which the level of other points may be related having physical properties similar to those of bitumen or tar, or containing substances having such properties Computer Aided Drafting that portion of a road or bridge devoted particularly to the use of vehicles inclusive of shoulders and auxillary lanes shall mean concrete which is cast directly into its final position generally vertical or inclined load bearing members that form part of a pier. The portion of a cast-in-place pile that significantly extends above the existing surface level shall also be termed a column shall mean a reinforced concrete barrier, which conforms to the Barrier shape and height requirements of the Australian Standard AS 5100 Bridge Design, placed a nominal distance from the centreline of carriageway a provision made in a structure or pavement to allow contraction of Joint components, induced by temperature change or other causes, to occur in a controlled manner a joint made during the placing of concrete or pavement base material to divide the work into parts for convenience of construction or to provide for unavoidable interruption to placing lines on a map or plan joining all points of the same level those documents which form part of the "Formal Instrument of Agreement" which is executed between the Contractor and the Principal, and which includes a copy of the Tender, Drawings, Specification, General and Special Conditions of Contract the level shown on the drawings representing the extent of the work in the foundations to be included in a lump sum tender a line, generally at or near the centreline of a road, on which design is based and from which measurements for setting out construction may be conveniently made
Bench Mark
Bituminous CAD Carriageway Cast-in-Place (Cast-in-situ) Column
Concrete Safety
Contraction
Construction Joint
Contours Contract Documents
Contract Level Control Line
OTB005
Issue 1 - Revision 0 (09 July 2007 )
Page 2 of 7
Definitions
Coordinates
distances measured in a certain way from fixed straight lines (axes of reference) which intersect at the origin - used to locate a point. Systems include MGA and ISG a short projection supporting a beam at its end and designed to Provide adequate bearing on the structure beneath (a) the thickness of concrete between a reinforcing bar, tendon or duct and the nearest surface of a concrete member (b) the depth of material between the surface of the ground or carriageway and the top of a culvert or pipe a covered channel consisting of one or more adjacent pipes or enclosed cells of rectangular or other shape, for conveying a watercourse or stream below formation level. a narrow continuous reinforced concrete vertical wall forming part of an abutment to prevent the earth fill from spilling into the bearings a defined horizontal or level plane to which the relative elevations of other points may be referred the bridge floor directly carrying traffic loads a required level of the road as a basis for construction which is generally located on a control line, such as a base centreline, a true centreline, or gutter lip line or any other line so nominated shall mean the rear face of the curtain wall or the end of the superstructure concrete as applicable and as shown in Figure 2.1 the surface of the earth formation existing at the bridge site prior to construction of bridge The term Natural Surface shall not be used a space between two parts of a structure or slab formed to allow Joint relative movements to occur the widening at the base of a structure (pier or abutment) to spread the load above to the foundation material that part of the substructure which transfers the structure loads to the foundation material a load bearing member which supports the deck of a bridge a wire basket filled with selected stones used to retain earth or to prevent scour of the earth a coordinate reference system used in surveying part of a pier spanning between the piles or columns that supports the superstructure in a prestressed concrete member, the vertical deflection
Issue 1 - Revision 0 (09 July 2007 ) Page 3 of 7
Corbel Cover (nominal)
Culvert
Curtain Wall
Datum Deck Designed Surface Level
End of Deck
Existing Surface Level Expansion Footing Foundations Girder Gabion Grid Headstock Hog
OTB005
Definitions
caused by the application of prestress the lowest portion of the internal surface of a culvert or drain a raised border of rigid material formed at the edge of a carriageway can be either concrete or timber unreinforced concrete, commonly used in a thin layer to provide a clean even surface for support of reinforcement during construction the highest portion of the internal surface of a culvert or drain the distance between the ends of the deck (see definition of latter) a reinforced concrete beam placed a short distance from the abutment that supports the pavement and anchors horizontal forces for the reinforced concrete pavement a reinforced concrete slab extension of a reinforced concrete pavement that is supported on the abutment at one end and on a pavement anchor beam at the other end shall mean a railing, fabricated from either steel or aluminium, Barrier which consists of two rails separated by balusters, placed on the edges of a bridge structure for pedestrian safety a part of the substructure which supports the superstructure at ends of span and which transfers the loads on the superstructure to the foundations
Invert Kerb Mass Concrete
Obvert Overall Length of Deck Pavement Anchor Beam Pavement Transition Pedestrian
Pier
Pile Pile Cap Post-tensioning
shall mean a slender member driven into or formed in the ground to resist loads a structural member that connects and distributes the load from above to a group of piles a method of prestressing in which tendons are tensioned after the concrete has hardened eg segmental box girders, cast-in-place box girders and voided slabs concrete in which effective internal stresses are introduced deliberately, usually by means of tensioned steel tendons, prior to the application of service loading to the structure a method of prestressing in which tendons are tensioned before the concrete is placed eg PSC Planks, Super T Girders and PSC Driven Piles a steel section, usually a rolled steel angle, cast into the end of the structure or approach slab to protect concrete against damage by construction plant and vehicular traffic those services owned by other authorities, e.g. water mains, gas mains, power and telephone lines etc
Prestressed Concrete (PSC) Pretensioning
Protection Angle Public Utilities

OTB005
Definitions
Reduced Level Reinforced Concrete Reinforcement Reinforced Soil
a level relative to an agreed datum (see definition of Datum) concrete containing more than 0.2% by volume of reinforcing steel bars or fabric, usually of steel, embedded in concrete for the purposes of resisting particular stresses a method of constructing retaining walls or abutments in which suitable filling is retained by vertical steel or concrete units anchored by friction into the fill by means of galvanized steel strips a route trafficable by motor vehicles screens attached to bridges over roads or railways in order to prevent objects being dropped or thrown toward vehicles or trains below. The screens usually consist of steel posts or frames attached to concrete surfaces. Welded steel mesh panels are fixed to and span between the posts or frames and are attached to the concrete surface is a straight reference line between known fixed points from which the bridge structure is set out the angle between a line at right angles to the pavement centreline and the pier or abutment of a bridge (i) (ii) for end spans, the distance between the end of the superstructure and the centre of the nearest pier for intermediate spans, the distance between centres of piers
Road Safety Screens
Setting Out Line
Skew Angle Right Left Span Length -
Note: for design purposes the span length is the length between centres of supports Specification Substructure a detailed description of materials and workmanship required for the construction of the structure that part of the structure, i.e. piers and abutments which support the superstructure and which transfers the structure load to the foundation material the continuous transverse slope normally given to the carriageway at horizontal curves that part of the structure which is supported by the piers and abutments it includes the deck slab, girders / planks, railings etc the documents required by a contractor to produce his tender for a contract (these include a description of the contract work, general and special conditions of contract the specification and drawings, together with estimated quantities and a tender form)
OTB005 Issue 1 - Revision 0 (09 July 2007 ) Page 5 of 7
Superelevation Superstructure Tender Documents
Definitions
Tenderer Tendon
a person or firm who submits a price for the construction of the Works a tension element usually made up of a number of steel strands or wires, used in a concrete member, to impart prestress shall mean a railing, fabricated from steel, which consists of one or two parallel rails and a series of support posts at varying centres, placed on a reinforced concrete parapet immediately adjacent to traffic lanes to restrict lateral movement of vehicles a frame structure comprised of steel or timber that acts as a beam the area of the cross section of the stream at right angles to the direction of flow, up to the flood level assumed a method for the determination of required waterways and drainage requirements for a structure the widening of an existing pavement or carriageway generally without alteration of level the clear width, measured at right angles to the longitudinal centreline of the bridge, between the inner traffic faces of the bridge, i.e. the bottom inside face of the concrete safety barriers or face of traffic railing, whichever projects inwards the most, or between the bottom of kerbs where kerbs are located forward of traffic or other barriers the clear width, measured at right angles to the longitudinal centreline of the bridge, from the extreme inside portion of the pedestrian barrier to the extreme portion of the footway side of the traffic barrier, truss or girder, or to the bottom of the kerb face the width of that portion of a roadway, excluding shoulders, placed above the sub-grade for the support of, and to form a running surface for, vehicular traffic the part of the road between the outer edges of the shoulders the whole width between abutting property boundaries when the road is in a surveyed road reserve a wall at abutments that extends beyond the bridge to retain earth behind the abutment an extension of an end wall at a culvert used to retain earth behind the culvert
Traffic Barrier Railing
Truss Waterway Area Waterway Calculations Widening Width of Carriageway
Width of Footway
Width of Pavement Width of Road Formation Width of Road Reserve Wing Wall
Work-asExecuted Plans
a set of A1 size black and white paper plans on which all variations to the original design, made during construction, are recorded in red ink, in accordance with the requirements of Section 16 of this Manual
OTB005
NOMINAL JOINT GAP
NOMINAL JOINT GAP
APPROACH SLAB OR APPROACH PAVEMENT
OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK
END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE
PSC PLANK
SUPER T GIRDER
DECKS OF SEMI-INTEGRAL BRIDGES
NOMINAL JOINT GAP
NOMINAL JOINT GAP
NOMINAL JOINT GAP
END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE NOMINAL JOINT GAP
DECKS OF FULLY ARTICULATED BRIDGES
KP2F21.dgn
END OF DECK DEFINITION

FIGURE 2.1
SECTION 3
TYPES OF DRAWINGS
Types of Drawings
3
3.1 GENERAL
TYPES OF DRAWINGS
All drawings produced by the Authoritys Bridge Engineering Section are classified into three main categories:

SKETCHES (including proposals and temporary works) REGISTERED DRAWINGS STANDARD DRAWINGS
3.2
DEFINITIONS
Sketches shall mean a plan or a set of plans showing graphical information that will not form a permanent part of the work. Proposal Sketches shall mean a plan or set of plans prepared to depict what is considered to be the most appropriate type of structure for the site under consideration. These types of drawings have two formats ie Concept Sketches and Proposals Sketches. Proposal sketches prepared by the Authority shall be registered in the Bridge Engineering CAD registration system as sketches. Sketches shall not be provided with Cover Sheets. Registered Drawings shall mean a plan or a set of plans showing permanent work on any existing or proposed bridge or road asset and shall include a Cover Sheet and Contents Sheet where necessary. These drawings shall carry a Plan Registration Number supplied by the RTAs Micrographics Unit, or other issuing unit. Where possible, the Plan Registration Number shall be obtained prior to the commencement of project detailing. Standard Drawings shall mean drawings that have been produced by the RTA or consultants to depict the typical detailing required for various items of work, to eliminate repetition of drafting and to ensure that details used are common both in content and presentation.
3.3
SKETCHES
Sketches shall be prepared in accordance with the relevant Sections and Clauses of this Manual. Sketches prepared by the Authoritys Bridge Engineering Section, shall be registered within each project in accordance with Clause 3.7 of this Manual. Sketches prepared for the Authority by consultants shall be documented in accordance with the Quality System operating within respective offices.
3.4
PROPOSAL SKETCHES
All Proposal Sketches shall be prepared in accordance with Section 18 of this Manual. Proposal Sketches prepared by the Authoritys Bridge Engineering Section shall be registered as Sketches under the Bridge Engineering Section registration system in accordance with Clause 3.6 of this Manual with the label "Registration Number of Plans" in the title block being changed to read "Sketch Number" (see Figures 3.4.1 and 3.4.2). Proposal Sketches shall not be formally registered with the Authoritys Micrographics Unit.
OTB005
Issue 1- Revision 0 (09 July 2007)
Page 1 of 5
Types of Drawings
Proposal Sketches prepared for the Authority by consultants shall be documented in accordance with the Quality System operating within respective offices and shall ensure that the requirements as detailed in Section 18 of this Manual are met.
3.5 3.5.1
STANDARD DRAWINGS RTA Bridge Standard Drawings.

RTA Standard Bridge Drawings are intended to be a source of information and RTA requirements. They are produced in the following three categories: (i) Standard drawings that may be used without any site-specific adjustment or any other change. A typical example of this category of standard drawings is the standard drawing for Name Plates. Standard drawings of this category are provided to the Contractor in the Tender Documents and are not to be included in any set of bridge drawings. Standard drawings that are intended for use with minimal modifications and generally only require additional information to be added. Some typical examples of this category of standard drawings are the Bar Shapes Diagram (which requires the inclusion of Zshapes), reinforced concrete driven piles (which requires the inclusion of design information in accordance with the Design Information drawings) and other similar standard drawings. These RTA Standard Bridge Drawings must be included in each set of bridge drawings that has a separate Registration Number and drawings must have a title block consistent with the other drawings in the set. The words standard drawing shall not be used in the title block. The name of the drawing will be that describing the contents, i.e. Bar Shapes Diagram, Reinforced Concrete Driven Pile Details etc. (iii) Standard drawings intended to be used as a source of information on standard detailing of often used elements and details. Drawings produced on the basis of information provided on this category of RTA standard drawings generally require design input and more extensive modification than category (ii) standard drawings. Typical examples of this category of standard drawings are barrier railing drawings and drawings for prestressed concrete elements (planks, Super-T girders). These need to be modified to depict the appropriate (span) lengths, skew angles, mass of elements, design information, etc. RTA Standard Bridge Drawings that contain standard details such as small movement joints, dowel details, cast-in-angles etc, are intended to provide standard solutions. Only those details that are applicable for the subject bridge shall be reproduced in the drawings. These drawing prepared on the basis of this category of RTA Standard Bridge Drawings must be included in each set of bridge drawings that has a separate Registration Number and must have a title block consistent with other drawings in the set. The words standard drawing shall not be used in the title block. The name of the drawing will be that describing the contents, i.e. 10 m Span PSC Plank, or similar.
(ii)
3.5.2
Project Specific Standard Drawings.

On large projects, such as Design and Construct projects and similar, Project Specific standard drawings may sometimes be prepared to rationalise design, minimise the volume of drawing and reduce the cost of construction through standardisation of structural elements and details.
OTB005
Page 2 of 5
Types of Drawings
Where such standard drawings and/or standard details are produced and are used for a number of bridges and culverts, they shall be included in each separate set of bridge or culvert drawings and they shall comply with requirements detailed in Clauses 3.5.1 (i) and (ii) above. In particular, details which vary from bridge to bridge in these Design and Construct and similar projects shall be fully detailed in each set of drawings. Where such project-specific standard drawings are used for structures such as retaining walls, gantries for signs, etc (these are generally parts of non-bridge drawings), they need not be included in each set of drawings. However, if the standard drawings are not included in each set of drawings, there shall be a cross-reference to the relevant standard drawing sheet and the registration number. Further, required necessary minor variations to the standard drawings (to suit their application for a particular location) must be shown on the standard drawings.
3.6
REGISTERED DRAWINGS
Registered Drawings for all permanent works shall be prepared by the Authoritys Bridge Engineering Section shall be in accordance with the relevant Sections and Clauses of this Manual and shall be registered through the RTAs Micrographics Section. See Clause 3.10 of this Manual. Registered Drawings for all permanent works shall be prepared by consultants shall be in accordance with the relevant Sections and Clauses of this Manual. A Plan Registration Number shall be obtained from the RTAs Micrographics Unit and supplied to the consultant for inclusion on the drawings.
3.7
REGISTRATION OF SKETCHES AND DRAWINGS IN BRIDGE ENGINEERING

All Sketches and Registered Drawings prepared in the RTAs Bridge Engineering Section shall be registered under the Bridge Engineering Sections registration system in accordance with the following procedure: For all new projects, a CAD Number shall be obtained from the Leader, CAD Development, the officer responsible for the maintenance of electronic registers for all Sketches and Registered Drawings. CAD Numbers shall consist of a letter and a one or more digit number with the letter chosen being dependant upon the functional area from which the project originated ie D denotes Design Functional Area A denotes Asset Functional Area Where projects proceed to final design, a Plan Registration number shall be obtained and provided to the Leader, CAD Development. The Leader, CAD Development shall be advised of all new Registered Drawings and Sketches prepared on the CAD system as well as any drawings / sketches transfered from one directory to another, in order that the relevant register can be continually updated. Electronic data received from sources external to Bridge Engineering Section as well as sketches prepared by hand by any officer shall also be registered under the relevant CAD number on the CAD system.
For existing projects, where a Proposal Number has been previously issued, the CAD Number shall be the Proposal Number.
OTB005 Issue 1- Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 3 of 5
Types of Drawings
Sketches and drawings prepared by Consultants shall be registered in accordance with the quality system that exists in the respective consultants office.
3.8
CAD FILE NAMES FOR REGISTERED DRAWINGS

For drawings prepared by the Authoritys Bridge Engineering Section, the CAD file name for Registered Drawings shall consist of the CAD Number and a set of alphanumeric characters abbreviating the title of the drawing. Registered Drawing CAD filenames shall have a maximum of eight characters. eg D7ACA where D7 denotes DESIGN CAD NUMBER where AC denotes ABUTMENT CONCRETE (drawing title) where A denotes SHEET A (where two or more sheets are used) See Figure 3.8.1. For drawings prepared by Consultants, the CAD Filenames used shall conform to the requirements of the quality system operating within the respective consultants office.
3.9
CAD NUMBERS AND CAD FILE NAMES FOR SKETCHES

Where sketches are required in projects and they are prepared by the Authoritys Bridge Enginerering Section, a project sketch number shall be used for all sketches and it shall consist of the letter K followed by the CAD number only. The Project Sketch Number shall be shown in the title block as KD104 for all sketches in the same project, where D104 is the CAD Number allocated to the project under the Bridge Section registration system. Where there is more than one sketch for a particular project, the individual CAD Filename for each sketch shall have a unique number and this shall be recorded below the bottom left hand corner of the title block. Typical CAD Filenames within a project could be shown as: KD104CONSA where CONSA denotes Concept Sketch - Sheet A KD104CONSB where CONSB denotes Concept Sketch - Sheet B KD1O4CONSO1A where CPO1A denotes Concept Sketch Option 1 Sheet A KD1O4CONSO1B where CPO1B denotes Concept Sketch Option 1 Sheet B The CAD file name for Sketches shall consist of the letter 'K' followed by the CAD Number and a set of alphanumeric characters abbreviating the title of the sketch. Sketch CAD filename should have as few characters as is necessary. eg KD10PROPS(CONS) where 'K' denotes it is a sketch where D10 denotes DESIGN CAD NUMBER where PROPS denotes PROPOSAL SKETCH (title of the sketch) where CONS denotes CONCEPT SKETCH (title of the sketch) See Figures 3.4.1 and 3.4.2. KA10BBA
OTB005
Page 4 of 5
Types of Drawings
where 'K' denotes it is a sketch where A10 denotes ASSET CAD NUMBER where BB denotes BAILEY BRIDGE (title of the sketch) where A denotes SHEET A
See Figure 3.9.1. Where sketches are required in projects and they are prepared by Consultants, they shall be numbered in accordance with the quality system operating within respective consultants office.
3.10
REGISTRATION OF DRAWINGS WITH MICROGRAPHICS

All drawings for permanent works produced by the Authoritys Bridge Engineering Section or by Consultants for the Authority for bridges and structures that will become the property of the Authority, shall be formally registered with the RTAs Micrographics Section. The following information shall be provided to the Micrographics staff at the beginning of the project in order that a "Registration Number of Plans" can be reserved: Highway, Main Road, Freeway or Motorway Number Local Government Area Name eg Shire of Singleton / City of Greater Taree The name of the river/creek/road/railway line etc that the structure crosses The location of the structure eg the distance from the nearest major town Where drawings are being prepared for the widening or rehabilitation of an existing structure, the "Registration Number of Plans" of the existing structure shall be provided to Micrographics staff so that all plans for the same structure can be cross referenced appropriately. Where drawings for permanent works are prepared by consultants, the consultant shall be supplied with a Registration Number which has been sourced from the RTAs Micrographics Unit.
OTB005
Page 5 of 5
SECTION 4
DRAWING SHEETS AND TITLE BLOCKS
Drawing Sheets and Title Blocks
4
4.1 SHEET SIZES
DRAWING SHEETS AND TITLE BLOCKS
The RTAs Bridge Engineering Branch uses three standard sheet sizes for drawings and sketches. These sheet sizes are in agreement with the International Standard Sheet Sizes Series A and are suitable for microfilming. All drawings and/or sketches produced by the Authoritys Bridge Engineering Branch or by Consultants for the Authority or for bridges that will become the property of the Authority shall be on a sheet with sizes being as shown in Table 4.1. TABLE 4.1 - STANDARD SHEET SIZES
ISO SIZE
A1 A3 A4
OVERALL SIZE
841 x 594 420 x 297 297 x 210
MARGINS LHS GENERAL

56 28 20 14 7 7
CLEAR DRAWING AREA

771 x 566 385 x 283 283 x 183
Drawings provided for formal approval by the Principal Bridge Engineer or other delegated officer, shall be A1 in size and they shall be printed on tracing paper. Drawings provided by consultants for formal acceptance by the Principal Bridge Engineer or other delegated officer, shall be A1 in size and they shall be printed on tracing paper.
4.2
TITLE BLOCKS
For work performed by the RTAs Bridge Engineering Branch, cells have been created on the CAD System for each type of sheet used and these symbols come complete with the appropriate size title block, the size of which shall not be altered. The cell for each sheet type is stored in the Public Cell Library on the CAD System and can be readily accessed. Title block dimensions and location for A1 size sheets are given in Figure 4.2.1(a). Title block dimensions and location for A3 size sheets are given in Figure 4.2.1(b). Title block dimensions and location for A4 size sheets are given in Figure 4.2.1(c). The information that must be provided in the title block on each sheet is as follows: Road type and number eg Main Road No 246, Highway No 10 Local Government Area name eg Shire of Byron, City of Greater Taree (Council names shall not be used see Clause 4.5) Title and location of the bridge or structure Bridge Name (as appropriate for work on existing bridges) Work description (as appropriate for work on existing bridges) Plan Registration Number RTA Bridge Number (in the format BXXXXX) Sheet number and Issue Issue Status
OTB005
Issue 1 Revision 2 ( 31 March 2011 )
Page 1 of 3
Title blocks to be used on drawings prepared for the RTA by external consultants shall be submitted to the RTA for approval prior to commencement of drafting activities.
4.3
ORDER OF SHEETS IN A SET OF DRAWINGS

The order of the sheets in a set of drawings should follow the logical order of the construction procedure of the structure itself and shall be as follows. Cover Sheet General Arrangement Foundations ie Piles, Pile and / or Footing Layout, Rock Anchors etc Reinforced Soil Walls (if included in the Bridge Contract) Substructure ie Abutments Concrete Reinforcement Piers Concrete Reinforcement Bearings Superstructure ie Girders, Planks etc Deck Setting out (if necessary) Concrete (including accessories) Reinforcement Expansion Joints (as required) Cover Plates (as required) Barriers (if applicable) Approach Slabs (if included in the Bridge Contract) Bar Shapes Diagram Approach Slabs (if NOT included in the Bridge Contract) Reinforced Soil Walls (if NOT included in the Bridge Contract) The Cover Sheet of any set of drawings shall be numbered 1. Where there are too many sheets to be listed on the Cover Sheet of a set of drawings, a Contents Sheet shall be provided and the Contents Sheet shall be numbered 2. Where a Contents Sheet is not required, the General Arrangement sheet shall be numbered 2 and each following sheet shall be numbered in sequence beginning with Sheet No 3, 4, 5 etc. Blocks of numbers for suites of sheets (ie for 100 for abutments, 200 for piers etc) shall not be used. Where drawings are prepared by consultants, drawing numbers shall not contain the consultants reference numbers in any form. The sheet number recorded in the title block of each sheet is subject to preceeding sheets and is dependant on the number of sheets required to adequately illustrate each element of the structure. Where more than one sheet is needed to adequately illustrate an element or elements of the structure, the sheet title, followed by Sheet A, Sheet B, Sheet C etc shall be shown both in the title block and in the schedule of drawings on the cover sheet of the set of drawings. The terms Sheet 1, Sheet 2 etc shall not be used.
OTB005
Page 2 of 3
4.4
STANDARD DRAWING SHEETS

Drawings sheets used for all work prepared by the RTAs Bridge Engineering Branch shall conform to the current version of RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB001. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB001 is shown in Figure 4.4.1 For drawings prepared by the RTAs Bridge Engineering Branch, the contact details given in the Title Block for the approving manager, as well as the approving managers title shall be amended as required. For drawings prepared for the RTA by consultants, drawing sheets shall conform to the current version of RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB041. Where the drawings have been prepared for offices other than Bridge Engineering Branch, the details provided in the title block for approving officers shall be amended as required for each respective office. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB041 is shown in Figure 4.4.2. Drawing sheets for all work prepared by Consultants for Design and Construct or Public Private Partnership type contracts shall conform to the current version of RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB100. Space is provided in the title block for the design consultants name and logo as well as the contractors name and logo. Reference file details, amendment / revision description, scales etc shall be entered in the respective spaces provided. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB100 is shown in Figure 4.4.3. In all instances, the Approved for Use box and the standard drawing number box located on the drawing sheet, as well as their respective contents, shall be removed when the drawings are incorporated in a set of detail drawings.
4.5
LOCAL GOVERNMENT AREA NAMES

The name of the area of land in which the bridge is located, ie the Local Government Area (LGA) name, shall be in accordance with the information in Government Gazette notices. This information is contained in the LGA Listing prepared by the Land Information and Titles Section of the Real Estate Branch of the RTA and each LGA has been allocated a specific number. Where Local Government Areas are defined as either a shire, city or municipality eg Shire of Sutherland, City of Bankstown, Municipality of Leichhardt, this definition must be included in the LGA name in the drawing title blocks and on drawing set Cover Sheets. Where the Local Government Area is not defined as either a shire, city or municipality, the information included in drawing title blocks shall be as listed in the LGA listing as prepared by the Land Information and Titles Section of the Real Estate Branch of the RTA, followed by the letters LGA (eg Goulburn Mulwaree LGA, Great Lakes LGA). Where a bridge can be identified as being in two Local Government Areas (ie where the LGA boundary is given as either in the middle or edge of a watercourse) the name of both LGAs shall be included in the title block and on the drawing set Cover Sheet, with the structure being registered under the LGA in which Abutment A of the bridge is located. No reference shall be made to the name of the council that administers the area of land in which the bridge is located in the Title Blocks or on drawing set Cover Sheets, unless the drawings are being prepared for a Council Contract.
OTB005
Page 3 of 3
SHEET BORDER 4
94
10
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH
ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NEW SOUTH WALES
110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150
140
40
PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
DESIGN
50
DRAWING
RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS:
CAD No
KP2F421A.dgn
47 80 180 55 45
SHEET BORDER
FIGURE 4.2.1 (a)
10
10
SENIOR BRIDGE ENGINEER (NEW DESIGN)
SHEET No
ISSUE
10
20
PREPARED
CHECKED
REGISTRATION No OF PLANS
20
CLIENT:
20
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING BRANCH
THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT
32
135
42
30
63
31
PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING
CHECKED
SKETCH No
FIGURE 4.2.1(b)
SUPERVISING BRIDGE ENGINEER (NEW DESIGN)
29
ALTERNATIVE POSITION OF TITLE BLOCK
FIGURE 4.2.1(c)
105 4
45
31
51
6 8
DRAWING: CAD No KP2F421C.dgn
SKETCH No:
RTA DRAWING No RTAB001 ISSUE 11 MAR 2011
FIGURE 4.4.1
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING BRANCH 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
CLIENT:
CHECKED
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
KP2F441.dgn
THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.
RTA DRAWING No RTAB041 ISSUE 9 MAR 2011
10
SHEET BORDER
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH

0.7 mm line thickness (all full lines)
10
3.5mm text 32
7 mm text
5mm text
ABC CONSULTANTS
10 DESIGN CRESCENT
5mm text
CLIENT XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
Box required on General Arrangement drawing only
OLYMPIC PARK SYDNEY NSW 2158 PHONE FACSIMILE
35
135
2.5mm text
2.5mm text
XXXXXXXX PHONE FACSIMILE
PREPARED 5mm text
CHECKED
3.5mm text 19 7mm text 10 3.5mm text 3.5mm text 3.5mm/5mm text
ACCEPTED
DESIGN DRAWING
APPROVED DESIGN QA RECORDS
RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: SHEET No

DIRECTOR
2.5mm text 2mm text
PRINCIPAL BRIDGE ENGINEER
DATE
ISSUE
CAD No
2mm text 2.5mm text 80 SHEET 115 135 180 BORDER
TITLE BLOCK FOR CONSULTANT DESIGNS FIGURE 4.4.2
5.5
10
10
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH
CLIENT

APPROVED
CHECKED
RTA BRIDGE NUMBER

DESIGN QA RECORDS
ISSUE STATUS: SHEET No ISSUE
DIRECTOR
CAD No
RTA DRAWING No RTAB100 ISSUE 1 OCT 2010
3.5mm ARIAL FONT
3.5mm ARIAL FONT
HIGHWAY No XX
SHIRE OF XXXXXX 30
BRIDGE OVER FEATURE RIVER

5mm ARIAL FONT
AT XX.Xkm DIRECTION OF PLACE SHEET TITLE

RTA REGISTRATION No OF PLANS
2mm ARIAL FONT

ISSUE STATUS
XXXX XXX BC XXXX

RTA BRIDGE No SHEET No ISSUE
DRAWING STATUS
BXXXXX
11
12
10
3.5mm ARIAL FONT
76
38
27
14
155
63 5mm ARIAL FONT
FIGURE 4.4.3
DRAWING FILE LOCATION / NAME
SCALES ON A1 SIZE DRAWING
DESIGNER
CONTRACTOR
HIGHWAY No XX
SHIRE OF XXXXXX
DATUM : MGA / AHD

0
EXTERNAL REFERENCE FILES REV DATE AMENDMENT / REVISION DESCRIPTION WVR No APPROVAL TITLE NAME
5m
BRIDGE OVER FEATURE RIVER INSERT DESIGN INSERT CONTRACTORS DETAILS AND LOGO HERE
RTA REGISTRATION No OF PLANS
XXXXXXX
01
XX.XX.XX
ISSUED FOR XXXXX
XX
XX
DRAFTING DRAFTING CHECK DESIGNER
1 0.5 0 200 100 0 1 000 2 000 3 000mm 200 400 600 800 1 000mm
AT XX.Xkm DIRECTION OF PLACE SHEET TITLE
INSERT REFERENCE FILE DETAILS HERE
INSERT AMENDMENT / REVISION DESCRIPTION HERE
CONSULTANTS DETAILS AND LOGO HERE
DESIGN CHECK PROJECT MANAGER

ISSUE STATUS
XXXX XXX BC XXXX

RTA BRIDGE No SHEET No ISSUE
1 000
PROJECT DIRECTOR
500
DRAWING STATUS
BXXXXX
COPYRIGHT RTA, NSW 2010
SECTION 5
SETTING OUT
Setting Out
5
5.1 GENERAL
SETTING OUT
The geometry of the road defines the shape of the bridge (more particularly the deck). The geometry of the deck therefore must be defined before that of the substructure and footings and/or piles. Road design information and bridge site survey information provide relevant coordinates, alignment data etc. Generally setting out is carried out by one of two methods; a) b) alignment method (chainage and offset) a coordinate system
For structures which are on a straight alignment, setting out should be carried out using the control line. The use of chainages and offsets is the preferred method, however, coordinates may be used. Chainages and offsets or, alternatively, coordinates may be used to locate the centre of elements ie spread footings etc as shown in Figure 5.6 whilst the dimensions for each particular element shall be related to the defined location and shall be normal to the element centreline (defined by a grid bearing). The preparation of a CAD Base Plan as a design aid for the purposes of checking the setting out of structures is strongly recommended as it may be used to verify dimensions. For designs prepared by the Authority, The Bridge Deck Geometry program (loaded on Bridge Engineering PCs) may be used for the purpose of calculating/checking distances to required offset points and calcualtion of the reduced levels of offset points Figure 5.1 (Sheets 1 and 2) illustrates an appropriate method for the setting out of a bridge deck where the bridge is on a curved horizontal alignment. Where there are multiple alignments, including spiral curves, an appropriate method is the use of chainages, offsets and coordinates in conjunction with a CAD base plan. Chainages and coordinates of points on the control line shall be given with a bearing and offset to other points required.
5.2
CHAINAGES
Chainages, give along the Control Line, shall be adopted from the road design and/or site survey information provided. Where possible and practical, chainages for the centrelines of piers, bearings etc shall be given in metres to the nearest 0.005 metre, eg. 320.605. Chainages being used for calculating purposes shall not be rounded off. Chainages with values in excess of 1 km shall be given in metres, eg. 320.605 NOT 2 km 320.605 except at the beginning of the alignment or when the km values change along the alignment. In such cases the full chainage shall be shown in the following manner: eg 2km 320.605.
OTB005
Page 1 of 7
Setting Out
5.3
COMPASS BEARING
The bearing of a line is the angle measured clockwise from grid north to the subject line and is given in degrees, minutes and seconds. The bearing of the Control Line shall always be given in the direction of increasing chainage along the line. The bearing of a line is relative to where one is stationed, See Figure 5.3.
5.4
COORDINATES
The coordinate system adopted for a project may be an arbitrary local one, ISG (Integrated Survey Grid) or GDA (Geocentric Datum of Australia). The coordinates are normally quoted in metres to the nearest 0.001 metre. In recording both GDA and ISG coordinates, the Easting is always placed before the Northing. The following procedure is recommended for the listing of coordinates. At the head of any listing of coordinates the figures common to all coordinates are noted as constants. These constants, one for the Eastings and one for the Northings are subtracted from all coordinates in the coordinate list and in the computations, in order to avoid carrying redundant digits. A gap shall be placed between the third and fourth figures, and also between the sixth and seventh figures from the decimal point to assist in the alignment of figures, as indicated in the example below. E Location A5 B27 B39 C11 200 000.000 155.161 311.002 101.113 115.354 N 1 100 000.000 115.153 351.854 295.695 015.706
The coordinates shall be obtained from the road design and/or the site survey information. The method of calculating the length and bearing of a line between two coordinated points is given in Figure 5.4. Alternatively, where electronic survey or design information is available, required information may be measured directly from the electronic file. Generally, lists of coordinates can be obtained by electronic means and this information can be transferred to drawing files on the CAD System.
5.5
PILES
The setting out of the piles shall be shown on a Pile Layout. This drawing is not necessarily to scale but should have reasonable proportions. On curved bridges it is sometimes advantageous to exaggerate the curvature to show dimensions more clearly. Horizontal alignment data for the Control Line shall be provided on the pile layout drawing. The pile layout should be shown on Pile Detail Sheet where possible and include all information necessary for the positioning of the piles. Generally piles are in a straight line or groups.
OTB005
Page 2 of 7
Setting Out
Piles in one line:. The centreline of the pile group shall be defined by chainage and bearing to the Control Line with the location of each individual pile being dimensioned from the intersection of the control line and the centreline of piles, parallel / normal to the centreline of the piles. Piles in a group: The centre of the pile group shall be defined by a chainage and bearing to
the Control Line together with a dimension from the Control Line or alternatively by a set of coordinates with the location of each individual pile being dimensioned from centre of the pile group parallel / normal to the centreline of the piles.
that the location shown is at a nominated RL (usually the top of pile). Raked piles shall also have the degree of rake shown together with an arrow to indicate the direction of the rake in relation to the centreline of piles. Where raked piles are in two or more rows beneath a pilecap, a dimension between the design location of pile centrelines at the top of the finished pile shall be provided. For examples of pile setting out, refer to Section 6 of this Manual.
Raked piles - Where raked piles are used, a note shall be added to the drawing to indicate
5.6
FOOTINGS
The setting out of footings on structures with complicated geometry shall generally be shown on a Footing Layout, however on straight, square bridges, the location of footings can be clearly indicated on the plan of piers or abutments. The Footing Layout shall indicate plan dimensions of individual footings and relative position in relation to a known point, see Figure 5.6. Where a layout is a combination of piles and footings it shall be known as a Foundation Plan. The Footing Layout does not necessarily need to be to scale, however it should be reasonably proportioned. On curved bridges it is advantageous to exaggerate the curvature in order that dimensions may be shown more clearly. Horizontal alignment data for the Control Line shall be provided on the Footing Layout drawing.
5.7
PIERS AND ABUTMENTS

Each part of a pier or an abutment shall be defined from a known point (such as the intersection of the pier centreline or the end of deck and the Control Line. NEVER dimension from footings or piles when setting out columns, ALWAYS dimension from a known point. By always dimensioning from a known point, the chance of compounding any differences in location due to allowable construction tolerances can be greatly reduced.
Curved Bridges
Bridges on geometric and/or transition spirals and more particularly those on skews, could have supports of varying lengths. Ends of spans may not be parallel and this should be particularly noted when setting out the superstructure and wingwalls.
5.8
BEARINGS
Bearings shall be set out from either the pier centreline or abutment curtain wall and a known point eg. the intersection of the Control Line and the centreline of pier. Where bearings are not parallel to the pier centreline, the orientation shall be indicated on an enlarged detail. The setting out details shall be shown on the pier or abutment by means of formed holes for bearing anchor bolts or dowels as appropriate. A Northpoint shall be included on all Plan views where setting out information is shown.
OTB005
Page 3 of 7
Setting Out
5.9
GIRDERS
Girders are placed at bearing locations. Bearing locations shall be indicated on pier and abutment drawings.
Curved Bridges
Care shall be exercised when locating girders due to the variations caused by the curvature. It should be noted that variations become greater on skewed bridges. Steps for calculating spacing and length of girders - (using Figure 5.9 as an example). i. Given number of girders(n) and approximate spacing(s), locate outside girders at abutment and pier. Initially spacing should be worked out on centreline and front face of curtain wall. Spacing will be converted to skew. ii. pier
The width of the deck may vary between the abutment and pier and between the piers. In such cases the spacing of girders/planks must be adjusted so that x's are approximately equal and y's are approximately equal. Generally several locations need to be trialled to determine which is the best fit. When satisfied with the fit of the girders/planks in Span 1, repeat the procedure for Span 2 or, if required, other spans. Attempt to maintain the spacing at the pier and adjust the spacing at the abutment so that the 'xs' are approximately equal and so are the 'ys'.
iii.
iv.
When satisfied with spacing fit, the length of the girders needs to be determined. Determine the length of each individual girder from the centreline of the pier to the front face of the curtain wall and compare the differences.
v.
If the girders are to be the same length then the distance from the end of the girder to centreline of the pier or the front face of the abutment needs to vary across the span and from span to span. vi. Abutments and piers shall be checked to ensure that bearings will fit on headstocks. If the variation is too great, the skew of the supports may need to be adjusted to suit (ie supports may not be parallel).
Radial Supports
Radial supports are not normally considered when using girders but they may be an option provided that the length of the span on the outer curve is not significantly greater than that on inner curve. If the variation is not great, then constant length girders can be used. This can be achieved by varying the distance from centreline of pier to centreline of bearings The use of girders of many different lengths is neither practical or economical and should be avoided.
5.10
5.10.1
OTB005
DECK
General
Issue 1- Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 4 of 7
Setting Out
As stated in Clause 5.1, setting out must start with the deck and then moved down through girders, bearing, piers and abutments, and finally footings and/or pile caps and piles. In general, all bridge structures shall be set out in accordance with the principles shown in Figure 5.1
5.10.2
Determination of parameters For a bridge of length 30 m or less with a mid-ordinate of D = 50 mm or less, the horizontal alignment of the bridge shall be straight, ie. the chord of the arc between the ends of the deck. For a bridge over 30 m long with a horizontal mid-ordinate of D = 75mm or less, the horizontal alignment of the bridge shall also be straight, eg. a bridge 40m long with a Control Line on radius 2700m gives D = 74mm, so the bridge shall be straight. No increase in road width is necessary in such cases (other than that required by the RTA Road Design Guide). The mid-ordinate can be found with the formula: D = R-0.5 4R2 C2 See Figure 5.10(a) For any other bridge the horizontal alignment of the deck is to be set out on the curve or in chords of such length that the mid-ordinate between the chord and the curve does not exceed D = 5 mm. The maximum length of this chord can be found with the formula C = 40R. See Figure 5.10(a). However, for a simply-supported bridge when the length of the span is less than this chord, the horizontal alignment is to be set out from pier to pier. For spans up to and including 12 metres, where the mid-ordinate of individual spans is 10mm or less and the angular deviation from one span to the next is less than one degree(10 ), consideration shall be given to making individual spans straight. See Figure 5.10(b). If individual spans are set out as being straight on structures which will carry barrier railings, careful examination of railing joints shall be made to ensure that the angular difference can be accommodated.
5.10.3
Procedure Set up a Base Plan on CAD. The base plan initially includes Control Line outline of parapets, kerb lines, median, coordinates of main points, chainages, bearings, radii, etc. Location of piers, abutments may then be superimposed on the base plan. If drawn accurately many dimensions for elements may be measured directly off the plan. Information such as length of abutments, piers, angles of wing walls, lengths of railings etc may be measured. Although values will be correct if basic input is correct, they should be checked independently. Final details of deck setting out shall include a Plan, Cross Section and Table(s). See Figure 5.1, Sheets 1 and 2. On curved structures, where the piers, abutments and ends of superstructure are skewed to the Control Line, the setting out information at supports shall be given along the skew. The setting out data for all other chainage increments shall be given radially. See Figure 5.1, Sheets 1 and 2.
OTB005
Page 5 of 7
Setting Out
Skew angles for curved structures shall be defined in a Skew Diagram as shown on Sheet 2 of Figure 5.1 Reduced levels for selected points on the cross section shall be given to the top of the finished concrete surface, not the top of the asphalt wearing surface. The Plan view shall show the outline of the deck, the Control Line, the ends of deck and the pier centrelines. Locations of the deck accessories may be shown, however it is preferable that they be shown on a separate deck layout plan. The Plan view is generally not to scale and the curvature shall, in most cases be exaggerated for clarity. Setting Out Tables shall show the values of offsets and levels at chosen locations along bridge. Increments for cross sections taken along the bridge should not exceed the following: Radius (m) 50 100 150 200 300 400 500 1000 2000 and straight bridges Increment (m) 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 10.0
The increments shown are guidelines only and values should be adjusted to suit span lengths etc. 5.10.4 Bridge on a Curved Vertical Alignment For a bridge of length 30 m or less on a sag vertical curve only with a mid-ordinate over the length of the bridge of D = 50 mm or less, the vertical alignment of the bridge shall be straight. Levels can be calculated using the Vertical Curve Geometry program or the Bridge Deck Geometry program, each of which is loaded on Bridge Section PCs. The maximum increment used in the program and to be shown on Table of Levels shall be the value C. An example of setting out points that should be included are shown in Figure 5.1. Increments for cross sections taken along the bridge shall not exceed the following: (i) Increments determined for straight bridges or for bridges on a curved horizontal alignment above and (ii) The difference between the vertical curve and the chord between the two sections must not exceed 20mm.
5.10.5
Information required on drawings where it is not required for construction Where it is positively known that the provision of deck setting out information, as defined in Clauses 5.10.1 to 5.10.4 of this Manual, will not be required for construction purposes, such as on large Design/Construct/Maintain or Public Private Partnership type contracts where an interactive Design Model File, used in conjunction with survey equipment
OTB005
Page 6 of 7
Setting Out
method of setting out may be used, the information for deck offsets and Reduced Levels shall be provided on the drawings for records and maintenance purposes, however, the spacing of cross sections as defined in Clause 5.10.3 of this Manual may be increased to double the increments shown in Clause 5.10.03, up to R = 10 000m. The maximum increment will remain the same at 10.0m.
5.11
BARRIER RAILINGS
All types of barrier railings shall be divided into panels of a length which are not difficult to handle and erect. Approximate maximum panel lengths are; 6000 mm for traffic barrier railings and 3000 mm for pedestrian railings Panel lengths and post spacing should be calculated along a concrete edge (usually the inside top edge of the concrete safety barrier for traffic barrier railings and the outside edge of the footway for pedestrian railings). Spacing of posts and hence bolt groups, shall be given horizontally in accordance with Figure 5.11. Where traffic barrier railings are used, each panel shall have a maximum of two posts, as a general rule, to facilitate ease of erection. On rare occasions, it may be necessary to detail panels containing three posts to ensure that panels can be placed to clear expansion joints and other obstructions. The detailing of railing panels containing three posts shall be kept to an absolute minimum, especially on curved bridges. When structures are constructed on grades of less than 4%, anchor bolts for all types of railings shall be cast-in normal to the concrete surface. See Figure 5.11. When the grade on any structure is 4% or greater at any one point, anchor bolts for traffic barrier railings shall shall be cast-in so that they are truly vertical over the full length of the structure. See Figure 5.11. Where aluminium pedestrian barrier railings are used on any structure, the anchor bolts for the railing shall be cast-in so that they are truly vertical in all cases. See Figure 5.11. In all cases, the spacing of anchor bolt groups shall be given horizontally in accordance with Figure 5.11.
OTB005
Page 7 of 7
FROM
c OF PIER 1 L
CH 151.000
c OF PIER 2 L
TO
END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE ABUTMENT B CH 211.000 CH 241.000
CH 181.000
1 CH 145.475 CH 237.225 CH 156.347
CH 243.000 CH 244.681
2 CH 148.000 2 2 CH Z E a N b 2 -
SPAN 3 1 SPAN 1 PROVIDE SUFFICIENT RADIAL SECTIONS AT ENDS TO ENSURE CORRECT SETTING OUT SPAN 2 PROVIDE SUFFICIENT RADIAL SECTIONS AT ENDS TO ENSURE CORRECT SETTING OUT
PLAN
END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE ABUTMENT A FOR RADIAL SECTION DETAILS SEE TABLE No I FOR SKEW SECTION DETAILS SEE TABLE No II NOT TO SCALE
TABLE I - RADIAL SECTIONS UPSTREAM

CHAINAGE Z LOCATION (m) RADIAL BEARING (DEGREES) 145.475 148.000
END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE ABUTMENT A
DOWNSTREAM
4500 4500 600 RL AS SHOWN IN
CO-ORDINATES
POINT 1
POINT 2
POINT 3
POINT 4
POINT 5
600
EASTING a 4015.982 4016.105 4012.056 4008.737 4005.458 4002.218 3999.018 3995.858 3992.738 3989.660 3986.622 3983.627 3980.673 3977.761 3974.892 3972.065 3969.282 3966.542 3963.845 3961.193 3958.585 3956.418 3955.798
NORTHING b 3971.681 3968.231 3964.301 3960.561 3956.787 3952.978 3949.137 3945.262 3941.354 3937.415 3933.443 3929.440 3925.406 3921.341 3917.246 3913.122 3908.968 3904.786 3900.575 3896.337 3892.071 3888.082 3887.946
RL 198.493 198.512 198.522 198.531 198.553 198.572 198.589 198.602 198.613 198.622 198.627 198.630 198.630 198.628 198.623 198.615 198.604 198.591 198.574 198.556 198.549 -
RL 198.196 198.215 198.237 198.261 198.283 198.302 198.319 198.332 198.343 198.352 198.357 198.360 198.360 198.358 198.353 198.345 198.334 198.321 198.304 198.286 -
RL 198.823 198.842 198.859 198.872 198.883 198.892 198.897 198.900 198.900 198.898 198.893 198.885 198.874 198.861 198.844 198.826 198.804 198.795 198.776
RL 199.077 199.077 199.101 199.123 199.142 199.159 199.172 199.183 199.192 199.197 199.200 199.200 199.198 199.193 199.185 199.174 199.161 199.144 199.126 -
RL 4
CONTROL LINE MC01 3 2 1
TABLES I AND II
313.12543 312.41586 311.88349 311.28666 310.68983 310.09300 309.49617 308.89934 308.30251 307.70568 307.10885 306.51202 305.91518 305.31835 304.72152 304.12469 303.52786 302.93103 302.33420 301.73737 301.14054 300.97526 300.78451
199.663 199.682 199.699 199.712 199.723
151.000 156.000 161.000
SPAN 1
166.000 171.000 176.000

c PIER 1 L
181.000 186.000 191.000
RADIAL SECTION
199.732 199.737 199.740 199.740 199.738 199.733 199.725 199.714 199.701 199.684 199.666 199.644 199.623 199.601
1 SECTION 2 -
SPAN 2
196.000 201.000 206.000

c PIER 2 L
SKEW SECTIONS SIMILAR EXCEPT FOR X AND Y OFFSETS
211.000 216.000 221.000
GENERAL NOTES
SCALE:
1000 500 0 1000 2000 3000mm
OR AS SHOWN.
SPAN 3
226.000 231.000 236.000
POINTS 1, 2 AND 3 ARE GIVEN ON THE TOP SURFACE OF DECK CONCRETE.
END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE ABUTMENT B
241.000 243.000 244.681
SEE SHEET No 2 FOR HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT DATA FOR CONTROL LINE MC01.
TABLE II - SKEW SECTIONS
CHAINAGE Z LOCATION (m)
CO-ORDINATES
POINT 1
POINT 2
POINT 3
POINT 4
POINT 5
EASTING a 4012.056 4011.541 3993.359 3992.738 3992.119 3975.462 3974.892 3974.323 3958.948 3958.585
NORTHING b 3964.301 3963.725 3942.139 3941.354 3940.569 3918.068 3917.246 3916.424 3892.670 3892.071
RL 198.522 198.526 198.611 198.613 198.615 198.624 198.623 198.621 198.553 198.549
X 7105 7092 6623 6608 6593 6212 6200 6188 5869 5862
RL 198.223 198.227 198.331 198.333 198.336 198.358 198.357 198.356 198.298 198.295
Y 7008 6996 6553 6538 6524 6161 6149 6137 5831 5824
RL 198.819 198.822 198.890 198.892 198.893 198.888 198.886 198.884 198.805 198.801
X 7900 7886 7364 7347 7330 6906 6892 6879 6523 6515
RL 199.044 199.049 199.169 199.172 199.174 199.198 199.197 199.197 199.125 199.122
Y 7781 7768 7276 7261 7245 6842 6829 6816 6477 6469
RL 199.647 199.650 199.731 199.732 199.734 199.727 199.725 199.723 199.628 199.624
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING CLIENT
END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE ABUTMENT A
151.000 151.773 180.000 181.000 182.000 210.000 211.000 212.000 240.227 241.000
DIAPHRAGM CJ
c PIER 1 L
CJ CJ
c PIER 2 L
PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
CJ DIAPHRAGM
FIGURE 5.1
1
CAD No KP2F51A.dgn
IP CH 34 200.000
HCEN
RL 199.187
TP BRIDGE
TP
CH 34 151.000
CH 34 241.000
10 000
LENGTH OF VERTICAL CURVE = 200 000
CONTROL LINE MC01
VERTICAL ALIGNMENT DIAGRAM

NOT TO SCALE HTP1 HTP2
SKEW DIAGRAM
NOT TO SCALE
HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT DIAGRAM
TABLE 1 - HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT DATA FOR CONTROL MC01

POINT HCEN HTP1 HTP2 LOCATION CENTRE OF CIRCLE CHAINAGE 34 049.756 CHAINAGE 34 301.655 EASTING 4369.418 4087.068 3930.577 NORTHING 3643.844 4032.018 3838.315 233 58 8.7 203 54 1.0 BEARING IN BEARING OUT
FIGURE 5.1
BEARING 30 00 00"
BEARING 120 00 00"
BEARING 210 00 00"
30
STATION
BEARING 300 00 00"
INCREASING CHAINAGE
KP2F53
FIGURE 5.3
NORTH Y
D ( X - X , Y + Y ) 1 1 1 1
A ( X + X , Y + Y ) 1 1 1 1 BEARING ANGLE
O (X Y ) 11
X EAST
C ( X - X , Y - Y ) 1 1 1 1 Y
B ( X + X , Y - Y ) 1 1 1 1
THE LENGTH OF THE LINES OA, OB, OC AND OD IS GIVEN BY
2 2 ( X ) + ( Y ) 1 1
-1 O = TAN
( X) 1 ( Y) 1
= TAN -1
(DIFFERENCE IN EASTINGS) (DIFFERENCE IN NORTHINGS)
BEARING OF LINE OA IN FIRST QUADRANT = O OB IN SECOND QUADRANT = 180 - O OC IN SECOND QUADRANT = 180 + O OD IN SECOND QUADRANT = 360 - O
THE CO-ORDINATES OF A POINT (X Y ) GIVEN ITS DISTANCE (L) 11 AND BEARING ( O ) FROM A CO-ORDINATED POINT (X,Y) CAN BE CALCULATED BY THE FOLLOWING FORMULAE : X = X + L SIN O 1 Y = Y + L COS O 1
KP2F54
FIGURE 5.4
BEARING 86 2347.5"
BEARING 87 1939.3"
.7" BEARING 85 2755
BEARING 88 1531 .1"
E OF FRONT FAC CURTAINWALL S/B UTMENT A AB 3154" BEARING 84
c OF FOOTING AND L
AND PIER 4 S/B
FROM YASS
TO CANBERRA
FRONT FAC E OF CURTAINW ALL ABUTMENT B S/B BEARING 89 1124"
c OF FOOTING AND L PIER 1 S/B
c PIER 3 S/B L
PIER 2 S/B
c OF FOOT L ING
E 297 514.921 N 1138 809.966
E 297 517.233 N 1138 777.467
E 297 519.016 N 1138 744.935
E 297 520.271 N 1138 712.379
E 297 520.997 N 1138 679.796
E 297 512.072 N 1138 842.523

2000
2250
2250
2250
1750
4500
2250
4500
4500
4500
7500
2250
2250
2000
1750
1750
3410 1090
1750 3500
1750 3500
1750 3500
CH 485.000
1750
3500
CH 452.500
4370 5800
CH 387.500
4500
CH 420.000
1430
CH 354.900
BEARING 85 5552.6"
BEARING 86 5223.6"
5921.6" BEARING 84
c OF FOOTING AND L
c OF FOOTING AND L PIER 1 N/B
CE OF FRONT FA ALL CURTAINW NT A N/B ABUTME 84 251.7" BEARING
c PIER 3 N/B L
PIER 2 N/B
CH 370.880
CH 502.410
FRONT FACE OF CURTAINWAL L ABUTMENT B N/B BEARING 88 45"24.6"
c OF FOOTING L AND
CH 403.760
CH 436.640
CH 469.520
BEARING 87 4854.6"
PIER 4 N/B
CH 7 337.900
CH 517.510 SOUTHBOUND CONTROL LINE R 2 000 000
1250
1750
1750
1750
3000
NORTHBOUND CONTROL LINE

NORTHBOUND BRIDGE
c L
R 1 987 000
E 297 487.500 N 1138 857.094 E 297 490.623 N 1138 824.561 E 297 493.202 N 1138 792.079 E 297 495.246 N 1138 759.560 E 297 496.756 N 1138 727.011 E 297 497.731 N 1138 694.432
PLAN
c L DENOTES DIMENSION NORMAL TO OF FOOTING AND PIERS AND FRONT FACE OF CURTAINWALL AT ABUTMENTS L DENOTES DIMENSION PARALLEL TOc OF FOOTING AND PIERS AND FRONT FACE OF CURTAINWALL AT ABUTMENTS DIMENSIONS SHOWN FOR FOOTINGS ON SOUTHBOUND BRIDGE ARE TYPICAL FOR SIMILAR LOCATIONS ON NORTHBOUND BRIDGE NOT TO SCALE SEE SHEETS No 4 AND 5 FOR ABUTMENT FOOTING DETAILS AND SHEETS No 14 AND 15 FOR PIER FOOTING DETAILS.
GENERAL NOTES
SCALES AS SHOWN.
8 500
SOUTHBOUND BRIDGE
2250
c L
2250
1250
3000
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH
ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW
FIGURE 5.6
CHECKED
MANAGER, BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS
SHEET No
ISSUE
OUTER FACE OF CONCRETE SAFETY BARRIER

Y
c
Y
SHORTEST LENGTH OF PIER BETWEEN SUPPORTS
P1
A1 LONGEST LENGTH
P1-B1
G1
OF SUPPORT A1-A2
B1
G7
G2
FRONT FACE OF ABUTMENT CURTAINWALL c OF BEARINGS
G8
SHORTEST LENGTH OF SUPPORT
G3
CONTROL LINE
G9
B1-B2
G4
G10
OF BEARINGS
G5
G11
FRONT FACE OF ABUTMENT CURTAINWALL
G6
P2 A2
Y
G12
X
B2
X
OF BEARINGS
SPAN 1 LONGEST LENGTH BETWEEN SUPPORTS A2-P2 OUTER FACE OF CONCRETE SAFETY BARRIER
SPAN 2 c OF GIRDERS
FIGURE 5.9
MID-ORDINATE RULE
D
BASE
C(mm)
THE MID-ORDINATE, D, CAN BE FOUND USING THE FORMULA :
D = R- 4R-C
FIGURE 5.10(a)
DETERMINATION OF CURVATURE
D = 10mm OR LESS TYPICAL
ESS OR L 2 000 H1 NGT N LE CAL SPA TYPI
FIGURE 5.10(b)
R(m m
KP2F510
SPACING OF ANCHOR BOLT GROUPS

45
TOP OF PARAPET ON GRADE UP TO 4%
45
75
M20 ANCHOR BOLTS ANCHOR BOLTS CAST-IN NORMAL TO CONCRETE SURFACE c OF ANCHOR BOLT GROUP
ANCHOR BOLT GROUP ELEVATION FOR TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILINGS

FOR GRADES GREATER THAN 4%, ANCHOR BOLTS FOR ALL TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILINGS SHALL BE TRULY VERTICAL NOT TO SCALE

65
SPACING OF ANCHOR BOLT GROUPS 55
65
TOP OF PARAPET
75
55 TOP OF PARAPET
75
ON ANY GRADE
ON ANY GRADE
M20 ANCHOR BOLTS ANCHOR BOLTS CAST-IN NORMAL TO CONCRETE SURFACE c OF ANCHOR BOLT GROUP M20 ANCHOR BOLTS ANCHOR BOLTS CAST-IN TO BE TRULY VERTICAL IN ALL CASES c OF ANCHOR BOLT GROUP
ANCHOR BOLT GROUP ELEVATION FOR STEEL PEDESTRIAN BARRIER RAILINGS

NOT TO SCALE
ANCHOR BOLT GROUP ELEVATION FOR ALUMINIUM PEDESTRIAN BARRIER RAILINGS

NOT TO SCALE
FIGURE 5.11
KP2F511
SECTION 6
FOUNDATIONS
Foundations
6
6.1 GENERAL
FOUNDATIONS
Various types of foundation elements are used in bridge construction and these include: (a) (b) (c) (d) Piles framed to headstock - several types Pile/Pile cap combination Spread Footings Rock Anchors - commonly used in conjunction with footings
Drawings shall contain a layout plan to enable the correct setting out of foundation elements and appropriate notes (conforming to AS5100 - Bridge Design and RTA Technical Specifications) shall also be included.
6.2
6.2.1
PILING
Precast Reinforced Concrete Driven Piles For designs prepared by the Authoritys Bridge Engineering Section or Consultants that prepare drawings for the Authority or for bridges that will become property of the Authority, RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Numbers RTAB002A and RTAB002B (Reinforced Concrete Pile Design Information, Sheets A and B) are provided for use when preparing drawings for either of the two standard precast reinforced concrete pile designs (Normal Driving Conditions and Hard Driving Conditions). RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Number RTAB003 shall be used for pile drawings where normal driving conditions are known to exist, whilst RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Number RTAB004 shall be used for pile drawings where hard driving conditions are known to exist. Missing information, such as schedule values, dimensions, bar sizes and values in notes shall be completed using tables and details as shown on RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Number RTAB002A, however, sketches provided by the engineer responsible for the design, may show some variations which will need to be included on the drawing. A separate drawing shall be prepared, in each case, to provide details of the pile layout for the structure. This drawing shall clearly show the location of the test piles and representative piles. (See Clause 7 of RTA Specification B50). Where piles exceed 20 metres in length, the details provided in RTA Standard Drawing No RTAB048 (Epoxy Splice for Precast Concrete Piles) should be included on the pile drawings. Where piles are required to be spliced, the minimum depth below ground level to the splice shall be clearly shown on the drawings. The minimum depth shall be not less than 5 metres below the existing surface level or the design surface level, whichever is the lower. See RTA Standard Drawing Nos RTAB003 AND RTAB004 for the typical level of detailing required for these types of piles.
6.2.2
Prestressed Reinforced Concrete Driven Piles For designs prepared by the Authoritys Bridge Engineering Section or Consultants that prepare drawings for the Authority or for bridges that will become property of the Authority, RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Numbers RTAB0025 and RTAB0026 (Prestressed Concrete Pile Design Information, Sheets A and B) are provided for use when preparing drawings for either of the two standard prestressed reinforced concrete pile designs
OTB005
Page 1 of 5
Foundations
(Normal Driving Conditions and Hard Driving Conditions). RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Number RTAB027 (Prestressed Concrete Pile Normal Driving Conditions) shall be used for pile drawings where normal driving conditions are known to exist, whilst RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Number RTAB028 (Prestressed Concrete Pile Hard Driving Conditions) shall be used for pile drawings where hard driving conditions are known to exist. Missing information, such as schedule values, dimensions, bar sizes and values in notes shall be completed using tables and details as shown on RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Number RTAB0025, however, sketches provided by the engineer responsible for the design, may show some variations which will need to be included on the drawing. A separate drawing shall be prepared, in each case, to provide details of the pile layout for the structure. This drawing shall clearly show the location of the test piles and representative piles. Where piles exceed 20 metres in length, the details provided in RTA Standard Drawing No RTAB048 (Epoxy Splice for Precast Concrete Piles) should be included on the pile drawings. Where piles are required to be spliced, the minimum depth below ground level to the splice shall be clearly shown on the drawings. The minimum depth shall be not less than 5 metres below the existing surface level or the design surface level, whichever is the lower. See RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Nos RTAB027 and RTAB028) for the typical level of detailing required for these types of piles.
6.2.3
Cast-in-Place Reinforced Concrete Piles No standard drawing is available for this type of pile however the drawing format for this type of pile is relatively standard. Piles may have no casing requirements, or casing requirements (temporary or permanent), as dictated by geotechnical information and / or the design engineer's requirements. Provision of temporary steel casing is quite often a decision which is made by the contractor. Drawings shall contain the following essential information:

Pile layout plan in accordance with Clause 5.5 of this Manual. Elevation of pile showing Top RL and Contract Level, or Estimated Foundation Level, as appropriate, at toe. Indication of soffit level of pile cap or headstock. Piles are normally embedded 50mm into abutment beams or pile caps. Anchorage length of reinforcement into pile cap or headstock. Socket length of pile into rock, including the rock type and classification. Pile casing if required (shown in section with an appropriate note stating " Casing shown in section "). Elevation of raked pile (if required) showing all of the above information. Pile cross section showing spacing of main reinforcement.
OTB005
Page 2 of 5
Foundations
Note: Where bars are closely spaced, care shall be taken to ensure that bars in the pile cap or headstock can pass between the exposed pile reinforcement. A sketch showing orientation of bars may be advantageous. Details of any required casing splice (in accordance with RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB039). Details of pile driving shoe (in accordance with Chief Bridge Engineer Circular No 91/6). Pile schedule (showing pile numbers, Top RL, Contract Level at toe, pile lengths and bar marks where numerous pile lengths are involved). Development and splice lengths for reinforcement given in Section 23 of this Manual are dependant on the specified minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars. Development and splice lengths of closely spaced reinforcing bars may need to be determined from the formula 13.1.2.1(1) given in Clause 13.1.2.1 of AS 5100.5. For those Cast-in-Place reinforced concrete piles that rely on the support of the soil above the rock socket for lateral loads, minimum pile embedment below the existing or new surface level, whichever is the lower, must be specified in addition to the rock socket requirements. Reinforced concrete piles that support single column extensions must have a diameter greater that the diameter of the column above to account for construction tolerances when installing the piles. The outside faces of the column extensions must be located within the outside faces/perimeter of the supporting piles. The diameters of the supporting piles must be at least 200mm greater than the diameter of the column extensions. The construction joint between the tops of the supporting piles and the bottoms of the column extensions must be located at least 500mm below the constructed ground level at columns on land, below the NWL for non-tidal watercourses or below the MLWSL for tidal watercourses.
Figure 6.2.3 shows the typical level of detailing required for this type of pile. 6.2.4 Tubular Steel Driven Piles No standard drawing has been developed for this type of pile drawing so each drawing for this type of pile shall be detailed in accordance with sketches provided by the engineer responsible for the design. Generally these piles shall be detailed as for steel cased Cast-In-Place Reinforced Concrete piles with the differences being;
no socket into rock shown although small embedment of the toe of the steel pile into soft rock may sometimes be specified by the designer generally, only the top section of the pile is of reinforced concrete whilst the bottom section is of earth plug or granular material. notes shall include driving details.
6.2.5
H Section Steel Driven Piles
OTB005
Page 3 of 5
Foundations
'H' piles may be used with or without the top encased in reinforced concrete. Generally the encased section shall be that which is exposed to the air, water or aggressive soils. The cover to reinforcement shall be in accordance with AS 5100 - Bridge Design and RTA Technical Specifications). Essential information:

Pile layout plan in accordance with Clause 5.5 of this Manual Elevation of pile showing Top RL and Contract Level or Estimated Foundation Level, as appropriate, at toe Indication of soffit level of pile cap or headstock Concrete encasement (if applicable) together with reinforcement and protection of the concrete encasement against aggressive soil, if required, should also be shown Pile cross section in the encased section, if applicable Elevation of raked pile (if required) showing all of the above information Table of levels and lengths Splice detail (if applicable) Minimum pile embedment below the existing or new surface, whichever is the lower, must be specified The length of pile penetration into the pile cap must be specified
When using these piles care shall be taken when arranging reinforcing bars in pile caps and headstocks to ensure that the reinforcement does not clash with the designed pile location. Figure 6.2.5 shows the typical level of detailing required for this type of pile.
6.3
PILE / PILE CAP COMBINATIONS

Where piles are used in conjunction with pile caps, the relevant section of Clause 6.2 and Clause 6.4 of this Manual shall be complied with ie the detailing required for piles shall be as outlined in the relevant clause and Pile caps shall be detailed in accordance with the requirements for Spread Footings.
Figure 6.3 shows the typical level of detailing required for pile/pile cap combinations.
6.4
SPREAD FOOTINGS
Generally spread footings are detailed on pier or abutment drawings, however the location of any spread footing shall be shown on the foundation layout. Essential information:
Layout plan in accordance with Clause 5.6 and Figure 5.6 of this Manual showing dimensions Elevation of spread footing showing Contract Level or Estimated Foundation Level, as appropriate and top RL
Issue 1 Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 4 of 5
OTB005
Foundations
Mass concrete The position of the construction joint in the column above top of spread footing The location of starter bars for splicing with main column reinforcement. Clause 13.2.3 in Section 5 of AS5100 - Bridge Design, states that not more than 50% of the total area of tensile reinforcement shall be spliced at any one section. Where starter bars are provided to facilitate splicing of main vertical reinforcement, they shall be detailed with two vertical leg lengths, necessitating the use of two bar marks. Starter bars shall be placed alternately around the column base to facilitate splicing with main reinforcement ensuring that the main reinforcement fits within the shear reinforcement. Particular care shall be exercised to provide required clearances when using large diameter reinforcement at close spacing. Development and splice lengths for reinforcement given in Section 23 of this Manual are dependant on the specified minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars. Development and splice lengths of closely spaced reinforcing bars may need to be determined from the formula 13.1.2.1(1) given in Clause 13.1.2.1 of AS 5100.5.
Figures 6.4.1(a), 6.4.1(b) and 6.4.1(c) show the typical level of detailing required for spread footings.
6.5
ROCK ANCHORS
The location of rock anchors should generally be shown in the Foundation Layout. Where rock anchors are used to tie back walls and abutments, locations shall be shown on an elevation and any other views necessary to clearly show angles, etc. Essential information: The location of test anchors An Elevation showing: Anchorage and anchorage recess Bonded length (for primary grouting) Free length (for secondary grouting) Depth of drilled holes ie 500 below end of anchor Bore hole diameter and length Sheathing and extent of sheathing A cross section showing: Location and size of pipe through pile or footing
Rock Anchor Notes as per Figure 6.5 modified to suit the actual case Proprietary names shall not be shown.
OTB005
Page 5 of 5
FROM YASS
00 CH 1086.4 43.9" 83%%d 56 BEARING
TO GUNDAGAI
07 51.8"
BEARING 92%%d 37 0.7"
BEARING 89%%d 29 43.9"
BEARING 95% %d
CH 950.000
CH 985.000
CH 1021.500
CH 1000.000
CH 1050.000
R 670 000
CH 1058.000
BEARING 86%%
CH 955.600
CH 1020.000
d 22 27.1"
16
2 250
CONTROL MCA3
2 250
1 150 1 150
12 4 6 8 10
14
17
2 250
E 601 050.936
2
E 601 049.880 N 6121 430.824
1 150 1 150
1 150 1 150
18
N 6121 299.797
2 250
E 601 048.532 N 6121 328.189
E 601 047.887 N 6121 401.396
E 601 047.212 N 6121 364.783
13
15
11
3
1 150 1 150
PILE LAYOUT
NOT TO SCALE
c OF PILE L
700
GENERAL NOTES
0 200 400 600 800 1000mm
50
SCALE TOP OF PILE RL A 10W-CSP-x

200 100
OR AS SHOWN.
SOFFIT OF ABUTMENT OR PILE CAP
CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B1 MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE SHALL BE 40MPa. MINIMUM LAP LENGTH REQUIRED FOR DIA 28 BARS SHALL BE 700mm. MINIMUM LAP LENGTH FOR 10 SPIRAL REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE 320mm. LAPS ON ADJACENT BARS NOT SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS SHALL BE STAGGERED (OFFSET) BY THE LENGTH OF THE LAP. NOMINAL COVER TO REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE 75mm IF NO DIMENSION SHOWN. 28-CS-x 12-28-CS-x-EQUALLY SPACED PILE CONTRACT LEVELS (RL B) AND ROCK SOCKET LENGTHS (Ls) ARE BASED ON MINIMUM PROPERTIES OF FOUNDING MATERIAL (BP AND SA) AS GIVEN IN TABLE 2. 1 1 900 CONTRACT LEVELS SHALL BE LOWERED WHERE THE MINIMUM ROCK SOCKET LENGTH AND/OR MINIMUM FOUNDING MATERIAL PROPERTIES ARE NOT ACHIEVED. CONTRACT LEVELS MAY BE RAISED WHERE THE MINIMUM ROCK SOCKET LENGTH AND FOUNDING MATERIAL PROPERTIES ARE ACHIEVED AT A HIGHER LEVEL. BP DENOTES MINIMUM ALLOWABLE BASE BEARING CAPACITY (kPa). LENGTH OF PILE L SA DENOTES MINIMUM ALLOWABLE SHAFT ADHESION (kPa).
1-10W-CSP-x-150 PITCH (PROVIDED 1.5 TURNS AT TOP AND BOTTOM OF PILE ADJUSTED TO ZERO PITCH)
SECTION
1 -
Ls DENOTES SOCKET LENGTH. ROCK CLASSIFICATION IS BASED ON SAA SITE INVESTIGATION CODE AS 1726.
TABLE 1
LOCATION PILE No 1 ABUTMENT A 2 3 PIER 1 4 TO 7 8 TO 11 12 TO 15 16 ABUTMENT B 17 18 x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RL A 257.460 257.572 257.685 250.150 250.350 251.550 255.452 255.564 255.677 RL B 240.000 240.000 240.000 227.600 238.000 240.000 246.400 246.400 246.400 LENGTH L 17 460 17 572 17 685 22 550 12 350 11 550 9 052 9 164 9 277 Ls 2000 2000 2000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 ISSUE DATE
FIGURE 6.2.3
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH

HIGHWAY No 2 SHIRE OF YASS
TOP OF ROCK PIER 2 PIER 3
BRIDGE OVER YASS RIVER

AT 4.6KM SOUTH OF YASS PILES
PREPARED BY CLIENT XXX XXX XXX PHONE (02) FACSIMILE (02)
Ls
TABLE 2
TOE OF PILE CONTRACT LEVEL RL B LOCATION MAX DESIGN AXIAL LOAD PER PILE AT SLS (kN) DESIGN BENDING MOMENT PER PILE (kN/m) 400 150 400 MIN PROPERTIES OF ROCK SOCKET (kPa) BP 3000 4000 2000 SA 80 DESIGN PIER 1 - 3 ABUTMENT B 4000 2000 150 DRAWING 75 PREPARED
BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
CHECKED
TYPICAL PILE ELEVATION

FOR VALUES OF "x" - SEE TABLE 1
ABUTMENT A
2000
0002 246 BC 1002

1234
FOR CONSTRUCTION
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
KP2F623.dgn
PILE CAP ABUTMENT HEADSTOCK SOFFIT LEVEL RL A TOP OF PILE RL A TOP OF PILE PILE CAP SOFFIT LEVEL RL A TOP OF PILE SOFFIT LEVEL RL A TOP OF PILE
ABUTMENT HEADSTOCK SOFFIT LEVEL
TABLE I
PILE No 1 2 3 RL A 36.140 36.245 36.345 36.090 36.195 36.295 36.400 31.500 31.500 31.500 31.500 36.120 36.225 36.325 36.430 36.170 36.275 36.375 21.000 RL B 23.000 LENGTH OF PILE L 13 140 13 245 13 345 13 190 13 300 13 400 13 505 8 565 8 500 8 565 8 500 15 240 15 345 15 445 15 550 15 170 15 275 15 375
1 -
1 20-12-Y-1C AT 150 APPROX
20-12-Y-1C AT 150 APPROX 10-12-S-1C EQUALLY SPACED
4 5 6 7 8 TO 11 12 AND 13 14 TO 17 18 AND 19 20
10-12-S-1C EQUALLY SPACED
21 22 23 24 25 26 8
750
1 1 310 UBP 79 310 UBP 79 310 UBP 79 310 UBP 79
RL B CONTRACT LEVEL
RL B CONTRACT LEVEL
RL B CONTRACT LEVEL
RL B CONTRACT LEVEL
VERTICAL PILE
PILE Nos 1 - 3 AND 24 - 26 FOR VALUES A,B AND L SEE TABLE I
VERTICAL PILE
PILE Nos 12, 13, 18 AND 19 FOR VALUES A,B AND L SEE TABLE I
RAKED PILE
RAKED PILE
GENERAL NOTES
0 SCALES 500 250 500 1000 1500mm OR AS SHOWN.
CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B2 MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 40MPa.
ELEVATION
COVER TO REINFORCEMENT NEAREST TO THE CONCRETE SURFACE SHALL BE 55mm UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. WELDING SYMBOLS ARE TO AS 1101 PART 3. THE WELD CATEGORY SHALL BE SP IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS 1554 PART1. LAP UNIVERSAL BEARING PILES SHALL BE TO AS/NZS 3679.1 - 300
.
PILES SHALL BE DRIVEN TO REFUSAL ON SOUND SANDSTONE OR SILTSTONE. FROM SYDNEY TO NEWCASTLE PREBORING MAY BE REQUIRED FOR PILES TO REACH CONTRACT LEVEL. PREBORING TO EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL THROUGH EMBANKMENT FILL IS REQUIRED FOR PILES 1 TO 7 AND 20 TO 25. SURFACES OF STEEL PILES Nos 1 TO 7 AND 20 TO 26 SHALL BE ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANED TO CLASS 2 2IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS 1627 PART 4. TWO COATS OF COAL TAR EPOXY PAINT SHALL BE APPLIED TO SURFACES IN c OF PILES ABUTMENT A L 4 20 1 24 5 8 2 CH CH 12 9 14 18 CH CH 15 21 25 2 PIER 1 c L PIER 2 c L c OF PILES ABUTMENT B L 12-Y-1C 12-S-1C DIRECT CONTACT WITH EARTH PROVIDING A MINIMUM DRY FILM THICKNESS PER COAT OF 150 m. SURFACES IN CONTACT WITH ABUTMENT CONCRETE SHALL NOT BE EPOXY COATED .
1
SECTION
NOT TO SCALE
1 -
FIGURE 6. 2. 5
13
19 22
PILE LAYOUT AND DETAILS

PREPARED BY CLIENT
10
11
16
17
26
BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET
F3 CONTROL LINE 7 1200 1200 (NORTHBOUND) 1200 1200 23 350 TYP 700 TYP 350 TYP 7 DENOTES TEST PILE
PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
FIELD SPLICE DETAILS

AN ALTERNATIVE METHOD OF WELDING MAY BE USED IF APPROVED BY THE SUPERINTENDENT NOT TO SCALE
PILE LAYOUT
PILE POSITIONS ARE GIVEN AT THE SOFFIT LEVEL OF PIER PILE CAPS AND AT UNDERSIDE OF ABUTMENT HEADSTOCKS NOT TO SCALE DENOTES PILE RAKED 1 IN 8 IN THE DIRECTION SHOWN. DENOTES VERTICAL PILE
DOWNSTREAM 1 4450
8900 4450
UPSTREAM MORTAR PAD THICKNESS 1 2 ABUTMENT A SIDE 950 1900 950 HORIZONTAL RL 107.125 HORIZONTAL ABUTMENT B SIDE TOP OF HEADSTOCK VARIES - FOR DETAILS SEE SHEET No
RL 107.480
80 x 300 DEEP RL 106.280 RL 105.925 CJ RL 105.175 RL 105.025 NCF 2 50 100 50
FORMED HOLES - TYP
SECTION
300 300
0 100 200 300
4 400 500mm
c OF PIER L
VIEW
CJ NCF 3 3 3800 1900 1250
2 -
MORTAR PAD
4 -
4 -
RL 99.500 PIER 1 RL 99.900 PIER 2 RL 98.400 PIER 3
1900 1250 210 210 80 x 300 DEEP FORMED HOLES
50 THICK MASS CONCRETE
c OF PILE CAP L COLUMN AND HEADSTOCK
c OF PIER L
420 540
ELEVATION
R 650 B c OF COLUMN L R 650
DETAIL
TYPICAL
B -
DETAIL
A 100 50
100
200
300
400
500mm
PIER
c L
GENERAL NOTES
0 1000 2000 3000mm
SCALE 1925 1925 1925 1925

1000 500
OR AS SHOWN.
CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B1 c OF PILE CAP L COLUMN AND HEADSTOCK MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 40MPa. EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20 x 20 AND RE-ENTRANT ANGLES FILLETED 20 x 20 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
VIEW
1 -
NCF DENOTES NO CHAMFER OR FILLET.
8100 CONTROL 4050 4050 LINE
FIGURE 6.3.1
TABLE I
A 1 PIER c L 2 3 49.280 83.025 116.555 6 875 9 930 11 450 CH PIER CHAINAGE X
BEARING 151%%d 25 41"
PIERS - CONCRETE
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CLIENT
c OF PILE CAP L COLUMN AND HEADSTOCK
SECTION
3 -
FOR CHAINAGES AND VALUE OF "X" - SEE TABLE I
UPSTREAM
DOWNSTREAM
9000 4500 1 2 RL G RL F 4500 1 2 2 ABUTMENT A SIDE 800 800 1600 ABUTMENT B SIDE
TABLE I
HORIZONTAL LOCATION E PIER 1 N Y RL A RL B RL C RL D RL E SOUTHBOUND BRIDGE
RL E RL D CJ RL C PIER 3 RL B 75 75 150 150 PIER 4 NORTHBOUND BRIDGE 2 c OF PIER L PIER 1 LOCATION E N Y RL A RL B RL C RL D RL E RL F RL G PIER 2
PIER 2
VIEW
3 3 -
2
PIER 3
PIER 4
CJ SIDES OF FOOTING CAST AGAINST ROCK. ANY OVER EXCAVATION SHALL BE BACKFILLED WITH MASS CONCRETE - TYPICAL NCF - TYP 850 850 SCALE
1000 500
3000 1500 1500
GENERAL NOTES
0 1000 2000 3000mm
OR AS SHOWN.
CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B1 c OF PIER L MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 40.MPa. EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20x20 AND RE-ENTRANT ANGLES FILLETED 20x20 CONTRACT LEVEL RL A c OF COLUMN L 300 MINIMUM INTO DACITE 50 THICK MASS CONCRETE c OF COLUMN L OF MINIMUM ROCK STRENGTH CLASSIFICATION "VERY HIGH" EXCEPT PIER 4 SOUTHBOUND UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. NCF DENOTES NO CHAMFER OR FILLET. THE PLACING OF CONCRETE IN THE COLUMNS SHALL BE CARRIED OUT IN ONE CONTINUOUS OPERATION UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. CONTRACT LEVEL MAY BE LOWERED 600mm MAX WITHOUT CHANGING THE CONCRETE
SECTION
3 -
SECTION. CONTRACT LEVEL OF FOOTINGS SHALL NOT BE RAISED ABOVE RL 19.000 THE CALCULATED MAXIMUM FOUNDATION PRESSURE IS 2000kPa. ROCK CLASSIFICATION IS BASED ON SAA SITE INVESTIGATION CODE AS 1726. SEE SPECIFICATION.
ELEVATION
FOR REDUCED LEVELS A,B,C,D,E,F AND DIMENSION Y SEE TABLE I
WHERE MINIMUM ROCK STRENGTH CLASSIFICATION SHALL BE "MEDIUM"
4500 2250 2250
FIGURE 6. 4. 1(a)
c OF PIER L
(500)
500
E N
c OF FOOTING, COLUMN L AND HEADSTOCK
PIER CONCRETE - SHEET A

PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET
PLAN
FOR MORTAR PAD AND PEDESTAL LAYOUT DETAILS, SEE VIEW 1 ON SHEET No 2
FOR INFORMATION RELATING TO SPREAD FOOTING SETTING OUT, REFER TO FIGURE 5.6
CAD No
KP2F641A.dgn
UPSTREAM
DOWNSTREAM
9000 4500 1 2 RL G RL F 4500 1 2 2 ABUTMENT A SIDE 800 800 1600 ABUTMENT B SIDE
TABLE I
HORIZONTAL LOCATION E PIER 1 N Y RL A RL B RL C RL D RL E SOUTHBOUND BRIDGE
RL E RL D CJ RL C PIER 3 RL B 75 75 150 150 PIER 4 NORTHBOUND BRIDGE 2 c OF PIER L PIER 1 LOCATION E N Y RL A RL B RL C RL D RL E RL F RL G PIER 2
PIER 2
VIEW
3 3 -
2
PIER 3
PIER 4
CJ SIDES OF FOOTING CAST AGAINST ROCK. ANY OVER EXCAVATION SHALL BE BACKFILLED WITH MASS CONCRETE - TYPICAL NCF - TYP 850 850 SCALE
1000 500
3000 1500 1500
GENERAL NOTES
0 1000 2000 3000mm
OR AS SHOWN.
CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B1 c OF PIER L MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 40.MPa. EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20x20 AND RE-ENTRANT ANGLES FILLETED 20x20 CONTRACT LEVEL RL A c OF COLUMN L 300 MINIMUM INTO DACITE 50 THICK MASS CONCRETE c OF COLUMN L OF MINIMUM ROCK STRENGTH CLASSIFICATION "VERY HIGH" EXCEPT PIER 4 SOUTHBOUND UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. NCF DENOTES NO CHAMFER OR FILLET. THE PLACING OF CONCRETE IN THE COLUMNS SHALL BE CARRIED OUT IN ONE CONTINUOUS OPERATION UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. CONTRACT LEVEL MAY BE LOWERED 600mm MAX WITHOUT CHANGING THE CONCRETE
SECTION
3 -
SECTION. CONTRACT LEVEL OF FOOTINGS SHALL NOT BE RAISED ABOVE RL 19.000 THE CALCULATED MAXIMUM FOUNDATION PRESSURE IS 2000kPa. ROCK CLASSIFICATION IS BASED ON SAA SITE INVESTIGATION CODE AS 1726. SEE SPECIFICATION.
ELEVATION
FOR REDUCED LEVELS A,B,C,D,E,F AND DIMENSION Y SEE TABLE I
WHERE MINIMUM ROCK STRENGTH CLASSIFICATION SHALL BE "MEDIUM"
4500 2250 2250
FIGURE 6. 4. 1(a)
c OF PIER L
(500)
500
E N
c OF FOOTING, COLUMN L AND HEADSTOCK
PIER CONCRETE - SHEET A

PLAN
FOR MORTAR PAD AND PEDESTAL LAYOUT DETAILS, SEE VIEW 1 ON SHEET No 2
FOR INFORMATION RELATING TO SPREAD FOOTING SETTING OUT, REFER TO FIGURE 5.6
1
CAD No KP2F641A.dgn
30 NOM THICK MORTAR PAD UPSTREAM A c OF PIER HEADSTOCK L ABUTMENT B SIDE DOWNSTREAM TOP OF HEADSTOCK HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL SOUTHBOUND CONTROL LINE c OF PIER HEADSTOCK L (NORTHBOUND CONTROL LINE) B 0 100 200 300
TOP OF HEADSTOCK
30 NOM THICK MORTAR PAD
SECTION
4 400 500mm
SECTION
5 -
100
200
300
400
500mm
2000
2000
2000
2000
100 50 100 50
c BEARINGS AND L PEDESTALS
c BEARINGS AND L PEDESTALS c BEARINGS AND L MORTAR PADS
c BEARINGS AND L PEDESTALS
c BEARINGS AND L PEDESTALS 320
640
320 600
ABUTMENT A SIDE
540 300
VIEW
1 1
270
270
90 x 280 DEEP FORMED HOLES
300
70 x 280 DEEP FORMED HOLES
SEE SHEETS No ?? AND ?? FOR DETAILS OF BEARINGS
4 -
4 -
5 -
5 -
UPSTREAM 215 c OF PIER 1 L c OF PIER 2 L c OF PIER 3 L c OF PIER 4 L 215
DETAIL
A -
430
TYPICAL FOR EACH MORTAR PAD 2 REQUIRED PER HEADSTOCK

0 100 200 300 400 500mm
DETAIL
B -
TYPICAL FOR EACH PEDESTAL 8 REQUIRED PER HEADSTOCK

0 100 200 300 400 500mm
E 297 514.921 N 1138 809.966
E 297 517.233 N 1138 777.467
E 297 519.016 N 1138 744.935
E 297 520.271 N 1138 712.379
100 50
100 50
L SOUTHBOUND BRIDGE c
GENERAL NOTES
CH 387.500 CH 420.000 CH 452.500 CH 436.640 CH 469.520 CH 485.000 SOUTHBOUND CONTROL CH 403.760 CH 7370.880 FROM YASS LINE R 2000 000 SCALE
1000 500 0 1000 2000 3000mm
OR AS SHOWN.
FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET, SEE SHEET No 3.
TO CANBERRA
FIGURE 6. 4. 1(b)
NORTHBOUND CONTROL E 297 493.202 E 297 490.623 N 1138 824.561 N 1138 792.079 E 297 495.246 N 1138 759.560 E 297 496.756 N 1138 727.011 L NORTHBOUND BRIDGE c LINE R 1987 000
PIER CONCRETE - SHEET B

c OF PIER 1 L c OF PIER 2 L c OF PIER 3 L DOWNSTREAM c OF PIER 4 L
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150
PIER SETTING OUT PLAN

NOT TO SCALE DENOTES DIMENSIONS GIVEN ALONG PIER c L L DENOTES DIMENSION NORMAL TO PIER c
PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
DIMENSIONS GIVEN FOR PIER 1 ON NORTHBOUND BRIDGE ARE TYPICAL FOR ALL PIER HEADSTOCKS (S/B AND N/B)
2
CAD No KP2F641B.dgn
COLUMN REINFORCEMENT
2550
1250
100
1200
LAP
1 -
200
1 20-LL-3P
1100
300
TYP
28-LL-2P
GENERAL NOTES
4 BUNDLES OF 1-20-S-1P-EF-250 AND 2-20-A-1P-250 300 TYP 36-36-L-1P-SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION
1 -
30-36-L-2P SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION 32-LL-1P AND

1 -
500
1000
1500mm
SCALE
500 250
OR AS SHOWN
NOMINAL COVER TO REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE 40 mm IF CONCRETE IS CAST AGAINST 20-LL-4P FORMWORK AND 70 mm IF CAST AGAINST THE GROUND. UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWING, LAPS ON ADJACENT BARS ON ANY
ELEVATION
20-S-1P 500 TYP TYP 125
FACE SHALL BE STAGGERED (OFFSET) BY NO LESS THAN THE LAP LENGTH. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, THE MINIMUM DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS AND LENGTHS OF LAPS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: BAR SIZE: a)HORIZONTAL BARS WITH >300mm OF CONCRETE CAST BELOW THE BAR: 650 17 SPACES AT 100 = 1700 36-L-2P 14-28-LL-2P-FF-250 AND 14-20-LL-3P-NF-250 36-L-1P TYP DENOTES VARIABLE LENGTH BAR. 36-L-1P 36-L-1P THE FOOTINGS MAY BE LOWERED 600mm MAX WITH THE LENGTHS OF THE VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT BEING ADJUSTED ACCORDINGLY. ADDITIONAL GROUPS OF HORIZONTAL TIES SHALL BE PROVIDED, UPON LOWERING OF THE FOOTINGS, 36-L-1P TYP AT A SPACING NOT EXCEEDING THAT SHOWN. REINFORCEMENT IN THE HEADSTOCK MAY BE DISPLACED SLIGHTLY TO AVOID COLUMN REINFORCEMENT WHERE NECESSARY. 150 b) OTHER BARS: ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
20-A-1P
36-L-2P 20-A-1P
TYP
150
FIGURE 6. 4. 1(c)
36-L-2P
120 COVER
ISSUE TYP
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH
125 TYP
13 EQUAL SPACES AT 130 APPROX

13 EQUAL SPACES AT 130 APPROX
36-L-1P
SECTION
1 -
18-32-LL-1P-FF-250 AND 18-20-LL-4P-NF-250
20-S-1P
DENOTES COVER DIMENSION PROVIDED FOR CONCRETE CAST AGAINST GROUND
PIER REINFORCEMENT - SHEET A

PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING CLIENT
PLAN OF FOOTING
COLUMN STARTER BARS L-1P AND L-2P NOT DETAILED LL-1P AND LL-4P BARS SHALL BE PLACED NEAREST TO RESPECTIVE CONCRETE SURFACES INFORMATION RELEVANT TO THE REINFORCEMENT OF THE SPREAD FOOTING AND COLUMN CONNECTION SHOWN ONLY - TO ILLUSTRATE THE CORRECT PLACEMENT OF STARTER BARS DRAWING PREPARED DESIGN
110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
CHECKED
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
c ROCK ANCHORS L
80
150
300
RECESS DEPTH TO SUIT ANCHORAGE
5-16-HT-1-125
LIVE END ANCHORAGE FOR 2/ 15.2mm STRAND ROCK ANCHOR
2-12-HS-1EF VOID FORMER THROUGH FOOTING, I.D. TO SUIT MINIMUM HOLE DIMENSION FOR ROCK ANCHOR
DUCT I.D. TO SUIT ROCK ANCHOR
12-HS-1
GENERAL NOTES
0 200 400 600 800 1000mm
SCALE 150
200 100
OR AS SHOWN.
MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE AT TRANSFER OF PRESTRESS SHALL BE .....MPa.
16-HT-1 FITMENT DETAIL

NOT TO SCALE
EACH ROCK ANCHOR SHALL BE COMPRISED OF .../15.2mm DIAMETER SUPER GRADE STRESS RELIEVED, LOW RELAXATION STRANDS TO AS 1311 WITH A MINIMUM BREAKING LOAD OF .....kN. THE DESIGN WORKING LOAD (TD) OF EACH ANCHOR SHALL BE ....kN. AT LEAST ... ANCHORS SHALL BE ASSESSED DURING STRESSING BY PROVING TEST AND ... ANCHORS SHALL BE ASSESSED DURING STRESSING BY SUITABILITY TEST. THE REMAINING ANCHORS SHALL BE ASSESSED BY ACCEPTANCE TEST. ANCHORS TO BE ASSESSED BY PROVING TEST SHALL PRECEED THE STRESSING OF ALL OTHER ANCHORS. ROCK ANCHOR RECESSES SHALL BE FILLED WITH ...MPa CONCRETE AT THE CONCLUSION OF STRESSING OPERATIONS.
FIGURE 6. 5
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802
CLIENT XXX XXX XXX PHONE (02) FACSIMILE (02)
TYPICAL SECTION
FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
CAD No
KP2F65.dgn
SECTION 7
DRAWING PRACTICE
Drawing Practice
7 DRAWING PRACTICE
7.1 LINEWORK
Generaly, all linework on drawings shall be in accordance with Table 3.1 in AS 1100 Part 101 and Figure 7.1 (Table of Line Types) in this Manual.
7.2
TEXT
In accordance with Table 4.1 of AS 1100 Part 101 and given that final drawings are to be produced in A1 size, the text on all drawings shall be in upper case with the size and application being in accordance with the following: 3.5mm HIGH - General text, dimensions and General Notes 5mm HIGH - Titles of sections, views etc and title block information as shown in Figures 7.3.1 and 7.3.2 7mm HIGH - Element titles as appropriate, bridge name and registration number of plans or sketch numbers in title blocks as shown in Figures 7.3.1 and 7.3.2 For drawings prepared by the Authority, the font type used for general text shall be International ISO. The font type used in title blocks shall be Arial. For drawings prepared by consultants for the Authority, or drawings for bridges that will become property of the Authority, the font type used for general text shall be similar to International ISO. For example, ISO 3098B Upright would be an acceptable font type. The use of a symbol within a text string to denote the word and (&) on any drawing is unacceptable and shall not be used under any circumstances.
7.3 7.3.1
DIMENSIONS General
Each dimension necessary for the complete definition of a particular element shall be clearly shown on the drawing and shall be shown once only. The dimensioning of any element shall be such that no dimension relating to that element shall need to be deduced from other dimensions nor that the drawing must be scaled to determine the dimension. In all cases, dimensions shown on drawings shall be in millimetres and they shall be shown in accordance with AS 1100 Part 101 ie the use of a space between the third and fourth digit in a four digit number is optional however the space is mandatory in a five digit number. The method of showing dimensions shall be in accordance with AS1100 Part 101. Dimensions shall be placed on drawings using the 'aligned' method with each dimension being placed parallel to it's dimension line in order that it may be read from either the bottom or the right hand side of the drawing. A chain of dimensions shall be covered by an overall dimension except where dimensional tolerances are of critical importance.
OTB005
Page 1 of 5
Drawing Practice
Where several dimensions are to be given to a common datum surface, either the aligned method or the point method may be used. Dimensions and notes shown with leaders shall be inscribed using the unidirectional method. Where it is necessary to indicate that a particular dimension on a drawing is not shown to the same scale as the view or detail in which it appears, the dimension shall be underlined with a full thick line. This method of representing details drawn out of scale shall not be applied to entire details that are shown 'NOT TO SCALE'. Radii shall, in the majority of cases, be dimensioned by the use of a dimension line which passes through or is in line with the centre of the arc and terminates at the lead end with a single arrowhead, however radii of arcs which need not have their centres located shall be dimensioned using one of the methods shown in AS 1100 Part 101. Dimensions for radii shall be preceded by the conventional abbreviation 'R'.
7.3.2
Order of accuracy for dimensions

The following order of accuracy shall be used on all drawings: Concrete dimensions Reinforcing bar spacing 5mm Steel plate widths Steel plate lengths Steel sections 1mm 1mm 1mm (as necessary for cambered plates etc) 0.1mm (or as shown in manufacturer's catalogues)
7.3.3
Reduced levels and chainages

Reduced levels and Chainages shall be shown in metres on all drawings with the following order of accuracy being used: Design Surface Levels Contract Levels Existing surface levels Contours 0.001 metres 0.100 metres 0.1 metres 1.0 or 0.5 metres (dependant upon slope of existing surface) Chainages 0.001 metres Flood and water levels 0.1 metres
7.4
DIMENSION LINES, PROJECTION LINES AND NOTE LEADERS

Dimension lines shall not be interrupted for the insertion of dimensions and shall terminate in easily readable arrowheads or a fully shaded small circle as appropriate. Dimension lines shall not be shown as centrelines or as part of an elements outline. Projection lines for dimensions shall extend from a point not less than 2mm (at normal scale) from the surface of the object to a point not less than 2mm beyond the dimension line. Projection lines shall, in the majority of cases, be unbroken. Leaders for notes shall commence from either the beginning or the end of note and shall terminate in either an arrowhead or a small fully shaded circle as appropriate. Leaders for notes that terminate in an arrowhead shall terminate either on the outline of the element or the outer edge of a fully shaded or hatched detail.
OTB005
Page 2 of 5
Drawing Practice
The use of long leaders shall be avoided and leaders should in the majority of cases not be drawn parallel to dimension and/or projection lines.
7.5
SCALES ON DRAWINGS
Scales used on drawings will vary in accordance with the size and character of the feature being detailed or the degree of detailing required. All drawings should be drawn to a defined natural scale with the scale being so that the drawing may be easily read when reduced to half of its original Distorted scales should not be used except where special circumstances require distortion for clarity of presentation e.g Deck Setting Out drawings Scales shall be shown on all drawings, they shall be represented in accordance with AS 1101 Part 101. Scales shall be shown in the following manner: 0 20 10 The following scales are recommended for use: DETAIL DRAWINGS 1:1, 1:2, 1:2.5, 1:5, 1:7.5, 1:12.5 and their decimal multiples. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS 1:1, 1:2, 1:2.5, 1:3*, 1:4*, 1:5, 1:7.5* and 1:12.5* and their decimal multiples (* indicates scales may be used for the Plan and Elevation on General Arrangement drawings only if required however their use should be kept to an absolute minimum) LOCALITY PLANS 1:1 000 000, 1:500 000, 1:250 000, 1:100 000, 1:50 000, and 1:25 000. SITE PLANS 1:500, 1:1000, 1:2000 and 1:2500. Drawings shall not contain two scales which are similar, eg a scale of 1:2 shall not be used on the same drawing as a scale of 1:2.5 20 40 60 80mm selected size.
7.6
PLAN VIEWS
Plan views shall be drawn as a horizontal view taken immediately above the element under consideration. Hidden details shall be shown using broken lines in accordance with Figure 7.1 (Table of Line Types) in this Manual.
7.7
OTB005
ELEVATIONS
Drawing Practice
Elevations shall be drawn as a view seen from a vertical plane immediately in front of the element under consideration and shall be projected from that elements 'PLAN' view. Hidden details shall be shown using broken lines in accordance with Figure 7.1 (Table of Line Types) in this Manual.
7.8
SECTIONS
Sections shall be drawn as a view from a cutting plane located through an element previously drawn as an Elevation, Plan, Section or View. Generally, only the details at the cutting plane of the section should be shown, however, details beyond the cutting plane may be included (represented by diotted lines) provided that the included details are not confusing to the main details being shown. Sections, where possible, shall be drawn adjacent to the plan or elevation to which they relate. Where section details cannot be shown on the sheet of origin, they shall be cross referenced in accordance with Appendix A of AS 1100 Part 301. If a series of cutting planes are used to define section details, any change in direction of the cutting plane shall be shown by 0.7mm thick lines. The circular symbol used to indicate where the section is taken shall be in accordance with Section 2 of AS 1101 Part 501. The designation of Sections shall be numerical. Where a series of sheets is necessary to adequately detail an element, eg Abutments Concrete Sheet A, Abutments Concrete Sheet B etc, the same section number shall not be used more that once in the sheet series.
7.9
VIEWS
Views shall be drawn representing what is seen from outside an element previously drawn as an Elevation, Plan or Section. Hidden details shall be shown using broken lines in accordance with Figure 7.1 (Table of Line Types) in this Manual. The circular symbol used to indicate where the view is taken shall be in accordance with that used for sections as shown in Section 2 of AS 1101 Part 501. The designation of Views shall be numerical with View numbers not replicating any Section number already used. Where a series of sheets is necessary to adequately detail an element, eg Abutments Concrete Sheet A, Abutments Concrete Sheet B etc, the same view number shall not be used more that once in the sheet series.
7.10
OTB005
DETAILS
Drawing Practice
Where the scale used to draw elements on drawings is too small to adequately show minute details, the item requiring enlargement shall be enclosed in a circle, or other suitable shape and a detail mark shall be placed in a convenient location. The hexagonal symbol used to designate the detail shall be in accordance with that used for details as shown in Section 2 of AS 1101 Part 501. The designation of Details shall be alphabetical. Where a series of sheets is necessary to adequately detail an element, eg Abutments Concrete Sheet A, Abutments Concrete Sheet B etc, the same detail letter shall not be used more that once in the sheet series.
OTB005
Page 5 of 5
TABLE OF LINE TYPES

TYPE OF LINE EXAMPLE OF LINE 0.25mm THICK WHITE IN COLOUR 0.35mm THICK RED IN COLOUR APPLICATION DIMENSION LINES NOTE LEADERS CONCRETE OUTLINES (SCALES BELOW 1:20) STEELWORK IN SECTION (SCALES BELOW 1:10) 0.5mm THICK GREEN IN COLOUR CONCRETE OUTLINES (SCALES ABOVE 1:20) REINFORCEMENT AND LIMIT LINES (SCALES BELOW 1:20) STEELWORK IN SECTION (SCALES ABOVE 1:20) 0.7mm THICK BLUE IN COLOUR REINFORCEMENT AND LIMIT LINES (SCALES ABOVE 1:20) DASHED - LONG 0.25mm THICK WHITE IN COLOUR 0.5mm THICK GREEN IN COLOUR DASHED - SHORT 0.35mm THICK RED IN COLOUR CHAIN - THIN 0.25mm THICK WHITE IN COLOUR 0.25mm THICK WHITE IN COLOUR CENTRELINES CONSTRUCTION JOINTS (SCALES BELOW 1:20) CONSTRUCTION JOINTS (SCALES ABOVE 1:20) HIDDEN DETAILS
CONTINUOUS
CONTINUOUS ZIG ZAG
BREAK LINES
CHAIN - THIN DOUBLE DASHED CONTINUOUS WAVY
0.35mm THICK RED IN COLOUR 0.25mm THICK WHITE IN COLOUR
EXISTING WORK
DENOTATION OF AMENDMENTS INCLUDING W-A-E
FIGURE 7.1
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH

USE 3.5mm TEXT USE 7mm TEXT USE 5mm TEXT

AT 4.6KM SOUTH OF YASS PIERS - CONCRETE
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CLIENT XXX XXX XXX PHONE (02) FACSIMILE (02)
USE 2.5mm TEXT
CHECKED
0002 246 BC 1002

SENIOR BRIDGE ENGINEER
USE 7mm TEXT USE 5mm TEXT USE 3.5mm TEXT USE 5mm TEXT
5946
FOR CONSTRUCTION
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
KP2F73.dgn
FIGURE 7.3.1
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH

USE 3.5mm TEXT USE 5mm TEXT
BRIDGE OVER YASS RIVER AT 12.6KM WEST OF YASS TRAFFIC BARRIER UPGRADE GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CLIENT XXX XXX XXX PHONE (02) FACSIMILE (02)
USE 2.5mm TEXT
CHECKED
0002 246 BC 1256

SENIOR BRIDGE ENGINEER
USE 7mm TEXT USE 5mm TEXT USE 3.5mm TEXT USE 5mm TEXT
5961
FOR CONSTRUCTION
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
KP2F73.dgn
FIGURE 7.3.2
SECTION 8
SLOPING FEATURES
Sloping Features
8
8.1 SLOPES AND BATTERS
SLOPING FEATURES
These shall be expressed as the horizontal distance relative to the vertical distance, one of these dimensions being given as unity; with the horizontal distance being given first eg a) Slopes 2 TO 1 - embankments 1.5 TO 1 - embankments 1.25 TO 1 - rock fill 1 TO 1 - stone pitching b) Batters 1 TO 4 - rock cut c) Piles 1 IN 8 - raked piles A small right-angle triangle showing the horizontal/vertical ratio may also be drawn and dimensioned to indicate batters and the rake of piles.
8.2
GRADES, CROSSFALLS AND SUPERELEVATIONS

Grades, crossfalls and superelevations of roads, bridges, tunnels and similar structures shall be expressed as a percentage. A slope of 6% indicates a displacement of six units vertically in 100 units horizontally. Where a fall or grade is given for a surface, such as 3%, an arrow shall indicate the downhill direction.
OTB005
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 9
CONTOURS
Contours
9
9.1 GENERAL
CONTOURS
A contour is a line on a drawing joining points on the existing surface which are all at the same height above a known datum, or the intersection of the existing surface by a level surface of constant elevation.
9.2
LINES
Contours shall be drawn as uniform full lines except under structures where they shall be shown as dashed lines. Line thickness shall be in accordance with Table 7.2 in this Manual.
9.3
LEVELS AND INTERVALS

The level of each contour shall be shown at one end of the contour line only, see Figure 18.2.1. Contour intervals shall be determined to suit the actual slope of the existing surface at each individual bridge site. At bridge sites where the existing surface is very steep, contours should be shown at greater intervals than flatter slopes, however intervals should not exceed 1.0 metre. At bridge sites where the existing surface is very flat, contour intervals of 0.25 metres should be used.
OTB005
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 10
ABBREVIATIONS
RTA Structural Drafting And Detailing Manual
Abbreviations
10 ABBREVIATIONS
10.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS
A list of standard abbreviations for metric units is shown in Table 10.1.1. The arrangement of upper and lower case letters for each of the abbreviations shall be strictly adhered to. TABLE 10.1.1 STANDARD METRIC ABBREVIATIONS
UNIT
Degree (angular) Degree (Celsius) Kilogram Kilometre Kilonewton Kilopascal Megapascal Metre Millimetre Minute (angular) Newton Pascal Radian Second (angular) Tonne
SYMBOL
...o oC kg km kN kPa MPa m mm ...' N Pa RAD ..." t
OTB005
Page 1 of 4
Abbreviations
10.2
ACCEPTABLE ABBREVIATIONS
A list of commonly used, acceptable abbreviations for bridge and related drawings is given in Table 10.2.1. Abbreviations shall not contain or carry a full stop. TABLE 10.2.1 GENERAL ABBREVIATIONS
WORD(S)
Approximate Australian Height Datum Average Bench Mark Calculated High Flood Level Centre-to centre Centres Centreline Construction Joint Countersink Diameter - inside / internal - outside Downstream Drawing Number Each Face Equal Angle Expansion Bearing Expansion Joint Far Face Fixed Bearing Flat Head (Bolt) - Cheese - Countersunk - Cup - Hexagon - Hexagon Socket - Mushroom High Flood Level
ABBREVIATION / SYMBOL
APPROX AHD AV BM CALC HFL C/C CTRS CL CJ CSK DIA or ID OD DS DRG No EF EA E EJ FF F FL HD CH HD CSK HD CUP HD HEX HD HEX SOC HD MUSH HD HFL
OTB005
Page 2 of 4
Abbreviations
WORD(S)
Hollow Section - Circular - Rectangular - Square International System of Units (Systems International dUnites) Intersection Point Maximum Minimum Modulus of Elasticity Near Face No Chamfer or Fillet Nominal Number Pitch Circle Diameter Parallel Flange Channel Percentage Plate Polytetrafluor-Ethylene Polyvinylchloride Prestressed Concrete Radius Recovery Peg Reduced Level Reinforced Concrete Required Reported High Flood Level Road Street Tangent Point Taper Flange Beam Taper Flange Channel Typical Ultimate Tensile Strength Unequal Angle Universal Beam Universal Bearing Pile Universal Column Unplasticised Polyvinylchloride Upstream Ultimate Ultimate Limit State Vertical Curve CHS RHS SHS SI
IP MAX MIN Mod E NF NCF NOM No PCD PFC % PL or P L PTFE PVC PSC R RP RL RC REQD REPORTED HFL, REP HFL RD ST TP TFB TFC TYP UTS UEA UB UBP UC UPVC US ULT ULS VC
OTB005
Page 3 of 4
Abbreviations
WORD(S)
Water Level - normal water level - mean high water - mean high water springs - mean low water - mean low water springs
NWL MHW MHWS MLW MLWS
10.3
OTHER ABBREVIATIONS
The use of abbreviations, other than those listed in Tables 10.1 and 10.2 should be avoided. However, any other abbreviations that are used in the drawings must be listed and explained in the LEGEND on each drawing that such abbreviations are used.
OTB005
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 11
SYMBOLS
Symbols
11
11.1 WELDING
SYMBOLS
The necessary information concerning the location, type, size and length of welds in welded joints and whether the welds are to be made in the shop or at the site shall be given on the drawings with the use of standard welding symbols. All welding symbols shall be in accordance with AS 1101.3.
11.2
SURFACE TEXTURE OF METALS

Where, on bridge drawings, indication of surface texture for metal work is required to ensure an acceptable surface finish, the necessary information shall be given by the use of standard symbols and roughness grade numbers. The symbols shall be in accordance with AS ISO 1302.
11.3
MATERIALS
Where it is necessary to show materials in section by symbols, the symbols used shall be in accordance with Table 5.1 in AS 1101.301 and with Figure 11.3 in this Manual. However, symbolic representation of material in section may not always be necessary and at smaller scales may be impossible. Where new work and existing work are shown side by side on a drawing the new work shall be identified with the appropriate hatching with existing work being unhatched and shown in outline only using the existing work line type as shown in Figure 7.1 of this Manual.
11.4
USE OF ASTERISKS AND SIMILAR SYMBOLS

Asterisks, filled in dots and triangles or other like symbols used as a reference to a note, dimension, reduced level etc, on a drawing should be used as sparingly as possible, usually only to avoid repetition of a note or where space precludes the use of a direct note. Where a symbol is used to reference many similar items in different views or sections on the same drawing, the denotation of the references shall be given in the General Notes and not under each view or section. Like symbols shall not be used to reference different items in different views and or sections shown on the same drawing. Where it is necessary to have references to different items on the same drawing, separate symbols shall be used for each reference.
OTB005
Page 1 of 1
STEEL COMPONENTS
LARGE SCALE
SMALL SCALE
CONCRETE
ASPHALT AND BRICKWORK
MORTAR
CEMENT AND EPOXY
JOINT SEALANT
RUBBER
NATURAL AND SYNTHETIC
EARTH (FILL)
EARTH
ROCK
GRANULAR FILL
FIGURE 11.3
KP2F113
SECTION 12
NOTES AND REFERENCES
Notes and References
12
12.1 GENERAL
NOTES AND REFERENCES
Notes on drawings shall be clear and concise with regard to required information and instructions. Where notes are in sentence form, they shall carry a full stop. Where notes are in an abbreviated "note" form, i.e. not containing a finite verb, they shall not carry a full stop. Brackets shall not be used for entire notes.
12.2
GENERAL NOTES
General notes which apply to several views on a drawing or the drawing as a single entity should be as far as possible free from exceptions. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB029 contains 'Standard Notes' which represent the majority of General Notes for respective applications as used by the Authoritys Bridge Engineering Section and all 'Standard Notes' shown on drawings shall be based on these. For drawings prepared by the Authoritys Bridge Engineering Section, each particular note application has a corresponding CAD Cell (abbreviation noted in brackets) which may be retrieved from the Public Cell Library on the CAD system. Blank spaces (in the notes retrieved) shall be filled with the appropriate information. For bridge and structural drawings prepared by consultants for the Authority or for drawings prepared for bridges and other structures that will become the property of the Authority, the General Notes shown on each sheet shall contain information relevant to the construction or fabrication of the element being detailed with the notes being concise and clear in their intent. Where more than one sheet is used to detail a specific component of the structure (where Sheets A, B, C etc are used) and the General Notes apply to all sheets, they shall be shown on Sheet A only and the note For other General Notes relating to this sheet, see Sheet No... shall be inserted in the General Notes area.
12.3
PARTICULAR NOTES
Where a note applies to a particular view, section or detail only, it shall be placed as close as possible to the point to which it applies and not under General Notes. Some examples of this type of note would be: Dimensions and numbers of items required Statement regarding details not shown in a view or section Statement that a commercial item specified may be replaced by a similar item provided that the replacement item meets design requirements Statement regarding the required protective treatment for an item
OTB005
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 13
TITLES AND SUB-TITLES
Titles and Sub-Titles
13
13.1 TITLES
TITLES AND SUB-TITLES
The title block on every sheet of a set of drawings shall have the same identifying title which adequately describes the location of the bridge site, including the road number and the Local Government Area name. The title block of each sheet shall also include a description of the details shown on that sheet, e.g. PIERS - CONCRETE, PIERS - REINFORCEMENT Where more than one sheet of drawings is necessary to detail a part of a structure it shall be considered to be a sheet series and the sheet titles shall be shown as follows: DECK - SHEET A DECK - SHEET B PIER CONCRETE SHEET A Sections, views and details shall be identified by the appropriate symbol in accordance with AS/NZS 1100 Part 501 and no section number, view number or alphabetic character used for details shall appear more than once in the sheet series.
13.2
SUB-TITLES
A sheet generally comprises several views, sections, details, tables etc and each shall be given an appropriate sub-title using 5mm high lettering e.g. PLAN ELEVATION TABLE 1 Where both concrete details and reinforcement details are shown separately on the one drawing an additional sub-title under each set of details using 7mm high lettering is required e.g. CONCRETE DETAILS REINFORCEMENT DETAILS In reinforcement detail drawings, the concrete plan and elevation of the part of the structure being detailed should be used and treated as "transparent" with the reinforcement details being added. The sub-titles in such cases shall be PLAN and ELEVATION. The terms SECTIONAL PLAN and SECTIONAL ELEVATION shall not be used under any circumstances. Tables shall be identified numerically. Figure 13.2 depicts the correct method of indicating sections and details as well as the appropriate usage of titles and sub-titles.
OTB005
Page 1 of 1
DOWNSTREAM BASE c AT NEAR FACE OF PIER
UPSTREAM
DOWNSTREAM
UPSTREAM
16-HT-1P 11 800
16-HT-2P
32-V-1P
16-HT-2P
1-32-V-1P-EF 16-HT-1P
500 TYP
RL 328.190
RL 328.360
RL 328.190
16-VV-1P
16-VV-1P
4-20-E-1P LAPPED WITH RL 327.160 RL 327.160 32-V-1P AND 20-S-2P 1-32-S-1P-EF 20 x 400 LONG GRADE 304 STAINLESS STEEL DOWELS TO ASTM A276 TOTAL 68 REQUIRED 2 22 BUNDLES OF 2-16-HT-2P -180 10-32-V-1P-NF SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION
2 -
32-VV-2P 4-20-S-2P-EF SPACED AS SHOWN IN PR SECTION

2 -
4-20-E-1P LAPPED WITH 32-V-1P AND 20-S-2P PR
ELEVATION
22 BUNDLES OF 2-16-HT-2P -180
32-S-1P AND 20-S-2P 500 TYP
ELEVATION
BASE c 125 x 25 ELASTOMERIC BEARING 1 c OF 20 DOWELS CH 492.000 (PIER 1) CH 504.000 (PIER 2) 320 STRIPS, FOR DETAILS, SEE SHEET No 10
75 20-E-1P
75 20-E-1P
8-16-VV-1P LAPPED WITH 32-V-1P 180 32-S-1P AND 2 10-32-VV-2P-FF SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION
2 -
180
8-16-VV-1P LAPPED WITH 32-V-1P
c OF PIER
20-S-2P
PLAN GENERAL NOTES

1950 320 5135 DOWELS : 16 SPACES AT 642 = 10 270 5900 11 800 5900 7900 5135 1950
0 1 000 2 000 3 000mm
SCALE
1 000 500
OR AS SHOWN.
CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B1. 7 EQUAL SPACES 32-V-1P MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 32MPa. EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20x20 AND RE-ENTRANT ANGLES FILLETED 20x20 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. NCF DENOTES NO CHAMFER OR FILLET.
1 -
NOMINAL COVER TO REINFORCEMENT NEAREST TO THE CONCRETE SURFACE SHALL BE 45mm UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS LAPS ON ADJACENT BARS ON
PLAN
ANY FACE SHALL BE STAGGERED (OFFSET) BY NO LESS THAN THE LAP LENGTH. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, THE MINIMUM DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS AND LENGTHS OF LAPS SHALL BE: 20-S-2P
BAR SIZE: a) HORIZONTAL BARS WITH >300mm OF N12 N16 N20 N24 N28 N32 N36
1200 200 ELASTOMERIC BEARING STRIPS 200 16-HT-2P c OF DOWELS 32-S-1P DENOTES VARIABLE LENGTH BAR. REINFORCEMENT MAY BE DISPLACED SLIGHTLY WHERE NECESSARY TO CLEAR DOWELS, PILE REINFORCEMENT, FORMED HOLES AND RECESSES. 75 20 DOWELS COVER PR PR - DENOTES PILE REINFORCEMENT.
CONCRETE CAST BELOW THE BAR: b) OTHER BARS: ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
HIGHWAY No 2 9 EQUAL SPACES
SHIRE OF YASS

AT 4.6km SOUTH OF YASS PIER
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 CLIENT XXX XXX XXX PHONE (02) FACSIMILE (02)
32-VV-1P c OF PIER
0 0 500 1000 1500mm 125
250
500
750mm
FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
250
500
250
0002 246 BC 1002 REINFORCEMENT CONCRETE FIGURE 13. 2

CAD No KP2F132.dgn
123
FOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 14
CHECKING OF DRAWINGS
Checking of Drawings
14
14.1 GENERAL
CHECKING OF DRAWINGS
This section of the Manual sets out the checking process for drafting work carried out by the Authoritys Bridge Engineering Section. All drawings prepared by external consultants for the Authority, or for bridges that will become the property of the Authority shall be prepared and checked in accordance with the requirements of the Quality System documentation that exists within respective offices, the relevant requirements of the RTA Structural Drafting Manual and in accordance with the Contract. All drawings prepared by the Authoritys Bridge Engineering Section should be thoroughly checked by the Drafting Officer responsible for their production to ensure details are in accordance with the Project Design Engineers requirements and that they conform to the drafting standards outlined in this Manual prior to being submitted to the drafting Project Leader for checking. After the drawings have been reviewed by the drafting Project Leader and amended as required, they shall be supplied to the Project Design Engineer for concurrence. Upon completion of each drawing, a check print of the drawing (complete with CAD directory, Cad Filename and date of creation of the plot adjacent to the drawing border in the upper right hand corner of the sheet) shall be supplied to the Project Design Engineer for concurrence. The following list should be used as a basis for checking by the drafting officer: CLARITY - Have the Project Design Engineers design sketches been followed and is the resultant drawing clear in its intent? Has sufficient information been shown ? Is the drawing to scale ? Are dimensions, levels and reinforcement correct ? If any product information is used, is it the latest information available from the latest catalogue?
ACCURACY
CONSISTENCY DRAFTING -
Is the drawing consistent with other drawings in the same set ? Have the requirements of the Structural Drafting Manual been met?
A complete set of draft final drawings shall be provided to the Manager, Structural Drafting for review prior to being provided to the relevant Design Manager for review.
14.2
MARKING OF CHECK PRINTS

In order to ensure that the checking system can be understood by all officers, all drawings prepared by the Authoritys Bridge Engineering Section, the following colour coded system shall be used when checking all drawings.
OTB005
Page 1 of 2
Checking of Drawings
Colour Code
GREEN RED YELLOW
Description
Details checked as being correct. Details checked as being incorrect and some amendments and /or deletions required. Amendments to details marked in red and/or any additional requirements shall be marked with graphite pencil on yellow background.
14.3
AMENDMENT OF DRAWINGS
After marking of check prints, said check prints (complete with checking officers initials and date in the amendment block) shall be returned to the Drafting Project Leader responsible for the project so that necessary amendments can be completed. The Drafting Project Leader shall then be responsible for the amendment of the drawings using available drafting resources. Upon completion of required amendments, the check print being used as the basis for the amendments shall be marked as superseded (with the date being shown) and a new check print shall be issued with the required details being shown in the upper right hand corner of the sheet as stated in Clause 14.1 of this Manual.
OTB005
Page 2 of 2
SECTION 15
ISSUE AND AMENDMENT OF DRAWINGS
Issue and Amendment of Drawings
15
15.1
ISSUE AND AMENDMENT OF DRAWINGS
GENERAL
Provisions in this Section apply to the development of bridge construction drawings by the Bridge Engineering Section of the RTA. Bridge construction drawings, for bridges that will become the property of the RTA that are prepared by external parties, shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of this Section except where internal RTA procedural processes are specified.
15.2
ISSUE OF PRELIMINARY DRAWINGS

Where prepared by the RTAs Bridge Engineering Section, any drawings that have not been formally approved and are issued to any party for the purpose of checking, comment or review, shall be marked to clearly show the stage of development of the project/drawings. This shall be shown as percentage complete and it shall be placed beside the words Issue Status in the title block, a typical description being 75% COMPLETE. Drawings that are in the development stage shall have a numerical character shown in the Issue box in the bottom right hand corner of the title block. The first issue of the drawing for the purpose of checking shall be denoted Issue 0. When Issue 0 is amended it shall become Issue 1 and this number shall be updated with each successive issue of the drawing. Re-issues of proposal sketches for bridge designs shall also follow the above procedure. Preliminary drawings issued to any party outside the design office shall carry a watermark placed diagonally across the sheet and the wording shall be: PRELIMINARY NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION. See Figure 15.2.
15.3
SUBMISSION OF DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL

Where the drawings have been prepared by the RTAs Bridge Engineering Section, and the drawings have been checked and signed by the appropriate officers, they shall be submitted to the Principal Bridge Engineer or appropriate Manager for approval in accordance with Bridge Section Standard Operating Procedure, Approval to Drawings TB-SOP-404002. Drawings submitted for approval shall have Issue A recorded in the appropriate position in the title block and the words FOR CONSTRUCTION entered into the space provided beside the words Issue Status in the title block. Where consultants have been commissioned to complete bridge designs for the Authority or for bridges that will become the property of the Authority in the future, the consultant shall supply the Authority with an A1 size tracing paper copy of the drawings for acceptance/approval by the Principal Bridge Engineer or other delegated officer. Following acceptance/approval of the drawings, the consultant shall supply the Authority with an individual electronic copy of each drawing file (in either dgn, dwg or dwf format) and a multipage pdf file (containing all drawings) that can be read by and stored on the Authoritys equipment.
OTB005
Page 1 of 5
15.4
AMENDMENT OF APPROVED DRAWINGS

For drawings prepared by the RTAs Bridge Engineering Section, after any drawing is formally approved and issued it may only be amended in accordance with the following procedures: SHEETS OTHER THAN COVER SHEETS 1. The drawing file shall be copied from the appropriate CAD register and renamed with an appropriate suffix ie _B for the first amendment, _C for the second amendment. The drawing shall be registered with the Leader CAD Development and it shall be stored in the appropriate folder under the project number allocated to the project. 2. The required amendments shall be carried out. Amendments shall be denoted by their inclusion in a box or cloud (using a thin wavy line) together with the alphabetic character corresponding to the Issue No placed in a small box adjacent to the amendment. Text used to denote the amendment (B, C etc) shall be 5mm high and the box which encloses the letter shall measure 10mm x 10mm with line thickness 0.5mm. When information or details have been removed a box or cloud (using a thin wavy line) denoting the area that information has been removed from, together with the letter corresponding to the revision placed in a small box adjacent to the amendment. A brief description of what was deleted shall be placed both inside the box or cloud and in the Revision Block above the Title Block. See Figure 15.4.1 When information or details have been superseded by other information and the original information or detail is to be retained on the drawing, two parallel diagonal lines (at 45 degrees) shall be placed through the detail and the word SUPERSEDED shall be placed between the parallel lines. Reference shall be made to the location of the information or detail that has superseded the original information either inside the parallel lines or beside the amendment box or cloud. See Figure 15.4.1 Where previously amended drawings require further amendments, the amendment box or cloud and the boxed text used to denote previous amendments shall be removed. The details of previous amendments shall remain in the Revision Block immediately above the Title Block and the initials of the officer that authorised the preceding amendments shall be typed into the space provided in the Revision Block. 3. The required details in the Revision block shall be completed. This will include the Issue, Date, a description of the revision, the initials of the Drafting Officer that completed the revision as well as the initials of the officer that checked the revision. The officer responsible for the release of the revision shall be required to initial, by hand, in the space provided. The Issue No shown in the previously approved Issue of the drawing shall be revised i.e. B for first amendment, C for second amendment etc. Figure 15.4.1 shows the correct format for the amendment of sheets other than cover sheets. COVER SHEETS
4.
OTB005
Page 2 of 5
Once approved and issued, the Cover Sheet of a set of drawings shall be not be revised or reissued unless information shown on the Cover Sheet is changed. Some examples of changes that would necessitate the reissue of a Cover Sheet are where a sheet is added to or deleted from the set or the title of a sheet is changed and/or the information provided for the various loadings required by AS 5100, listed reports or any other similar information requires amendment. Where the Cover Sheet of any set of drawings must be revised and reissued, the following procedure shall be followed. 1. Drawing file shall be copied from the appropriate CAD register, renamed accordingly. The filename shall have the suffix _B added for the first amendment, _C added for the second amendment etc. required. In addition to this, the Issue No in the bottom right hand corner of the sheet shall also be amended i.e. Issue B for first amendment, Issue C for second amendment etc. The drawing shall be registered with the Leader CAD Development and it shall be stored in the appropriate folder under the project number allocated to the project. 2. Place the amendment block on the sheet directly above the title block and place the required details in the amendment block. Figure 15.4.2 shows the correct format for the amendment of Cover Sheets.
15.5
PROCEDURE FOLLOWING AMENDMENT OF APPROVED DRAWINGS

The following procedure shall be strictly adhered to upon completion of any required amendments to approved drawings; 1. The approved amended drawings, printed A1 size on tracing paper, shall be supplied to the Documentation Officer for the purposes of plan printing, microfilming and storage. The Documentation Officer shall provide a copy or copies of the approved amended drawings to the client in accordance with the clients request. The client copy of the drawings shall be supplied with a completed Drawing Register and Document Transmittal Form (Form No TBSOP-405001-TFB001). The Documentation Officer shall retain an A3 size paper master copy of the approved amended drawings for storage in the Master Plan Library. The A1 size approved amended drawing or drawings shall be forwarded to Micrographics Section for microfilming together with the instruction that the microfilm card for the corresponding original drawing or drawings be removed from the permanent record set of microfilm cards retained by Micrographics Section, marked as SUPERSEDED and placed at the back of the set of microfilm cards. The Documentation Officer shall be responsible for; (a) (b) the printing and distribution of the amended drawing or drawings to all officers in possession of half size sets of the drawings the permanent storage of the amended drawing with the Master Copy of half size drawings retained by the Bridge Section.
2. 3.
4.
The corresponding original half size Master Copy of the drawing or drawings shall be marked as superseded in an appropriate manner and shall be retained with the Master Copy for record purposes.
OTB005 Issue 1 Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 3 of 5
6.
After the approved amended A1 size drawing or drawings have been microfilmed and returned from Micrographics Section, the Documentation Officer shall place the amended drawing or drawings in the full size set of drawings retained by the Bridge Engineering Section and update the drawing storage database accordingly.
The corresponding superseded drawing or drawings shall be retained with the full size set of drawings and after having been marked as superseded in an appropriate manner shall be placed at the back of the drawing set.
15.6
AUTHORISATION FOR RELEASE OF AMENDED DRAWINGS

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS 1. Where amendments to the drawing are of a cosmetic or minor nature only, the drafting officer responsible for the preparation of the amended drawing shall record the names of the officers responsible for the initial design, design check and approval by the appropriate Manager in the spaces provided in the title block. The Approval Block, provided for the signature of the Principal Bridge Engineer shall have the name of the appropriate officer recorded electronically, together with the date of the original approval. The drafting officer responsible for the preparation of the amended drawing shall record their initials and the initials of the officer responsible for the checking of the amended drawing in the appropriate spaces in the amendment block immediately above the title block. Initials shall be electronic so that they remain with the drawing file. After having thoroughly checked that the required amendments have been carried out satisfactorily, the officer responsible for authorising the release of the amended drawing shall sign, or initial by hand, in the appropriate space provided in the amendment block immediately above the title block. 3. Where significant changes to the initial design are required i.e. a change in bridge type or span lengths, the officers that formally approved the initial design shall record their signatures by hand in the appropriate spaces in the title block. The completed drawing shall be submitted to the Principal Bridge Engineer for review and signature in the approval box on the drawing. DRAWINGS OTHER THAN GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS The recording of names and/or signatures on drawings other than General Arrangement drawings shall be in accordance with Parts 1 and 2 of Clause 15.5.1 of this Manual. Amended drawings shall not be released from Bridge Engineering Section until the officer responsible for the authorisation of the release of the drawings has initialled or signed by hand in the appropriate space in the revision block. In most cases, the officer responsible for the release of the amended drawing or drawings will be the Manager, Bridge Design Projects, or the Manager, Bridge Rehabilitation Projects under whose supervision the design was initially completed.
2.
OTB005
Page 4 of 5
Where this officer is unavailable to initial the drawing by hand, either the engineer responsible for the design or the Manager, Structural Drafting or the Project Leader responsible for the production of drawings for the project shall be required to initial the drawing by hand in the appropriate area.
OTB005
Page 5 of 5
TO BRANXTON
W BEAM TO THRIE BEAM TRANSITION IN ACCORDANCE WITH RTA DRAWING No MD.R132.B04.A (TYP) 9 450
28 050 9 150 9 450
FROM CESSNOCK
UPSTREAM 0.067% 500 6 105
12 630 11 630 5 525 CONTROL LINE MC00
DOWNSTREAM 500
2 160 NOM
3 945 NOM
VARIES OF EXISTING BRIDGE 970 TO 1015
1.
TO
R 2 000 YEAR HFL RL 58.420
100 YEAR HFL RL 57.206 (INCLUDING AFFLUX)
R
1. 5 TO
WIDENING
RLs AT EXISTING
APPROX EX
ISTING SU
RFACE LEV
DECK SOFFIT
EL
UPSTREAM TEMPORARY CARRIAGEWAY 4 800 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC BARRIER 75 THICK 2/DN 100 CONDUIT (TYP) ASPHALT 3.0%
CONTRACT LEVEL RL 47.500 END OF DECK END OF DECK ABUTMENT B ABUTMENT B OF PIER 2 OF PIER 1
CONTRACT LEVEL RL 47.500 END OF DECK END OF DECK ABUTMENT A ABUTMENT A
WIDENING
WIDENING
EXISTING
EXISTING
CONTRACT LEVEL RL 45.500
CONTRACT LEVEL RL 45.000 SPAN 3 59.451
PSC PLANKS
DATUM RL 44.000 DESIGN SURFACE LEVEL ON CONTROL LINE MC00 APPROX EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL ON CONTROL LINE MC00
SPAN 2 59.457
SPAN 1
CHAINAGE IN CONTROL LINE MC00
ELEVATION
54.00 54.00 55.00 56.00 57.00 58.00
WATERMAIN W W W W W W W 1 W
59.00
EXISTING GUARD FENCE
CH 5 232.820 RL 59.444
CH 5 232.565 RL 59.445
CONTROL LINE MC00
BEARING 338%%d 43 44.1"
ISSUE EXISTING MEMORIAL
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH
CONTROL LINE MC01
59.00
NAME PLATE TYPE B
58.00
PR
S
2 TO 1
IM L E
1.5 T O1
S S S W W W

MAIN ROAD No 220 CITY OF CESSNOCK
RL 58.585
RL 58.615
RL 58.610
RL 58.605 CROSS TO BE RELOCATED
BRIDGE OVER POKOLBIN CREEK AT 5.0km NORTH OF CESSNOCK

59.00
WIDENING GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

PREPARED BY CLIENT HUNTER REGIONAL OFFICE 59 DARBY STREET NEWCASTLE LOCKED BAG 30 NEWCASTLE NSW 2300 PHONE (02) 4924-0240 FACSIMILE (02) 4924-0344
POKOLBIN CREEK
1.5
TO
BRIDGE ENGINEERING QA RECORDS COMPLETED AND DRAWINGS RECOMMENDED FOR APPROVAL 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
EXISTING BRIDGE S S S S S S
58.00
S SEWERMAIN
S
DATE
1 W W W W
PREPARED DESIGN
CHECKED
WATERMAIN
APPROVED
0220 085 BC 0956

DRAWING
1656
PRELIMINARY
SEWER MANHOLE
PLAN
DATE
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No KP2F152.dgn
AR IN
55.00 56.00
CH 5 223.370 RL 59.451
N Y
W W
F T O
55.00
G G GASMAIN W W W CH 5 205.000 RL 59.463 CH 5 214.220 RL 59.457
C R O
56.5 204.770
ST N O
VARIES 10 TO 45 PILE EXTENSION STAGE 1 APPROX PILE G W
59.444
59.445
59.463
59.463
C U R
650 3.0% SURFACE
STAGE 2
N IO T
EXISTING GUARD RAILS AND KERB TO BE DEMOLISHED DOWNSTREAM TEMPORARY CARRIAGEWAY 4 400 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC BARRIER STAGE 1 NEW CONCRETE OVERLAY 2.5% STAGE 2 LEVEL
3000mm
54.9
56.5
56.5
53.5
5km 232.820
232.565
223.370
205.000
214.220
56.5
SECTION
1 -
58.00
57.00
2 TO 1
56.00
1000
2000
1000
500
GENERAL NOTES
0 1 2 3 4 5m
FIGURE 15.2
OR AS SHOWN.
SCALE
1 0.5
DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES CHAINAGES AND REDUCED LEVELS ARE IN METRES
59.00
REDUCED LEVELS ARE RELATED TO AUSTRALIAN HEIGHT DATUM. COMBINED SYSTEM OF WEARING SURFACE AND SUITABLE BITUMINOUS WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE.
NAME PLATE TYPE B CH 5 204.770 RL 59.463 E 345 285.734 N 6 371 036.335 OF EXISTING BRIDGE
TO BE VERIFIED ON SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. TOP OF ABUTMENT WALL AND HEADSTOCK RLs ON SHEET Nos 4, 5 AND 13 SHALL BE ADJUSTED ACCORDINGLY. FOR EXISTING UTILITIES SEE DRAWING REGISTRATION No 0220 085 BA 3799.
FOR CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE SEE SHEET No 6
57.00
56.00
55.00
54.00
54.00
57.00
FROM NEWCASTLE
cBEARINGS L c PIER 1 L c PIER 2 L c PIER 3 L c PIER 4 L c PIER 5 L c PIER 6 L cBEARINGS L
TO TAREE
ABUTMENT A 200 1000 1000 1000 1500 TYP P1 P10 P18 P26 1500 TYP P34 P42 P50 P58
ABUTMENT B
800
2200
P63
P67
P6 1500 1500 1500 3 SPACES AT 2935 = 8805 600 CH 525.800 E 253764.631 N 1467493.966 P2 8 SPACES AT 1100 = 8800 P8 P3 P7 P4 P9 P5 P14 P19 P13 P17 P22 P12 P16 P21 P11 P15 P20 TYPICAL PILE GROUP SPACING P23 P28 P31 P36 P39 P44 P47 P52 1500 P55 P60 P64 2200 2200 2200 2200 P68
P24
P29
P32
P37
P40
P45
P48
P53
P56
P61
2200
2200
2200
P25
P30
P33
P38
P41
P46
P49
P54
2200
P65 P57 P62
P69
1500
1500
1500
1500
P66 1300 P27 P35 CONTROL LINE P43 BEARING P51 10 45 37.7" P59
P70
600
CH 229.800 E 253675.910 N 1467027.121
CH 265.800
CH 310.600
CH 355.400
CH 400.200
CH 445.000
CH 489.800
PILE LAYOUT
NOT TO SCALE
FOUNDATION DESIGN B
PILES SHALL BE FOUNDED IN SANDSTONE/SILTSTONE WITH THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM LENGTH OF ROCK SOCKET:ABUTMENT A 12 PIER 1 - 1500 INTO VERY HIGH STRENGTH SANDSTONE;
GENERAL NOTES
SCALES AS SHOWN MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE SHALL BE 40 MPa. CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B2 STEEL CASING SHALL CONFORM TO AS 3678 GRADE 250. SETTING OUT OF PILES IS GIVEN AT SOFFIT LEVEL OF RELEVANT ABUTMENT HEADSTOCK OR PIER PILE CAP. FREE STANDING PILES IN THE RIVER MAY REQUIRE TEMPORARY SUPPORT UNTIL THE PILE CAP IS CONSTRUCTED. THE WELD CATEGORY SHALL BE GP IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS 1554 PART 1. WELDING SYMBOLS ARE TO AS 1101 PART 3.
- 750 INTO HIGH STRENGTH SANDSTONE; - 1000 INTO HIGH STRENGTH SANDSTONE/SILTSTONE; - 750 INTO HIGH STRENGTH SANDSTONE; - 300 INTO VERY HIGH STRENGTH SANDSTONE.
B
OUTSIDE FACE OF CASING FULL PENETRATION BUTT WELD 7 3.5 12
PIERS 2 TO 7 PIERS 8 TO 10 ABUTMENT B
PERMANENT STEEL CASING SHALL BE EXTENDED DOWN TO THE ROCK LEVEL AND PRE-BORING MAY BE REQUIRED. ROCK CLASSIFICATION IS BASED ON SAA SITE INVESTIGATION CODE AS1726-1981
13.5
FULL PENETRATION BUTT WELD 10.5
DESIGN LOADS
THE MAXIMUM CALCULATED DESIGN ULTIMATE PILE AXIAL LOAD; ABUTMENT A = -3200kN (TENSION) 6600kN (COMPRESSION) = -550kN (TENSION) B 11.11.06
FIGURE 15. 4.1
1.5 TYP PILE DRIVING SHOE
3.5
3.5
PIERS 1 TO 10 = OUTSIDE FACE OF CASING
PERMANENT STEEL CASING PLATE THICKNESS REVISED AND SUGGESTED PROCEDURE NOTE DELETED ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH IRH JC
1.5 500 TYP
4500kN (COMPRESSION) = -300kN (TENSION)
ABUTMENT B =
4000kN (COMPRESSION)
MAXIMUM CALCULATED DESIGN ULTIMATE PILE MOMENT; ABUTMENT A PIERS 1 TO 10 20 = = = 1300kN m 950kN m 1000kN m

HIGHWAY No 10 SHIRE OF GREAT LAKES
WELD SPLICE DETAIL IN STEEL CASING

20 25
10 5
ABUTMENT B
BRIDGE OVER KARUAH RIVER

AT KARUAH PILE LAYOUT
PREPARED BY CLIENT MAJOR PROJECTS OFFICE 47 DARBY STREET NEWCASTLE PO BOX 469 NEWCASTLE NSW 2300 PHONE (02) 4924-0289 FACSIMILE (02) 4929-5271 BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0805 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
THE LOADS/MOMENTS SPECIFIED HEREIN APPLY TO THE PILES AND PILE LAYOUT AS DESIGNED. CHANGES TO THE PILES AND THE PILE LAYOUT WHICH SIGNIFICANTLY
5
0 10 20 30 40 50mm
ALTER THE BEHAVIOUR OF THE PILES INDIVIDUALLY OR AS A GROUP MAY ALTER THESE LOADS/MOMENTS OR THE BEHAVIOUR OF THE WHOLE STRUCTURE AND MAY NOT BE ACCEPTABLE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE QUALITY OF THE FOUNDATION MATERIAL BY INSPECTIONS OF THE FOUNDATION MATERIAL FOR ALL PILES, IN ACCORDANCE WITH PART B58 OF THE SPECIFICATION.
DETAIL
A
PREPARED CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS
2
DESIGN
0 10 20 30 40 50mm
0010 410 BC 2801

RTA BRIDGE NUMBER
DRAWING
10 5
1234
ISSUE STATUS: FOR CONSTRUCTION
END BEARING EXAMPLE SHOWN

SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No KP2F1541.dgn

HIGHWAY No 17 NEWELL HIGHWAY SHIRE OF URANA
BRIDGE OVER COLOMBO CREEK

AT 33.3km SOUTH OF NARRANDERA
TO
RA
DESIGN FILE: 5M2364 DESIGN STANDARD: AS 5100 - BRIDGE DESIGN TRAFFIC LOADING:
NUMBER OF HEAVY VEHICLES PER LANE PER DAY: 1250 ROUTE FACTOR: 4
STUR T HW Y
ILW
ARDLETHAN
AY
LEETON YANCO
DESIGN TRAFFIC SPEED: 100 km PER HOUR TRAFFIC BARRIER PERFORMANCE LEVEL: MEDIUM EARTHQUAKE LOADING: AS 5100.2-2004
BRIDGE CLASSIFICATION: TYPE II IMPORTANCE FACTOR: I = 1.25 ACCELERATION COEFFICIENT: a = 0.08 SITE FACTOR: s = 0.67 DESIGN CATEGORY: BEDC-1
MR 596
RA IL W
A N
1 COVER SHEET 2 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT 3 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE B 4 PILES AND PILE LAYOUT 5 ABUTMENTS CONCRETE
9 DECK - SHEET A 10 DECK - SHEET B 11 DECK - SHEET C 12 DECK - SHEET D 13 TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING - PANELS 14 TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING - DETAILS 15 BAR SHAPES DIAGRAM
HW 17
Y
NEWELL HWY
MORUNDAH
BRIDGE SITE
ee k
MR 385
T R IL O D E R
IE
JE
Co
lo
bo
Cr
TO URANA
WIND LOADING: AS 5100.2-2004

DESIGN WIND SPEED = 40m/s WIND TERRAIN CATEGORY: 2 WIND REGION: A3 AVERAGE RECURRENCE INTERVAL ULS: R = 2000
LOCALITY PLAN
THE BRIDGE SITE IS APPROXIMATELY 600kmBY ROAD FROM SYDNEY 0 10 5 10 20 30 40 50Km
6 ABUTMENTS REINFORCEMENT 7 PIERS 8 7m SPAN PSC PLANK
AVERAGE RECURRENCE INTERVAL SLS: R = 20 NET PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH D2 OF AS 1170.2
FLOOD DATA:
100 YEAR FLOW VELOCITY: 2.4m/s 2000 YEAR FLOW VELOCITY: 2.5m/s 100 YEAR FLOOD LEVEL: RL 19.5 (AHD) 2000 YEAR FLOOD LEVEL: RL 19.8 (AHD)
REFERENCE REPORTS
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT: GIR 0017/27 HYDRAULIC MODELLING AND WATERWAYS REQUIREMENTS REPORT: HWR 0017/27
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
B ISSUE
12.10.06 DATE
WIND LOADING VALUES REVISED REVISION
SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS
HW 14
IRH PREP
MB CHK AUTH
DESIGNED AND PRODUCED UNDER A QUALITY SYSTEM CERTIFIED AS COMPLYING WITH ISO/AS 9001 BY AN ACCREDITED CERTIFICATION BODY
0017 453 BC 6538

CAD No:
FIGURE 15.4.2
SHEET No
No OF SHEETS
15
ISSUE
SECTION 16
WORK-AS-EXECUTED DRAWINGS
Work-As-Executed Drawings
16
16.1 GENERAL
WORK-AS-EXECUTED DRAWINGS
Work-as-Executed drawings shall be prepared for all bridges designed by the Authority, designed by Consultants for the Authority and for bridges that are constructed under Design and Construct and similar contracts and will become the property of the Authority in the future.
16.2
STANDARD OF WORK REQUIRED

(a) Drawings shall be thoroughly checked to ensure that all the departures from the approved design have been shown correctly on the drawings. Any departures from the approved design shall be clearly marked in red ink on a high quality, A1 size paper copy of the drawings. (b) Where departures from the approved design have been shown, they shall be correctly highlighted i.e. enclosed by a continuous wavy line (as shown in Figure 7.1 in this Manual) and the letters WAE (in red ink) shall be placed in close proximity to the highlighted area. (c) The amendment block immediately above the title block shall be completed with the correct information to reflect the WAE changes i.e. ISSUE WAE DATE As appropriate REVISION A brief description of changes from the approved design PREP Initialled by the Officer responsible for recording the changes CHK Initialled by the Engineer responsible for the project design or other officer as appropriate.
(d) A stamp or lettering, similar to that shown below, (in red ink) shall be placed in an appropriate position on each WAE drawing and the name, position and signature of the officer certifying the WAE drawings (in black ink) appears inside the box surrounding the lettering.
THESE PLANS SHOW WORK-AS-EXECUTED ............................................... TITLE OF THE OFFICER CERTIFYING THE WAE DRAWINGS
It is the responsibility of the officer certifying the WAE drawings to ensure that the WAE drawings contain all information on the departures from the approved design and detailing as documented in relevant correspondence and other documents during the construction of the bridge. Copies of such correspondence shall be placed on the general file for the subject bridge and shall be followed up to ensure all matters pertaining to any questionable areas are resolved and recorded accordingly.
Work-As-Executed Drawings
(e) Following the certification of Work-as-Executed drawings, the drawings shall be forwarded by the certifying officer (or by a person appointed by the certifying officer) to the RTAs Micrographics Section for the purposes of Microfilming so that a permanent record of the Work-as-Executed drawings can be made. (f) An A3 size paper copy of the Work-as-Executed drawings shall be ordered and provided to the RTAs Bridge Engineering Section for records and future reference purposes. These drawings shall be stored in the A3 Master plan storage cabinet by the Documentation Officer.
(g) Where the Work-as-Executed drawings supplied are for a structure deemed to be of structural, architectural or historical significance, the completed original drawings shall be forwarded to the NSW Office of State Archives for permanent retention and storage.
16.3
PROJECTS DESIGNED AND CONSTRUCTED UNDER CONTRACT
Where projects are completed under a Design and Construct, Build Own Operate Transfer, Public Private Paternership or other similar type of contract, the companies responsible for the design and construction of the project shall submit an A1 size paper copy of Work-as-Executed (WAE) set of drawings, prepared in accordance with Clause 16.2 above, to the RTAs representative for the purposes of microfilming in colour. The WAE plans provided to the Authority should be verified and certified (refer to Clause 16.2 (d) above) endorsed by an RTA representative or other RTA delegated officer.
OTB005
Page 2 of 2
SECTION 17
LOCALITY AND SITE PLANS
Locality and Site Plans
17
17.1 LOCALITY PLAN
LOCALITY AND SITE PLANS
The locality plan is provided to show the location of the construction work in relation to the existing road network and nearby towns. It shall be drawn in a square frame, 100 mm x 100 mm, to a scale as shown in Clause 5.7 of this Manual, and orientated with North pointing towards the top of the sheet. The following information shall be provided: The actual construction site shall be located by a 5 mm diameter circle and labelled "BRIDGE SITE" The distance by road from Sydney (as shown on Figure 18.4.1 in this Manual) The nearest major towns referenced in the "FROM" and "TO" statements on the elevation (where possible)
Locality Plans shall be provided on all Concept Sketches, Proposal Sketches and drawing set Cover Sheets.
17.2
SITE PLAN
The area to be covered in the site plan should be large enough to cover the whole of the construction site and the adjacent surrounding area. It should be drawn in a rectangular frame with the longer side parallel to the bottom of the sheet, to a scale as shown in Clause 5.7 of this Manual. The orientation of the site plan should be the same as for the Plan view on the General Arrangement. The following information should be shown where appropriate: Extent of the structure to be built (in the form of a small rectangle or a shape which is identical to the actual structure and marked BRIDGE SITE) Outline of existing bridge and roadway and the existing deck level as appropriate Bench mark (where located within Site Plan boundaries, or location description where not included within Site Plan boundaries) Relevant roadwork and survey information Location and extent of any sidetrack (where used) Position of all public utilities in close proximity to, or to be carried on the structure, whether existing or proposed Building and property boundaries in close proximity to the construction site
Site Plans shall be provided on all Concept Sketches, Proposal Sketches and General Arrangement drawings with the orientation of the Site Plan being identical to the actual Plan of the structure on these drawings.
OTB005
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 18
CONCEPT AND PROPOSAL SKETCHES
Proposal Sketches
18
18.1
CONCEPT AND PROPOSAL SKETCHES
GENERAL
A Bridge Design Proposal is comprised of RTA Form No 62 Bridge Design Proposal and a Proposal Sketch. A Proposal Sketch is a plan or set of plans prepared to depict what is considered to be the most appropriate type of structure for the site under consideration and shows the location, details of the site, the type of construction and the major dimensions of the proposed bridge.
18.2
CONCEPT SKETCHES
A Concept Sketch is a design development sketch used to assist both design staff and the client with the choice of the most appropriate type of structure for the site under consideration. Concept Sketch development is often used to trial multiple options or alternatives for the proposed bridge site in order that client input and feedback may be obtained prior to the selection of the preferred option. Options may include various horizontal and vertical alignments as well as superstructure types, bridge lengths, bridge widths and locations. The information to be shown on Concept Sketches is similar to that shown for Proposal Sketches as outlined below, however, in most instances, the information shown is less refined than that for a Proposal Sketch. A typical Concept Sketch is shown in Figures 18.2.1A and 18.2.1B. Concept sketches submitted by the tenderer on design and construct and similar contracts should be of a similar standard.
18.3
REGISTRATION AND NUMBERING

When prepared by the Authoritys Bridge Engineering Section, all Concept Sketches and Proposal Sketches, shall be registered as sketches and numbered in accordance with Section 3 of this Manual.
18.4
INFORMATION TO BE SHOWN ON PROPOSAL SKETCHES

The following information shall be shown on Proposal Sketches. Plan View Elevation Typical Cross Section Locality Plan Site Plan Vertical Alignment Diagram (if applicable) Horizontal Alignment Diagram (if applicable) General Notes Title Block The information to be shown (where relevant) is as stated below. Where the information to be shown is not available at the time that the Proposal Sketch is prepared, it shall be requested from the relevant Clients office.
OTB005
Page 1 of 6
Proposal Sketches
A typical Proposal Sketch is shown in Figures 18.4.1(a) and 18.4.1(b). 18.4.1 Plan View An outline of the structure The watercourse, railway line or road under the structure Any existing structure (if applicable) including the RL of the existing deck The location of any public utilities The Base centreline or Control Line and Carriageway centreline as appropriate Chainages on the Base centreline or Control Line at the ends of deck and at each pier centreline together with the RL at each location The bearing or radius of the Base centreline or Control Line as appropriate The outline of concrete safety barriers, footways and railings as appropriate Joints in the deck surface represented by a single heavy line The position of name plates The outlines of the structural elements ie abutments, piers, piles, footings and columns etc where the scale of the sketch permits Horizontal clearances as appropriate The location of any minimum vertical clearance referenced from the Elevation Contours of the existing surface Shapes and slopes of any embankments Extent of any embankment protection required Extent of any channel excavation required The direction of flow of the watercourse or conventional tidal representation The compass direction of True North indicated by a suitable north point The outline of parapet extensions, approach slabs and steel safety barrier in the approaches For bridges over other roads, the Easting and Northing of the intersection point of the centrelines (or Control Lines) or chainages on centrelines (or Control Lines) as appropriate
18.4.2 Elevation The outline of the elevation face of the structure projected from the Plan view showing foundation type, abutments, piers, superstructure and railings. The overall length of deck The number and length of spans The grade on the deck (represented by an arrow and % sign) or the reduced level of the deck as appropriate The normal water level or stream condition ie normally dry etc Mean High Water Springs and Mean Low Water Springs for tidal waters Navigational clearances above Mean High Water Springs for navigable waterways High flood level both calculated (ie the 1 in 100 year ARI and the 1in 2000 year ARI) and reported with a date for the reported high flood level Minimum vertical and horizontal clearances for structures over roads and/or railways including the approximate design surface level of any road or railway line under the structure at the Base centreline Vertical and horizontal clearances for opening span bridges both open and closed The existing surface on the Base centreline projected from contour levels Proposed cross section for channel excavation Form and extent of any embankments and any required embankment protection whether above or below the existing Natural Surface Concrete Safety Barrier extensions, approach slabs and approach steel safety barrier Contract levels of foundation elements Bearing types represented by the letters 'F' for fixed, R for restrained and 'E' for expansion
Issue 1 Revision 1 (16 May 2008) Page 2 of 6
OTB005
Proposal Sketches
Joints in the superstructure represented by a single heavy line. Expansion (moveable) joints should be labelled EJ Chainages, existing surface levels and design surface levels at the ends of deck and at each pier on the Base centreline or Control Line, given in a Datum block below the Elevation Datum Level-usually to Australian Height Datum however an assumed local datum may be used Structure location with respect to nearest major towns ie FROM / TO
18.4.3 Typical Cross Section General form of the piers or abutments including foundation elements Outline of the superstructure elements Overall width of the superstructure Width between concrete safety barriers Widths of concrete safety barriers and/or footways Clear width of footways Railing type or types, as appropriate Safety Screens and noise walls, as appropriate Railway safety screens as appropriate Base centreline, Control Line and/or Carriageway centreline Crossfall or superelevation represented by an arrow and % sign Type and thickness of wearing surface Indication of orientation with respect to stream flow or compass point ie UPSTREAM or DOWNSTREAM, NORTH or SOUTH Roadway lighting, as appropriate
18.4.4 Skew Diagram The Skew Diagram shall be in the following format: A right angle triangle with the base parallel to the setting out line or base centreline, the hypotenuse parallel to the abutment and pier centrelines and with the skew angle designated at the apex of the triangle.
The Skew Diagram shall contain the following information: A dimension for the vertical side of the triangle (normally 10 000). A dimension for the base and hypotenuse of the triangle calculated from the vertical dimension and the skew angle. See Figure 21.5 for an example of the correct representation of a Skew Diagram. 18.4.5 Vertical Alignment Diagram The length of the vertical curve The grade on the road at each end of the vertical curve The chainage and reduced level at each end of the vertical curve The chainage and reduced level of the intersection point of the approach grades on the Control Line or Base centreline The chainage and reduced level at each end of the bridge together with a heavy line to represent the bridge location
OTB005
Page 3 of 6
Proposal Sketches
18.4.6 Site Plan Control Line or Base centreline, including the position of any Tangent Points etc The position and chainage of each end of the bridge The existing bridge (if applicable) including the RL of the existing deck Survey Marks and Bench Marks (including RL) obtained from Road Design plans or the RTAs Survey Services Section Road boundaries The location of any existing public utilities The location and description of any nearby features which are likely to affect the construction of the new bridge A suitable Northpoint
18.4.7 Locality Plan -
Bridge Site Major nearby towns referenced in the Elevation (if appropriate) State Highways and Main Roads (as applicable) State Borders (as applicable) Railway lines (as applicable) Rivers and creeks (as applicable)
18.4.8 General Notes The General Notes on the Proposal Sketch shall be in the format shown for General Arrangement Drawings on the current issue of RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB029 with the blank spaces being filled in with the appropriate information. 18.4.9 Title Block Road type and number eg Main Road No 246, Highway No 10, Freeway No F3, Motorway No M5 Local Government Area name eg Shire of Byron, City of Greater Taree See Clause 4.5 of this Manual - Council names shall not be used Sketch number Title and location of the bridge Sheet number and Issue
18.5
DRAWING CONVENTIONS
The preferred scales for use on Proposal Sketches are 1:1, 1:2, 1:2.5 and 1:5 or their decimal multiples represented in the format shown in Section 7 of this Manual. Views shall be drawn to a definable scale and shall be labelled appropriately. The Plan and Elevation shall be drawn to the same scale with the Elevation being projected from and directly above the Plan. Chainages shall increase from left to right in most applications, the only exception being where the Proposal is for a bridge widening. In the case of a bridge widening, the Proposal shall be prepared in accordance with Section 30 of this Manual. Abutments shall be labelled Abutment A (for the left hand end of the bridge the end with the lowest chainage), and Abutment B (for the right hand end of the bridge the end with the highest chainage ), the only exception being where the Proposal is for a bridge widening. In the case of a bridge widening, abutments shall be labelled in accordance with Section 30 of this Manual.
OTB005
Page 4 of 6
Proposal Sketches
Spans and Piers shall be numbered ie Span 1, Pier 1 as appropriate. Chainages and Reduced Levels shall be given to the nearest 0.001m. Contract levels shall be given to the nearest 0.1m. Existing surface levels shall be given to the nearest 0.1m Arrows that denote the grade of the deck, crossfall or superelevation shall always point in a downward direction (from the higher end/side to the lower end/side)
18.6
ORIENTATION
18.6.1 LOCALITY PLAN The Locality Plan shall be orientated with the cardinal directions of the compass square to the borders of the sheet, with North being at the top. 18.6.2 PLAN AND SITE PLAN The Plan and Site Plan shall be orientated in the same direction for convenient reference.
18.7
ISSUE OF PRELIMINARY SKETCHES

Where prepared by the RTAs Bridge Engineering Section, any Concept or Proposal Sketch that has not been formally approved and is issued to any party for the purpose of checking, comment or review, shall be marked to clearly show the stage of development of the sketch. This shall be shown as percentage complete and it shall be placed beside the words Issue Status in the title block, a typical description being 75% COMPLETE. Sketches that are in the development stage shall have a numerical character shown in the Issue box in the bottom right hand corner of the title block. The first issue of the sketch for the purpose of checking shall be denoted Issue 0. When Issue 0 is amended it shall become Issue 1 and this number shall be updated with each successive issue of the sketch.
18.8
SUBMISSION OF PROPOSAL SKETCHES FOR APPROVAL BY CLIENT

Proposal Sketches that are to be submitted to the client for approval shall have Issue A recorded in the appropriate position in the title block and the words FOR APPROVAL entered into the space provided beside the words Issue Status in the title block.
18.9
AMENDMENTS TO APPROVED PROPOSALS

Approved Proposal Sketches may only be amended in accordance with Clause 15.4 of this Manual. Where significant changes to an approved Proposal Sketch are required, eg span lengths, structure width, superstructure type etc, a new Proposal Sketch shall be prepared with the new Proposal Sketch containing a reference to the superseded Proposal Sketch.
18.10
PREPARATION OF SKETCHES FOR HERITAGE ISSUE CONSIDERATION

Where sketches are prepared for rehabilitation work on existing bridges that are to be submitted to the client and the Heritage Office for consideration, the structure shall be shown in its existing condition and the convention of showing existing work in existing line style (double dashed chain line) is not required.
OTB005
Page 5 of 6
Proposal Sketches
In the case of plans, part plans, elevations, part elevations, sections and part sections, a view of the structure in its existing condition shall be shown directly above (or beside as appropriate) the structure in its proposed condition following the required rehabilitation works so that direct comparison can be readily made. In order to satisfactorily illustrate the proposed changes to the existing structure, only those elements to be replaced need be shown in normal line intensity. Existing elements that will remain shall be shown in lines with reduced intensity or in grey scale. As the sketches do not show strict engineering details, an architectural presentation style may be adopted. Figures 18.10.1 18.10.5 show a typical example of a suite of sketches prepared for heritage issue consideration in rehabilitation works.
OTB005
Page 6 of 6
FROM PITNACREE
TO DUNGOG
6 000 APPROACH SLAB 35 000 SPAN 1 35 000 SPAN 2 35 000 SPAN 3 35 000 SPAN 4 OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK ALONG CONTROL LINE MC = 350 000 35 000 SPAN 5 35 000 SPAN 6 35 000 SPAN 7 35 000 SPAN 8 35 000 SPAN 9 35 000 SPAN 10
6 000 APPROACH SLAB
EJ E E F E E
EJ
MHWS RL 0.52 CALCULATED 1:100

OF PIER 4 OF PIER 2 OF PIER 5 OF PIER 7 OF PIER 3 OF PIER 6 OF PIER 8
END OF DECK ABUTMENT A
OF PIER 1
YEAR HFL RL 9.630
MLWS RL -0.13
OF PIER 9
END OF DECK ABUTMENT B
DATUM RL -20.000 DESIGN SURFACE LEVELS ON CONTROL LINE MC
14.070
14.070
12.600
13.580
13.886
13.886
13.580
EXISTING SURFACE
-0.3 -1.2 7.4 2.4 4.6 7.6 6.0 0.6 7.8 7.6
LEVELS ON CONTROL LINE MC
445.000
480.000
375.000
550.000
585.000
620.000
655.000
690.000
CHAINAGE ON CONTROL LINE MC
1km
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
-0.0
-1.0
-1.5
-1.5
-1.0
-0.5
8.0
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.0
6.5
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
0.0
0.5
1.5
2.5
3.5
4.5
5.5
6.0
ELEVATION
CH 410.000
2
TB
6.5
7.0
7.5
7.5
7.0
6.5
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.0 9.0
9.0
8.5
725.000
8.0 7.5
410.000
515.000
7.0
12.600
13.150
14.131
13.151
7.0
1
CH 445.000
TB
RL 13.150
1 TO
CH 480.000 RL 13.886
CH 515.000 CH 550.000 RL 14.070 RL 14.131 585.000 RL 14.070
RL 13.580 CH 375.000 RL 12.600

TB
1.
CH 620.000 RL 13.886 CH 655.000 RL 13.580 STEEL SAFETY CH 690.000 RL 13.151 BARRIER THRIE BEAM
1.
TB
CONTROL LINE
MC
CH 725.000 RL 12.600
TB
1.
NAME PLATE
T 1
TB
R 1 300 000
ON WING WALL
2 2
1 2
APPROACH SLAB
HU
TB
NAME PLATE
2 TO 1
ON WING WALL
TB
TB
-0.5
-1.0
-1.0
-0.5
8.0
8.0
7.5
7.5
8.0
8.0
7.5
7.0
6.5
6.0
5.5
6.5
6.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5 1.0
0.5
0.0
0.0
0.5 1.0
1.5
2.5
3.5
4.5
5.5
6.5
7.5
8.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
PLAN
GENERAL NOTES
UBD Directory under Licence to RTA by Sensis Pty Ltd
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH

MAIN ROAD No 101
10 20 30m
CITY OF MAITLAND
SCALES
10 5
BRIDGE OVER HUNTER RIVER

AT 2.1km NORTH OF EAST MAITLAND CONCEPT SKETCH OPTION 1 - SHEET A
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 CLIENT HUNTER REGION MAJOR PROJECTS 47 DARBY STREET NEWCASTLE PO BOX 489 NEWCASTLE NSW 2300 PHONE (02) 4924-0289 FACSIMILE (02) 4929-5271
DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES. CHAINAGES AND REDUCED LEVELS ARE IN METRES. REDUCED LEVELS ARE RELATED TO AUSTRALIAN HEIGHT DATUM TP DENOTES TANGENT POINT. CL DENOTES CONTRACT LEVEL. E DENOTES EXPANSION BEARING. F DENOTES FIXED BEARING. R DENOTES RESTRAINED BEARING. EJ DENOTES EXPANSION JOINT.
PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
CHECKED
SKETCH No
LOCALITY PLAN
THE BRIDGE SITE IS APPROXIMATELY 174 km BY ROAD FROM SYDNEY
CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SHALL CONFORM TO RTA SPECIFICATION B344 OR BPC2005/02. WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SHALL BE OVERLAYED WITH 75mm THICK ASPHALT.
KD803CS1
RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: PRELIMINARY
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
KP2F1821A.dgn
BRIDGE SITE
7.0
FIGURE 18.2.1(a)
1.
APPROACH SLAB
T O
TITLE BOUNDARY
2 TO 1
6.5
2 TO 1 2 TO 1
5 T O 1
NTE RR IVE R
UPSTREAM 12 220
DOWNSTREAM
UPSTREAM 12 220
DOWNSTREAM
610
2 000 SHOULDER 75 THICK ASPHALT 3%
3 500 TRAVEL LANE
3 500 TRAVEL LANE
2 000 SHOULDER
610 REGULAR PERFORMANCE LEVEL TRAFFIC BARRIER
610
2 000 SHOULDER 75 THICK ASPHALT 3%
3 500 TRAVEL LANE
3 500 TRAVEL LANE
2 000 SHOULDER
610 REGULAR PERFORMANCE LEVEL TRAFFIC BARRIER
CONTROL LINE MC
DESIGN SURFACE LEVEL 3%
CONTROL LINE MC
DESIGN SURFACE LEVEL 3%
1800 DEEP 3% SUPER T GIRDERS 3% 3% 3%
1800 DEEP SUPER T GIRDERS
EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL

1 000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MHWS RL 0.52 RL -0.25 MLWS RL -0.13 NEW SURFACE LEVEL AFTER POSSIBLE PERMANENT SCOUR CLADDING TO EXTEND DOWN IN THE EVENT OF PERMANENT SCOUR
1 000
1 500 PERMANENTLY CASED CAST-IN-PLACE PILE FOUNDED ON ROCK - TYP 1 500 PERMANENTLY CASED CAST-IN-PLACE PILE FOUNDED ON ROCK - TYP
SECTION
1 1
RADIAL
SECTION
2 1
RADIAL
FIGURE 18.2.1(b)
-0.500
FROM PITNACREE
TO DUNGOG
GENERAL NOTES
0 1 000 2 000 3 000mm
CONTROL LINE MC
SCALE
1 000
500
FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS DRAWING, SEE SHEET No 1
TYP
TYP
LENGTH OF VC = 400 000 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH 200 000
CH 1 350.000
200 000

CH 1 750.000
CH 1 550.000
RL 12.131
MAIN ROAD No 101

RL 12.131
CITY OF MAITLAND
RL 16.131
0%
BRIDGE OVER HUNTER RIVER

AT 2.1km NORTH OF EAST MAITLAND CONCEPT SKETCH OPTION 1 - SHEET B
PREPARED BY CLIENT HUNTER REGION MAJOR PROJECTS 47 DARBY STREET NEWCASTLE PO BOX 489 NEWCASTLE NSW 2300 PHONE (02) 4924-0289 FACSIMILE (02) 4929-5271 BRIDGE ENGINEERING
ABUTMENT A CH 1375.000 TP CH 1364.682
2.0
-2.0
0%
ABUTMENT B CH 1725.000
TP CH 1751.321
ABUTMENT A ABUTMENT B CH 1 375.000 CH 1 725.000
PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
PREPARED DESIGN
CHECKED
SKETCH No
KD803CS1
RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: PRELIMINARY ISSUE
SITE PLAN
NOT TO SCALE
VERTICAL ALIGNMENT
DRAWING NOT TO SCALE
SHEET No
CAD No
KP2F1821B.dgn
5.000
1460.000
1480.000
1440.000
1500.000
1420.000
1520.000
1400.000
1540.000
1380.000
1560.000
1360.000
1580.000
1340.000
RL 12.600
RL 12.600
1320.000
1600.000
HU NTE RR IVE R
1620.00 0
1640.00 0
1660.0 00
1680.0 00
1700.0 00
1720 .000
1740 .000
1760 .000
1780 .000
6 050 APPROACH STEEL SAFETY BARRIER (THRIE BEAM), TYP SLAB 50 45 020
OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK = 87 510 ALONG CONTROL LINE MC00 42 480 50
6 050 APPROACH SLAB W BEAM TO THRIE BEAM TRANSITION IN ACCORDANCE WITH RTA DRAWING No WD.R132.B04.A, TYP
DESIGN SURFACE LEVEL MIN CLEARANCE REQUIRED = 5 300 MIN CLEARANCE PROVIDED = 5 600 WOODLANDS CREEK BRIDGE SITE APPROXIMATE EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL ON CONTROL LINE MC00 MR 185 ACCESS RAMP ON CONTROL LINE MC00
REINFORCED SOIL WALL SPAN 1 SPAN 2 REINFORCED SOIL WALL
DATUM RL 5.000 DESIGN SURFACE LEVEL ON CONTROL LINE MC00
APPROX EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL ON CONTROL LINE MC00 CHAINAGE ON CONTROL LINE MC00
LOCALITY PLAN
THE BRIDGE SITE IS APPROXIMATELY 70km BY ROAD FROM SYDNEY
NOT TO SCALE
ELEVATION GENERAL NOTES

0 2 4 6 8 10m
SCALE
2 1
OR AS SHOWN.
FENCE MAJOR TRANSMISSION LINES AND POWER POLES 1 2
UNDERGROUND STORMWATER PIPES
DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES. CHAINAGES AND REDUCED LEVELS ARE IN METRES. REDUCED LEVELS ARE RELATED TO AUSTRALIAN HEIGHT DATUM.
LEGEND INVERT OR OBVERT OF PIPE
CH 259.620 RL 27.027
CO NT ROL LIN EM C 0 0
FENCE LINE EXISTING ROADS TREES SEWER MAIN MAJOR TRANSMISSION LINES TELEPHONE LINE WATER MAIN
FIGURE 18.4.1(a)
CH 214.590 RL 26.003
FIBRE OPTIC CABLE GAS MAIN
CH 302.100
1 2 FENCES HIGHWAY No 1 CITY OF WOLLONGONG
RL 27.387
BRIDGE No 2 OVER WOODLANDS CREEK

FENCE
AND MAIN ROAD No 185 ACCESS RAMPS AT BULLI PASS INTERCHANGE PROPOSAL SKETCH - SHEET A
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CLIENT SOUTHERN REGIONAL OFFICE 90 CROWN STREET WOLLONGONG PO BOX 477 WOLLONGONG NSW 2500 PHONE (02) 4221-2460 FACSIMILE (02) 4221-2777
KD554PS
DENOTES LOCATION OF TELEPHONE SINGLE MINIMUM VERTICAL CLEARANCE CONCRETE PIT PRELIMINARY
PLAN
1
CAD No KP2F1841(a).dgn
DOWNSTREAM
UPSTREAM
BRIDGE No 2 OVER WOODLANDS CREEK AND MAIN ROAD No 185 ACCESS RAMPS
BRIDGE No 1 OVER WOODLANDS CREEK 525 6 900 MEDIUM LEVEL BARRIER
19 250 CONTROL LINE MC00 11 300 525
75 THICK ASPHALT 100 UPVC PIPE
MAJOR TRANSMISSION LINES AND POWER POLES MR 185 LAWRENCE APPROXIMATE EXISTING TELEPHONE TWIN CONCRETE PIT SURFACE LEVEL HARGRAVE DRIVE
MAJOR TRANSMISSION LINES AND POWER POLES
1200 CAST-IN PLACE PILES
SECTION
TELEPHONE TWIN CONCRETE PIT TELEPHONE SINGLE CONCRETE PIT TELEPHONE SINGLE CONCRETE PIT MINOR TRANSMISSION LINES
1 1
RADIAL
BRIDGE No 3 OVER WOODLANDS CREEK
50 000 LENGTH OF VERTICAL CURVE UNDERGROUND STORM WATER TREE MINOR TRANSMISSION LINES BRIDGE No 4 OVER WOODLANDS CREEK
VERTICAL CURVE DIAGRAM

NOT TO SCALE
FIGURE 18.4.1(b)
GENERAL NOTES
0 10 20 30m
SCALE
10 5
OR AS SHOWN. HIGHWAY No 1 CITY OF WOLLONGONG
FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET SEE SHEET No 1
BRIDGE No 2 OVER WOODLANDS CREEK AND MAIN ROAD No 185 ACCESS RAMPS AT BULLI PASS INTERCHANGE PROPOSAL SKETCH - SHEET B
PREPARED BY CLIENT SOUTHERN REGIONAL OFFICE 90 CROWN STREET WOLLONGONG PO BOX 477 WOLLONGONG NSW 2500 PHONE (02) 4221-2460 FACSIMILE (02) 4221-2777 BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150
INVERT OR OBVERT OF PIPE FENCE LINE EXISTING ROADS TREES
SEWER MAIN MAJOR TRANSMISSION LINES TELEPHONE LINE WATER MAIN FIBRE OPTIC CABLE
PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
KD554PS
PRELIMINARY
SITE PLAN
GAS MAIN
CAD No KP2F1841(b).dgn
FROM ST ALBANS 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 6 5 9 for details of proposed changes to spans 4 and 5 see sheet no 3 6 7 7 8 8 9
TO WISEMANS FERRY
K:\Bridge\Users\Ian\SDMANUAL-MASTER\2006SKETCHES\KP2F1810A.dgn
for details of proposed changes to spans 1, 2 and 3 see sheet no 2 top of deck
for details of proposed changes to span 6 see sheet no 4
SPAN 1
SPAN 2
SPAN 3
SPAN 6
SPAN 4
abutment a centreline centreline centreline
SPAN 5
abutment b centreline
pier 2
pier 1
1 5
2 5
3 5
4 6
5 9
6 7
7 8
8 9
ELEVATION as existing
centreline centreline centreline
9 10
9 10
bridge centreline
pier 5
pier 3
pier 4
10 10
10 10
9 144
10 668
10 668
36 023
36 023
9 848
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH
GENERAL NOTES
0 2 4 6 8 10m
SCALE
2 1
OR AS SHOWN.
plan as existing

MAIN ROAD No 181 CITY OF HAWKESBURY
BRIDGE OVER MACDONALD RIVER AT ST ALBANS

HERITAGE CONCEPT SKETCH
DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES.
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT - EXISTING BRIDGE

PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0855 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CLIENT SYDNEY ASSET MANAGEMENT 85 FLUSHCOMBE ROAD BLACKTOWN PO BOX 558 BLACKTOWN NSW 2148 PHONE (02) 8814-2939 FACSIMILE (02) 8814-2123
CHECKED
SKETCH No
KA567
413
FIGURE 18.10.1(a)
MANAGER, BRIDGE REHABILITATION PROJECTS
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No KP2F1810A.dgn
14/08/2007
9:59:54 AM
1 5
2 5 remove existing stress laminated timber deck
3 5 remove existing guardRAIL and posts
remove existing concrete abutment
over spans 1, 2 and 3
top of deck
remove existing timber headstocks 2 5 existing stone facing to be maintained remove existing timber pier timber beams over spans 1, 2 and 3 remove existing timber pier remove existing
SPAN 1
SPAN 2 approx existing surface level
SPAN 3
cut back existing timber piles below ground level cut back existing timber piles below ground level
elevation showing existing

1 5 3 5
10 712 1 5 2 5 and timber deck over spans 1, 2 and 3 new composite concrete 3 5 and posts new steel guardRAILS
top of deck
new steel piles and concrete abutment existing stone facing to be maintained
2 5 new timber TRESTLE pier
new timber TRESTLE pier 10 668
SPAN 1
SPAN 2 approx existing surface level
SPAN 3
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH


new steel piles and concrete pilecap
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT - SPANS 1, 2 AND 3

PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET CLIENT SYDNEY ASSET MANAGEMENT 85 FLUSHCOMBE ROAD BLACKTOWN PO BOX 558 BLACKTOWN NSW 2148 PHONE (02) 8814-2939 FACSIMILE (02) 8814-2123
1 5 10 478 10 668
3 5 PREPARED DESIGN
CHECKED
SKETCH No
KA567
GENERAL NOTES
0 1 000 2 000 3 000mm
elevation showing proposed

OR AS SHOWN.
DRAWING
413
SCALE
1 000 500
FIGURE 18.10(b)
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No KP2F1810B.dgn
K:\Bridge\Users\Ian\SDMANUAL-MASTER\2006SKETCHES\KP2F1810B.dgn
14/08/2007
10:11:10 AM
4 6 modify existing anchor blocks *typical*
5 9 remove existing splice *typical* remove existing sway braces *typical* modify existing anchor blocks *typical*
4 6
5 9
ELEVATION AS EXISTING
4 6
5 9
new splice as detailed on sheet no 13 *typical* new sway braces as detailed on sheet no 12 *typical* D 11 B 11
A 11
C 11
E 13
provide extension to existing cross girder as shown on sheet no 14 and add sway brace as shown on sheet no 12
provide extension to existing cross girder as shown on sheet no 14 and add sway brace as shown on sheet no 12
4 6
5 9
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH

ELEVATION AS PROPOSED

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT - TYPICAL TRUSS GENERAL NOTES

0 1 000 2 000 3 000mm
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING CLIENT SYDNEY ASSET MANAGEMENT 85 FLUSHCOMBE ROAD BLACKTOWN PO BOX 558 BLACKTOWN NSW 2148 PHONE (02) 8814-2939 FACSIMILE (02) 8814-2123
SCALE
1 000 500
OR AS SHOWN.
TYPICAL TRUSS DETAILS

FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET, SEE SHEET No 1. CHECKED SKETCH No
KA567
413
FIGURE 18.10(c)
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No KP2F1810C.dgn
K:\Bridge\Users\Ian\SDMANUAL-MASTER\2006SKETCHES\KP2F1810C.dgn
14/08/2007
10:29:29 AM
8 PIER 5 CENTRELINE remove existing stress laminated timber deck over span 6 9 remove existing guardRAIL and posts PIER 5 CENTRELINE new composite concrete and timber deck
8 9 new steel guardRAIL and posts
REMOVE TIMBER CAPPING
top of deck
existing concrete remove existing timber beams over span 6 existing stone facing to be maintained existing steel piles SPAN 6 SPAN 6 existing stone facing to be maintained abutment
CURTAIN WALL TO BE EXTENDED TO TOP OF DECK
existing timber pier approx existing surface level approx existing surface level
existing concrete pilecap and piles
8 9
8 9
GENERAL NOTES
0 1 000 2 000 3 000mm
SCALE
1 000 500
OR AS SHOWN.
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH
elevation showing existing
elevation showing proposed
MAIN ROAD No 181
CITY OF HAWKESBURY

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT - SPAN 6

PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0855 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CLIENT SYDNEY ASSET MANAGEMENT 85 FLUSHCOMBE ROAD BLACKTOWN PO BOX 558 BLACKTOWN NSW 2148 PHONE (02) 8814-2939 FACSIMILE (02) 8814-2123
CHECKED
SKETCH No
KA567
413
FIGURE 18.10(d)
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No KP2F1810D.dgn
K:\Bridge\Users\Ian\SDMANUAL-MASTER\2006SKETCHES\KP2F1810D.dgn
14/08/2007
10:17:06 AM
stress laminated timber deck with timber girders
stress laminated timber deck with timber girders 4 572
timber CAPWALES
timber CAPWALES
K:\Bridge\Users\Ian\SDMANUAL-MASTER\2006SKETCHES\KP2F1810E.dgn
steel guardrails TOP OF DECK and posts
steel guardrails and posts
steel guardrails and posts
stone facing
stress laminated timber deck with timber girders
timber piles rubble fill AND BRACING
SECTION
2 1-2
AS EXISTING
ground level
ground timber piles level
SECTION
1 1-2
AS EXISTING
SECTION
3 1-2
AS EXISTING
4 698
4 698
4 698
new steel railings TOP OF DECK

fall
new steel railings

fall
new steel railings

fall
fall
and posts existing stone facing to be maintained
fall
and posts
fall
and posts
composite concrete composite concrete concrete abutment deck with timber girders deck with timber girders
new timber rubble fill TRESTLE pier
SECTION
2 2
AS PROPOSED
ground level
GENERAL NOTES
0 1 000 2 000 3 000mm
SCALE ground existing timber piles to be cut down to clear new structure concrete pilecap steel piles steel piles ISSUE DATE REVISION level
1 000 500
OR AS SHOWN.
PREP CHECK AUTH


SECTION
1 2
AS PROPOSED
SECTION
3 2
AS PROPOSED
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT - SECTIONS - SHEET A

PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 CLIENT SYDNEY ASSET MANAGEMENT 85 FLUSHCOMBE ROAD BLACKTOWN PO BOX 558 BLACKTOWN NSW 2148 PHONE (02) 8814-2939 FACSIMILE (02) 8814-2123
abutment a
pier 2
PHONE (02) 8837-0855 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
CHECKED
SKETCH No
KA567
413
FIGURE 18.10(e)
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No KP2F1810E.dgn
14/08/2007
10:52:28 AM
SECTION 19
GEOTECHNICAL INFORMATION
Geotechnical Information
19
19.1 GENERAL
GEOTECHNICAL INFORMATION
Foundation test bores are taken at bridge sites in nominated locations to establish both the type and strength of the foundation material. The information obtained from the test bores is shown on either a NON-CORE DRILL HOLE GEOLOGICAL LOG or a CORED DRILL HOLE LOG sheet which is prepared by the drilling contractor. The cover sheet for all bridge drawings that will become the property of the Authority, whether prepared by the Bridge Section or by Consultants, shall cross-reference the geotechnical reports on which the design is based and a cross-reference to the bridge drawings (including Registration Number) shall be placed on the geotechnical report.
19.2 MINIMUM EXTENT OF GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION

Unless otherwise specified by the Authority, the minimum number of boreholes for bridge foundations shall be one borehole for each pier and one for each abutment. For twin bridges, these requirements shall be for each bridge.
19.3 BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS INVITED BY THE AUTHORITY

Geotechnical information, in the form of a report, is supplied to the Contractor as part of the Contract Documents. No geotechnical information, except the cross-reference to the geotechnical report detailed in Clause 19.1 above, shall be recorded on the drawings.
19.4 BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION AS PART OF DESIGN CONSTRUCT MAINTAIN PROJECTS

The provisions of Clause 19.1 and 19.2 are applicable. Although the Authority may make available to the Contractor results of any preliminary geotechnical investigation that may have been undertaken at the project site, the Contractor is responsible for undertaking geotechnical and foundation study for each structure in the project sufficient to provide all information for design and construction of the structure. A separate geotechnical report containing all information obtained from bore holes, including all test results, recommendations for types of foundations and design values for the design of foundations, shall be prepared and provided for the Authoritys review. The locations of boreholes may be shown on the Plan view on the General Arrangement drawing, if preferred.
OTB005
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 20
COVER SHEETS
Cover Sheets
20
20.1 GENERAL
COVER SHEETS
The first sheet of any set of bridge construction plans prepared by the Authority, by Consultants for the Authority or for bridges that will become the property of the Authority shall be the Cover Sheet. This sheet shall be numbered 1 and where prepared by consultants, it shall not contain the consultants reference number in any form. The Cover Sheet provides information regarding the content of the set of bridge construction drawings, relevant information regarding any existing structure, all necessary loading information as stated in AS 5100.2 Clause 1.2, a suitable Locality Plan, road type, road number, road name, the local government area name and a listing of the drawings contained in the set. The Cover Sheet also carry the year that the design was approved or accepted by the RTA ie NEW BRIDGE 2007 see Figures. There are four types of cover sheets; RTA CONTRACTS Prepared in accordance with sample drawing Figure 20.1.1(a) COUNCIL CONTRACTS Prepared in accordance with sample drawing Figure 20.1.1(b) RTA CONTRACTS - CONSULTANT DESIGN May be prepared in accordance with sample drawing Figure 20.1.1(c) OUTSIDE BODY CONTRACTS - RTA DESIGN Prepared in accordance with sample drawing Figure 20.1.1(d) The information shown on the right hand side of each of the Figures listed above is pertinent to the design shown and is indicative only. A full list of required information is provided in AS 5100.2 Clause 1.2. Any construction loading applicable should also be specified and a suitable diagram provided. The referenced Geotechnical Report is a requirement under Chief Bridge Engineer Circular 2000/09 and this information must appear on the drawing. Consultants preparing designs for the Authority may choose to provide an alternative type of Cover Sheet where additional information is required to be shown. Any alternative type of Cover Sheet must be submitted to the Authority for consideration and approval prior to use. Once issued as part of the approved set of drawings, the Cover Sheet shall not be reissued unless information on the Cover Sheet is found to be incorrect or it has been changed. Where a set of construction plans are prepared for a bridge widening, the Cover Sheet shall contain references to the existing bridge with the Bridge Number, year of construction, original design loading and Registration No of Plans being included. For widened bridges, the design information provided should be shown as a factored standard loading where applicable e.g 0.75 SM 1600.
Cover Sheets
A typical Cover Sheet for a widened bridge is shown in Figure 30.1.1.
OTB005
Page 2 of 2
STANDARD A1 BORDER OUTLINE (771mm x 566mm)
USE 15mm CLOSED TEXT
ROAD TYPE AND NUMBER
USE 10mm TEXT
HIGHWAY No 17 NEWELL HIGHWAY

ROAD NAME USE 20mm CLOSED TEXT
SHIRE OF URANA
LOCAL GOVERNMENT AREA NAME
BRIDGE OVER COLOMBO CREEK

AT 33.3km SOUTH OF NARRANDERA
THE YEAR IN WHICH THE DESIGN WAS USE 15mm CLOSED TEXT USE ONE DECIMAL PLACE APPROVED OR ACCEPTED BY THE RTA USE 5mm TEXT
NEW BRIDGE - 2007 BRIDGE No 10253

DESIGN FILE: 5M2364 DESIGN STANDARD: AS 5100 - BRIDGE DESIGN TRAFFIC LOADING:
USE 5mm TEXT
NUMBER OF HEAVY VEHICLES PER LANE PER DAY: ROUTE FACTOR:
BRIDGE CLASSIFICATION:
USE 3.5mm TEXT 100mm
IMPORTANCE FACTOR: ACCELERATION COEFFICIENT: SITE FACTOR: DESIGN CATEGORY:
1 COVER SHEET 2 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

TO
9 DECK - SHEET A 10 DECK - SHEET B 11 DECK - SHEET C 12 DECK - SHEET D 13 TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING - PANELS 14 TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING - DETAILS 15 BAR SHAPES DIAGRAM
3 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE 4 PILES AND PILE LAYOUT

USE 2.5mm TEXT
RA
ILW
ARDLETHAN

WIND TERRAIN CATEGORY: AVERAGE RECURRENCE INTERVAL ULS: R = AVERAGE RECURRENCE INTERVAL SLS: R = NET PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH D2 OF AS 1170.2
AY
YANCO
HW 14
STUR
T HW Y
LEETON
5 ABUTMENTS - CONCRETE 6 ABUTMENTS - REINFORCEMENT 7 PIERS 8 7m SPAN PSC PLANK
100mm
FLOOD DATA:
100 YEAR FLOW VELOCITY: 2000 YEAR FLOW VELOCITY: 100 YEAR FLOOD LEVEL:
MR 596
RA
IL
NEWELL HWY
C
MORUNDAH
SH 17
Y A
2000 YEAR FLOOD LEVEL:
BRIDGE SITE
ee k
MR 385
PREPARED BY
T R IL O D E R
IE
REFERENCE REPORTS
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT: HYDRAULIC MODELLING AND WATERWAYS REQUIREMENTS REPORT: DURABILITY ASSESSMENT REPORT:
JE
Co
lo
bo
Cr
TO URANA
BRIDGE SECTION 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150
LOCALITY PLAN
USE 5mm TEXT THE BRIDGE SITE IS APPROXIMATELY 600kmBY ROAD FROM SYDNEY 0 10 5 10 20 30 40 50Km
USE 3.5mm TEXT
PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
USE 7mm TEXT
USE 5mm TEXT
0017 453 BC 6538
ISSUE STATUS: FOR CONSTRUCTION SHEET No 1 No OF SHEETS 15 ISSUE A
FIGURE 20.1.1 (a)

CAD No:
STANDARD A1 USE 15mm CLOSED TEXT BORDER OUTLINE (771mm x 566mm)
COUNCIL OF WEDDIN
MAIN ROAD No 239 HENRY LAWSON WAY

BRIDGE OVER TYAGONG CREEK

AT 15.8km SOUTH OF GRENFELL
USE 5mm TEXT USE 15mm CLOSED TEXT USE ONE DECIMAL PLACE
EXISTING TIMBER BRIDGE - 1939 BRIDGE No 251 REGN No OF PLANS-0239 483 BC 0503 GENERAL FILE No 483.1102
NEW BRIDGE 2007 BRIDGE No 10589
USE 5mm TEXT
USE 5mm TEXT
DESIGN FILE: 483.1567 DESIGN STANDARD: AS 5100 - BRIDGE DESIGN TRAFFIC LOADING:
NUMBER OF HEAVY VEHICLES PER LANE PER DAY:
1 COVER SHEET
100mm
10 DECK CONCRETE - SHEET A 11 DECK CONCRETE - SHEET B 12 DECK CONCRETE - SHEET C 13 DECK REINFORCEMENT - SHEET A 14 DECK REINFORCEMENT - SHEET B 15 TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING - PANELS 16 TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING - DETAILS 17 APPROACH SLABS 18 BAR SHAPES DIAGRAM
ROUTE FACTOR:
2 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT 3 PILES AND PILE LAYOUT 4 ABUTMENTS - CONCRETE
BRIDGE CLASSIFICATION: IMPORTANCE FACTOR: ACCELERATION COEFFICIENT: SITE FACTOR: DESIGN CATEGORY:
SH
17
FORBES
La
ch
lan
CANOWINDRA
5 ABUTMENTS - REINFORCEMENT 6 PIER CONCRETE

MR 310
56
R e iv
MR 23 6
7 PIER REINFORCEMENT
USE 2.5mm TEXT
100mm
8 GIRDERS - CONCRETE 9 GIRDERS - REINFORCEMENT

COWRA
MID WESTE RN HW Y
GRENFELL
SH
lw
Burrangong Ck
Tyagong Ck
FLOOD DATA:
USE 3.5mm TEXT
SITE
YOUNG
PREPARED BY
MR
78
BRIDGE
MR 239
USE 3.5mm TEXT
5mm DIA MIN
REFERENCE REPORTS
PARRAMATTA NSW 2150
LOCALITY PLAN
USE 5mm TEXT
10 5 0 10 20 30 40 50km
PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
USE 3.5mm TEXT
USE 7mm TEXT
THE BRIDGE SITE IS APPROXIMATELY 388 km BY ROAD FROM SYDNEY
USE 5mm TEXT
0239 483 BC 0111
FIGURE 20.1.1(b)
CAD No:
STANDARD A1 BORDER OUTLINE (771mm x 566mm)
USE 15mm TEXT
ROAD TYPE AND NUMBER
USE 10mm TEXT
HIGHWAY No 7 MITCHELL HIGHWAY

ROAD NAME USE 20mm TEXT
SHIRE OF BOGAN
LOCAL GOVERNMENT AREA NAME
BRIDGE OVER BOGAN RIVER

AT 1.2km WEST OF NYNGAN
USE 5mm TEXT USE 15mmTEXT
NEW BRIDGE - 2006 BRIDGE No 10743 DESIGN FILE No - 7/45.127 DESIGN STANDARD: AS 5100 - BRIDGE DESIGN TRAFFIC LOADING:
USE 10mm TEXT 100mm
DESIGN TRAFFIC SPEED: 100 km PER HOUR TRAFFIC BARRIER PERFORMANCE LEVEL: MEDIUM
USE 5mm TEXT
1 COVER SHEET 2 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT 3 PILES AND PILE LAYOUT (NOT IN CONTRACT) 4 ABUTMENTS - CONCRETE
EARTHQUAKE LOADING: AS 5100.2-2004 8 DECK - SHEET A 9 DECK - SHEET B 10 DECK - SHEET C 11 DECK - SHEET D 12 TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING - PANELS 13 TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING - DETAILS 14 BAR SHAPES DIAGRAM
USE 3.5mm TEXT
USE 3.5mm TEXT
SH
5 ABUTMENTS - REINFORCEMENT 6 PIERS 7 10m SPAN PSC PLANK (NOT IN CONTRACT)

18
BO GA N
5mm DIA 100mm MIN
BRIDGE SITE
NYNGAN
TO SH O U R K
57
SH 11
7
MR
IT
WARREN
FLOOD DATA:
CH
EL
NEVERTIRE
H IG H W
TRANGIE
USE 2.5mm TEXT
LOCALITY PLAN
USE 5mm TEXT THE BRIDGE SITE IS APPROXIMATELY 586km BY ROAD FROM SYDNEY
0 10 20 30 40 50km
10 5
USE 2.5mm TEXT

CAD No:
RI VE R
DUBBO
REFERENCE REPORTS CONSULTANT

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT: HYDRAULIC MODELLING AND WATERWAYS REQUIREMENTS REPORT:
USE 3.5mm TEXT
DURABILITY ASSESSMENT REPORT:
USE 7mm TEXT
USE 5mm TEXT
0007 045 BC 2468
FIGURE 20.1.1(c)
STANDARD A1 BORDER OUTLINE (771 x 566mm)
LOGO SUPPLIED BY CLIENT
MURRAY IRRIGATION LIMITED

ACN 067 197 933
USE 10mm TEXT ROAD TYPE AND NUMBER
HIGHWAY No 20 RIVERINA HIGHWAY
SHIRE OF CONARGO
USE 20mm CLOSED TEXT LOCAL GOVERNMENT AREA NAME
ROAD NAME
BRIDGE OVER MAYRUNG CHANNEL

AT 20.8km WEST OF FINLEY
USE ONE DECIMAL PLACE USE 15mm CLOSED TEXT USE 5mm TEXT
EXISTING BRIDGE - 1953 REGISTRATION No OF PLANS: 0020 092 BC 0114

NEW BRIDGE - 2007 BRIDGE No 10147

100mm
USE 5mm TEXT
DESIGN FILE No - 20/42.146 DESIGN STANDARD: AS 5100 - BRIDGE DESIGN TRAFFIC LOADING:
1 2
COVER SHEET GENERAL ARRANGEMENT-SHEET A GENERAL ARRANGEMENT SHEET B CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE CONCRETE - SHEET A CONCRETE - SHEET B REINFORCEMENT - SHEET A REINFORCEMENT - SHEET B REINFORCEMENT - SHEET C TEMPORARY TRAFFIC BARRIER DETAILS BAR SHAPES DIAGRAM
USE 3.5mm TEXT
NEW SOUTH WALES

Jerilderie
USE 2.5mm TEXT
3 4
DENILIQUIN
100mm
NE WE LL HIG HW AY
5 6 7 8 9
RIVERINA
HIG
HW
AY
FINLEY
Berrigan
HIGHWAY
COBB
BRIDGE SITE
Mathoura
Tocumwal

M
Murra y
WIND TERRAIN CATEGORY: AVERAGE RECURRENCE INTERVAL ULS: R = AVERAGE RECURRENCE INTERVAL SLS: R =
River
VICTORIA
Ri
ur
ve
ra
10 11
NET PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH D2 OF AS 1170.2
USE 5mm TEXT
LOCALITY PLAN
USE 3.5mm TEXT
PREPARED BY
REFERENCE REPORTS
0 10 5
10
20
30
40
50km
BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150
THE BRIDGE SITE IS APPROXIMATELY 678km BY ROAD FROM SYDNEY
PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
USE 7mm TEXT
USE 5mm TEXT
0020 092 BC 0115
FIGURE 20.1.1(d)
CAD No:
SECTION 21
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS
General Arrangement Drawings
21
21.1 GENERAL
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS
In all cases, Sheet No 2 of each set of bridge construction drawings prepared by the Authority, by Consultants for the Authority or for bridges that will become the property of the Authority, shall be the "General Arrangement drawing. Where more than one sheet is necessary to show all the required details, a suite of General Arrangement drawings shall be created and the titles General Arrangement - Sheet A, General Arrangement - Sheet B etc shall be used. The General Arrangement gives an overall view of the bridge as it will appear once constructed and it shall include a plan, an elevation, a typical cross section, a site plan, a suitable skew diagram and/or vertical alignment diagram as appropriate and a list of "General Notes" which apply to the entire set of drawings. The General Arrangement drawing shall contain a note which describes the thickness and composition of the bituminous surfacing and waterproofing system on the structure. The General Arrangement drawing shall not contain any construction sequence information or any construction requirement information. Typical General Arrangement drawings for a variety of bridge construction types are shown in Figures 21.1.1(a), 21.1.1(b), 21.1.1(c) and 21.1.1(d).
21.2
PLAN VIEW
Plan views shall contain the following information: An outline of the structure The watercourse, railway line or road under the structure Any existing structures including the Reduced Level of the deck The location of any public utilities The Base centreline and Carriageway centreline as appropriate Chainages on the Base centreline at the ends of deck and at each pier centreline together with the reduced level at each location The bearing or radius of the Base centreline as appropriate For bridges over roads, the coordinates of the intersection point of the control line for the bridge and the centreline of the underlying roadway, as well as the chainage on the control line for the bridge structure at that point The outline of parapets, footways and railings as appropriate Joints in the deck surface The position of name plates The outlines of the structural elements ie abutments, piers, piles, footings and columns etc where the scale of the drawing permits Horizontal clearances as appropriate The location of any vertical clearance referenced from the Elevation Contours of the existing surface Shapes and slopes of any embankments Extent of any embankment protection required Extent of any channel excavation required The direction of flow of the watercourse or conventional tidal representation The compass direction of True North indicated by a northpoint The outline of concrete safety barrier extensions, approach slabs and steel safety barriers in the approaches as appropriate
Issue 1 Revision 1 (22 September 2010) Page 1 of 3
OTB005
21.3
ELEVATION
Elevations shall contain the following information as appropriate: The outline of the elevation face of the structure projected from the Plan view showing foundation type, abutments, piers, superstructure and railings. The overall length of deck The number and length of spans The grade on the deck (represented by an arrow and %sign) or the reduced level of the deck as appropriate The normal water level or stream condition ie normally dry etc Mean High Water Springs and Mean Low Water Springs for tidal waters. Navigational clearances above Mean High Water Springs for navigable waterways The calculated High Flood Levels - both the 1in 100 year ARI and 1 in 2000 year ARI values The reported High Flood Level, including the date of occurence Vertical and horizontal clearances for structures over roads and/or railways including the approximate design surface level of any road or railway line under the structure at the Base centreline Vertical and horizontal clearances for opening span bridges both open and closed The existing surface on the Base centreline projected from contour lines. Proposed cross section for channel excavation Form and extent of any embankments and any required embankment protection whether above or below the existing natural surface, parapet extensions, approach slabs and steel safety barriers in the approaches Contract levels of foundation elements Bearing articlulation in the longitudinal direction represented by the letters F for fixed, R for restrained and E for expansion Expansion joint locations, represented by the letters EJ Joints in the superstructure represented by a single heavy line Chainages, existing surface levels and design surface levels at the ends of deck and at each pier on the Control Line or Base centreline given in a Datum block beneath the Elevation Structure location with respect to nearest major towns ie FROM / TO
21.4
TYPICAL CROSS SECTION

Typical cross sections shall contain the following information: General form of the piers or abutments including foundation elements Outline of the superstructure elements Overall width of the superstructure Width between concrete safety barriers Height of traffic barrier railings above deck level Widths of concrete safety barriers and/or footways Clear width of footways Base centreline and/or Carriageway centreline and/or Control Line Crossfall or superelevation represented by an arrow and % sign Type of wearing surface Indication of orientation with respect to stream flow or compass point ie UPSTREAM or DOWNSTREAM, NORTH or SOUTH.
21.5
OTB005
SKEW DIAGRAM
Issue 1 Revision 1 (22 September 2010) Page 2 of 3
Skew Diagrams shall be in the following format: A right angle triangle with the base parallel to the Control Line or Base Centreline, the hypotenuse parallel to the abutment and pier centrelines and with the skew angle designated at the apex of the triangle.
Skew Diagrams shall contain the following information: A dimension for the vertical side of the triangle (normally 10 000). A dimension for the base and hypotenuse of the triangle calculated from the vertical dimension and the skew angle
Conventional Skew Diagrams, for both right and left hand skews are shown in Figure 21.5.
21.6
VERTICAL ALIGNMENT DIAGRAM

Vertical alignment diagrams shall contain the following information: The length of the curve The grade on the road at each end of the curve The chainage and reduced level at each end of the curve The position of the bridge indicated by a heavy line together with a chainage and reduced level at each end of the bridge The chainage and reduced level of the intersection point of the approach grades on the Base centreline.
21.7
-
SITE PLAN
Base centreline, including the position of any Tangent Points etc The position and chainage of each end of the bridge The existing bridge (if applicable) including the RL of the existing deck Survey Marks and Bench Marks (including RL) Road boundaries The location of any existing public utilities The location and description of any nearby features that are likely to affect the construction of the new bridge Northpoint
21.8
GENERAL NOTES
The General Notes on the General Arrangement Drawing shall be in the format shown on the current issue of RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB029 with the blank spaces being filled in with the appropriate information. Any necessary additional information may be added as required.
OTB005
Issue 1 Revision 1 (22 September 2010)
Page 3 of 3
DOWNSTREAM 3000 APPROACH SLAB OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK = 101 300 33 500 33 500 33 500 3000 APPROACH SLAB 400 600 4500 15 SPRAYED SAM 100 DUCT EJ DOUBLE DOUBLE SEAL BASE
c L
UPSTREAM
4500 DESIGNED SURFACE LEVEL RL 265.200
600
FROM DUBBO
STEEL SAFETY BARRIER THRIE BEAM
400
TO GILGANDRA
DESIGNED SURFACE EJ L ON BASEc RL 265.200
CALCULATED HFL RL 262.5
EMBANKMENT PROTECTION SHALL BE TAKEN 600mm MINIMUM BELOW EXISTING LEVEL (TYP)
E SPAN 1
E SPAN 2
F SPAN 3
150 NWL RL 247.0 STORMWATER PIPE
FOUNDATION MATERIAL: SAND/SANDY LOAM 150 CONTRACT LEVEL RL 245.000 CONTRACT LEVEL RL 243.000 CONTRACT LEVEL RL 241.000 DATUM RL 240.000 APPROXIMATE EXISTING SURFACE ON BASE
c L
STORMWATER 1500 DEEP PSC SUPER "T" GIRDERS PIPE
L CHAINAGE ALONG BASE c
STEEL SAFETY BARRIER THRIE BEAM
1 -
CH 182.600 RL 265.200 APPROACH SLAB NAME PLATE ON PARAPET CH 216.500 RL 265.200 BASE BEARING 8 56 39.3" CH 250.000 RL 265.200
NAME PLATE ON PARAPET
CH 283.900 RL 265.200 APPROACH SLAB
SECTION
1 -
RC DRIVEN PILES
1 -
GENERAL NOTES
SCALE:
0 5 10 15m
OR AS SHOWN. EXISTING BRIDGE (TO BE DEMOLISHED) RL 265.2

5 2.5
DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES. CHAINAGES AND REDUCED LEVELS ARE IN METRES. REDUCED LEVELS ARE RELATED TO AUSTRALIAN HEIGHT DATUM. E DENOTES EXPANSION BEARING. F DENOTES FIXED BEARING. EJ DENOTES EXPANSION JOINT. THE BRIDGEWORKS DO NOT INCLUDE DEMOLITION OF EXISTING BRIDGE, EMBANKMENT PROTECTION, STEEL SAFETY BARRIERS, SPRAYED SAM SEAL OR ANY WORK IN THE APPROACHES EXCEPT THE APPROACH SLABS.
FROM DUBBO NEW BRIDGE
TO GILGANDRA HIGHWAY No 7 CITY OF DUBBO
FIGURE 21.1.1(a)
L BASE c ABUTMENT A CH 182.600 BEARING 8 56 39.3" ABUTMENT B CH 283.900
BRIDGE OVER TALBRAGAR RIVER

AT TROY GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
QA RECORDS COMPLETED
CLIENT WESTERN REGIONAL OFFICE 51-55 CURRAJONG STREET PARKES PO BOX 334 PARKES NSW 2870 PHONE (02) 6861-1444 FACSIMILE (02) 6861-1414
PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802
DATE
FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
0007 381 BC 1234

APPROVED
SITE PLAN
PRELIMINARY
0 10 5 10 20 30 40 50m
B10846
DATE
2
FROM HOWLONG
3000 APPROACH SLAB OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK = 60 600
3000 APPROACH SLAB
TO CHILTERN
UPSTREAM 10 200 9000
DOWNSTREAM
300
5 AT 12 000 = 60 000
300
600
4500 15mm SPRAYED SAM DOUBLE L BASE c
4500
600
W BEAM TO THRIE BEAM TRANSITION IN ACCORDANCE WITH RTA DRAWING No WD.R132.B04.A - TYP DECK RL 142.300 L ON BASE c STEEL SAFETY BARRIER (THRIE BEAM) - TYP
DOUBLE SEAL DESIGNED SURFACE LEVEL RL 142.300
1 IN 100 YEAR ARI HFL RL 140.500
R DIA 100 UPVC PIPES
APPROX LEVEL OF EMBANKMENT FILL TO UNDERSIDE OF ABUTMENT HEADSTOCK PRIOR TO DRIVING OF PILES
NWL RL 247.0
EMBANKMENT PROTECTION SHALL SURFACE BE TAKEN 600mm MINIMUM BELOW EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL (TYP)
12m SPAN PSC CONTRACT LEVEL RL 123.500
RADIAL SECTION
1 -
PLANKS - TYP
1000
2000
3000mm
1000
500
DATUM RL 118.000 APPROXIMATE EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL L ON BASE c
SPAN 1
SPAN 2
SPAN 3
SPAN 4
SPAN 5
EXISTING BRIDGE
L CHAINAGE ON BASE c
RL 141.000 TP CH 799.397 RL 142.300 TP CH 961.087 RL 142.300
ELEVATION
CH 943.300 CH 882.700 ABUTMENT B ABUTMENT A
SITE PLAN
0 25 50 75m
25
125
POSTS AND BLOCKOUT PIECES IN APPROACHES IN ACCORDANCE WITH RTA DRAWING No MD.R132.F02.A - TYP EXISTING BRIDGE 1961
GENERAL NOTES
0 2 4 6 8 10m
SCALES BRIDGE No 643

2 1
OR AS SHOWN.
DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES. CHAINAGES AND REDUCED LEVELS ARE IN METRES. REDUCED LEVELS ARE RELATED TO AHD. 1 CH 882.700 RL 142.300 APPROACH SLAB NAME PLATE ON PARAPET CH 895.000 CH 907.000 BASE
c L
R DENOTES RESTRAINED BEARING. THE BRIDGEWORKS DO NOT INCLUDE SPRAYED SAM DOUBLE DOUBLE SEAL, STEEL NAME PLATE ON PARAPET APPROACH SLAB CH 943.300 CH 931.000 RL 142.300 MAIN ROAD No 246 SHIRE OF HUME SAFETY BARRIER, EMBANKMENT FILL AND PROTECTION OR ANY WORKS IN THE APPROACHES EXCEPT APPROACH SLABS.
CH 919.000
BRIDGE OVER FRENCHS CREEK

1 -
AT 1.9km SOUTH OF HOWLONG GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

PREPARED BY
BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802
FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
DATE
0246 451 BC 1234

APPROVED
B10589
PRELIMINARY
PLAN
FIGURE 21. 1. 1(b)

DATE
2
FROM McGRATHS HILL

3000 APPROACH SLAB 320 15000 320 OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK ON CONTROL LINE 15 640 3000 APPROACH SLAB
TO PITT TOWN
* 100 YEAR HFL RL 16.0 APPROX DOWNSTREAM 11 650 UPSTREAM
W BEAM TO THRIE BEAM TRANSITION IN ACCORDANCE WITH RTA DRAWING No MD.R132.BO4.A (TYP) 1/125 DIA UPVC DUCT FOR TELSTRA * CALCULATED 100 YEAR HFL RL 7.24 (INCLUDING AFFLUX)
325
5 500
5 500
325 TRAFFIC BARRIER
CONTROL LINE 75 THICK ASPHALT (NOT IN BRIDGEWORKS) DESIGN SURFACE LEVEL 3%
RAILING 1/150 DIA UPVC DUCT FOR AGL 2/125 DIA UPVC DUCTS FOR INTEGRAL ENERGY
EJ
3%
APPROXIMATE EXISTING SURFACE
F1
.5
TO
APPROXIMATE EXISTING SURFACE I.L. RL 3.50 2/125 DIA UPVC DUCTS FOR EXISTING CHANNEL SHALL BE SHAPED TO THE TRAPEZOIDAL PROFILE AS SHOWN ON SHEET No 14 8700 (8200 SQUARE TO CHANNEL) BASE OF CHANNEL SHALL BE PROTECTED WITH 230 THICK ROCK MATTRESS AND EMBANKMENTS SHALL BE STABILISED WITH JUTE MESH AND GRASSED TO PREVENT SCOUR APPROXIMATE EXISTING CHANNEL. (NOT IN BRIDGEWORKS) 15m PSC PLANKS INTEGRAL ENERGY
FOUNDATION MATERIAL: SAND / SANDY CLAY CONTRACT LEVEL RL -2.800 CONTRACT LEVEL RL -5.700 END OF APPROACH SLAB DATUM RL -5.500 6.440 6.420 DESIGN SURFACE LEVEL ON CONTROL LINE EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL ON CONTROL LINE END OF DECK ABUTMENT A END OF DECK ABUTMENT B 6.345 6.355 END OF APPROACH SLAB CONTRACT LEVEL
SECTION
1
-
F DENOTES FIXED BEARING E DENOTES EXPANSION BEARING EJ DENOTES EXPANSION JOINT

1 0.5
5m
5.2
5.3
205.045
208.045
223.685
226.685
6.0
6.1
EXISTING TIMBER BRIDGE RL 6.000 ABUTMENT B CH 223.685
McKENZIES
CHAINAGE ON CONTROL LINE
ABUTMENT A
ELEVATION
0 1 2 3 4 5m
CH 208.045 FROM CH 208.045 ABUTMENT A CH 223.685 ABUTMENT B CONTROL LINE McGRATHS HILL
TO PITT TOWN
1 0.5
POSTS AND BLOCKOUT PIECES IN APPROACHES IN ACCORDANCE

1
McKENZIES CREEK
R 2200 000
WITH RTA DRAWING No MD.R132.FO2.A

4.0
(TYP) CH 89.306 RL 9.181
FOR DETAILS OF NEW CHANNEL CH 239.306 ALIGNMENT, PROFILE AND RL 6.351 BATTER PROTECTION REFER TO SHEET No 14
CR
EE
5.
4.0
RL 6.440
6.0
RL 6.355
5. 0
SITE PLAN
NOT TO SCALE
-3.9 87%
GENERAL NOTES
0.214%
SCALES AS SHOWN. DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES. CHAINAGES AND REDUCED LEVELS ARE IN METRES. REDUCED LEVELS ARE TO AUSTRALIAN HEIGHT DATUM. THE BRIDGEWORKS INCLUDE THE DEMOLITION OF THE EXISTING BRIDGE BUT EXCLUDE THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE SIDE TRACK, ROAD APPROACHES, GABIONS, GUARDRAIL, KERB EXTENSIONS, SUBSOIL DRAINS, ASPHALTIC CONCRETE AND CHANNEL SHAPING AND PROTECTION.
EXISTING TIMBER BRIDGE (1947) RL 6.000 TO BE DEMOLISHED BRIDGE NUMBER 589 NAME PLATE ON CONCRETE PARAPET
IP CH 164.306 RL 6.191 75000 75000 LENGTH OF VC
APPROACH SLAB
CH 208.045 RL 6.420 CONTROL LINE

R 2200 000
CH 226.685 RL 6.345
VERTICAL ALIGNMENT
NOT TO SCALE
* CALCULATED HFL BASED ON McKENZIES CREEK CATCHMENT WITHOUT BACKWATER FROM THE HAWKESBURY RIVER. THE PROBABLE 100 YEAR HFL IS RL 16.0M INCLUDING BACKWATER FROM THE HAWKESBURY RIVER, BASED ON LOWER HAWKESBURY RIVER FLOOD PLAIN ATLAS - MAY 1982 (RICHMOND TO WILBERFORCE).
CH 205.045 RL 6.440
CH 223.685 RL 6.355 APPROACH SLAB
NAME PLATE ON CONCRETE PARAPET EXISTING LIGHT POST FOR DETAILS OF GABIONS RETAINING FILL, REFER TO ROAD PLANS REG No 0181 091 BA 2500.
5.
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH

MAIN ROAD No 123 SHIRE OF HAWKESBURY
BRIDGE OVER McKENZIES CREEK FIGURE 21.1.1(c)

4.0
PREPARED BY
AT 1.2km NORTH OF McGRATHS HILL GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
20 00 00"
3.0
PHONE (02) 8837-0802 MANAGER, BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
DATE
PREPARED DESIGN
CHECKED
0123 291 BC 0256

3640
APPROVED DRAWING
PLAN
0 1 2 3 4 5m
SKEW DIAGRAM
NOT TO SCALE
B10256
1 0.5
SHEET No
DATE
ISSUE
4. 0
10000
0 5.
106 42
TO HIGHWAY No 2 FROM COOTAMUNDRA 3 000 APPROACH SLAB 350 SAFETY SCREEN POSTS INSTALLED TRULY VERTICAL * STEEL SAFETY BARRIER EJ E 2 TO 1
LEVEL
SURFAC E
NORTHERN SIDE 4 700
9 400 4 700
SOUTHERN SIDE
OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK ON BRIDGE = 64 700 31 000 33 000 350
LOADING/UNLOADING RAMPS 3 000

ON BRIDGE
SAFETY SCREEN
BRIDGE
APPROACH SLAB * STEEL SAFETY BARRIER EJ 75mm THICK ASPHALT STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING AND WATERPROOF MEMBRANE 1300 TYP
EXISTING
APP ROXIMATE
3.0%
DIA 100 CONTROL LINE SOUTHBOUND CLEARANCE CONTRACT LEVEL RL 266.765
1
3.0%
DUCTS - TYP
E CONTRACT LEVEL
1.
CONTROL LINE
NORTHBOUND
5450 MIN
2 TO 1
600
1. 5 TO
600
RL 264.095
5 TO 1
1 000 SPAN 1 PIER SPAN 2 CONTRACT LEVEL RL 258.000 FINISHED DESIGN LEVEL ON HIGHWAY No 2 10 000 10 000 EXCAVATED END OF DECK ABUTMENT B ROCK SURFACE MIN
PSC VOIDED SLAB STEEL SAFETY BARRIERS IN BRIDGE APPROACHES SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH RTA DRAWING No MD.R132.HO1.B
1 000 MIN ABUTMENT A END OF DECK EXCAVATED ROCK SURFACE
DATUM RL 250.000 DESIGN SURFACE LEVEL ON BRIDGE 270.405 269.488 267.637 269.066
274.8
EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL ON BRIDGE
672.560
682.560
CHAINAGE ON BRIDGE
ELEVATION
TO YASS
705.910
641.210
276.5
E LEVEL SHED SURFAC APPROX FINI
273.8
271.3
IP CH 700.000
RL 271.500
FROM YASS
SECTION
1 -
1000
2000
3000mm
CONTROL LINE
CONTROL LINE
SOUTHBOUND
NORTHBOUND
1000
500
1.7236%
HIGHWAY No 2
5.94
22%
GENERAL NOTES
0 2 4 6 8 10m
HIGHWAY No 2
SCALE
2 1
OR AS SHOWN.
ABUTMENT A
START OF CURVE
CH 705.910
CH 641.210
ABUTMENT B
DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES. END OF CURVE CHAINAGES AND REDUCED LEVELS ARE IN METRES. CH 825.000 REDUCED LEVELS ARE RELATED TO AHD . E DENOTES EXPANSION BEARING. F DENOTES FIXED BEARING. EJ DENOTES EXPANSION JOINT. BRIDGEWORKS DO NOT INCLUDE EXCAVATION TO EXCAVATED ROCK SURFACE AND HW2 FINISHED DESIGN LEVELS, TREATMENT OF EXCAVATED ROCK SURFACE, ASPHALT, STEEL SAFETY BARRIER OR ANY WORK IN THE APPROACHES EXCEPT
2 TO 1
1.5
TO
CH 672.560 RL 269.066
1.5
TO
CH 575.000
2 TO 1
BRIDGE LOCATION LENGTH OF CURVE = 250 000
CH 641.210 RL 267.637 MAIN ROAD APPROACH SLAB NAME PLATE ON WINGWALL No 87 BEARING 68%%d 42 35.2" ON BRIDGE
NAME PLATE ON WINGWALL APPROACH SLAB
VERTICAL CURVE DIAGRAM

NOT TO SCALE
FOR APPROACH SLABS.
CH 705.910 ISSUE RL 270.405 DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH

HIGHWAY No 2 NORTHBOUND CARRIAGEWAY SOUTHBOUND CARRIAGEWAY SHIRE OF GUNDAGAI
1.5
2 TO 1
TO
CH 662.582 E 241024.378
2 TO 1
1.5
TO
BRIDGE OVER HIGHWAY No 2

AT 82.4km SOUTH OF YASS GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
QA RECORDS COMPLETED AND DRAWINGS RECOMMENDED FOR APPROVAL BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150
N 3145246.891 1 -
PREPARED BY
CLIENT SOUTH WEST REGIONAL OFFICE 1 SIMMONS STREET WAGGA WAGGA PO BOX 484 WAGGA WAGGA NSW 2650 PHONE (02) 6938-1111 FACSIMILE (02) 6938-1183
PHONE (02) 8837-0810 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
DATE
PREPARED
CHECKED
APPROVED
DESIGN DRAWING
0002 246 BC 2140

B10256
DENOTES PLAN LOCATION POINT OF MINIMUM CLEARANCE
FOR CONSTRUCTION
PLAN
FIGURE 21.1.1(d)
DATE
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
D246GA.dgn
FROM GUNDAGAI
TO GUNDAGAI
SKEW ANGLE
L 2
L1
RIGHT HAND SKEW

DIRECTION OF INCREASING CHAINAGE
SKEW ANGLE
10 000
L1
LEFT HAND SKEW

DIRECTION OF INCREASING CHAINAGE
IN BOTH CASES, L1 AND L2 ARE CALCULATED BY THE USE OF THE GIVEN DIMENSIONS AND THE SKEW ANGLE
SKEW DIAGRAMS
10 000
L 2
FIGURE 21.5
SECTION 22
CONCRETE DETAILING
Concrete Detailing
22
22.1 GENERAL
CONCRETE DETAILING
Concrete detail drawings should show the physical dimensions and levels of a concrete structure and should include any construction sequences specified by the designer. It is important that sufficient information is shown to enable formwork to be built and erected and concrete quantities to be easily calculated. Formed holes, cast-in metal work, construction joints and any necessary layers of mass concrete shall be shown. The location of formed holes and cast-in metal work shall be sufficiently dimensioned to enable their correct positioning inside the formwork. Cast-in items (where applicable) shall be cross referenced to the particular sheet where respective details are shown. The detailing of standard chamfers and fillets i.e. 20 x 20 mm, should not be shown on small scale views or sections. However, standard chamfers and fillets shall be detailed to their correct size on any view or section where the scale is 1:10 or larger (i.e. 1:10, 1:5, 1:2 etc.). Non standard fillets i.e. greater than 20 x 20 mm, shall be shown in all instances and shall be either called up or dimensioned. Unless otherwise specified by the design engineer, the top surface of all abutment sill beams and headstocks shall be detailed to have a downward slope of approximately 2% from the front face to the curtain wall and a minimum 50mm diameter drainage pipe shall be provided through the side wall or wing wall at the low side of the abutment. The drainage pipe shall extend a minimum of 75mm from the outer face to permit the drainage of water from the abutment. 'General Notes' applicable to concrete detail sheets are shown on RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB029 and those notes shall be used as the basis for all 'concrete' notes with any other required notes being added thereto. Figures 22.1 to 22.6 inclusive show some typical examples of concrete detailing.
22.2
DIMENSIONING
Dimensioning of concrete items shall be in accordance with Section 7 of this Manual. Dimensioning of concrete elements (whose details appear on a separate sheet) shall not be given. e.g. the dimensions for the positioning of piles relative to pilecap/pier extremities shall not be shown on the pilecap/pier drawing.
22.3
PLAN VIEWS
Plan views, used to show the location of such elements as footings, columns, headstocks etc. may also be used to show reference markings, co-ordinates and chainages. Plan views shall be drawn as a horizontal view taken immediately above the element under consideration.
OTB005
Page 1 of 2
Concrete Detailing
Hidden details such as piles, columns and footings shall be shown as broken lines where appropriate in accordance with Section 7 of this Manual.
22.4
ELEVATIONS
Elevations shall be drawn as a view seen from a vertical plane immediately in front of the element under consideration and shall be projected from that elements 'PLAN' view. Hidden details, such as abutment wing walls and associated fillets shall be shown as broken lines in accordance with Section 7 of this Manual.
22.5
SECTIONS
Sections shall be drawn as a view from a cutting plane located through an element previously drawn as an Elevation or Plan. Generally, only the details at the cutting plane of the section should be shown, however, details beyond the cutting plane may be included provided that the included details are not confusing to the main details being shown. Sections, where possible, shall be drawn adjacent to the plan or elevation to which they relate. Where section details cannot be shown on the sheet of origin, they shall be cross referenced in accordance with Appendix A of AS 1100 Part 301. Linework shall be in accordance with Section 7 of this Manual. If a series of cutting planes are used to define section details, any change in direction of the cutting plane shall be shown by 0.7mm thick lines.
22.6
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints are not permitted in salt or brackish water in the range 0.6 m below low water level to 0.6 m above high water level. Construction joints are not permitted in prestressed concrete items except where directed by the designer. Such construction joints, where required, shall be detailed on the drawings. Construction joints, where critical for design purposes e.g. continuous deck slabs, voided slabs and continuity connections, shall be adequately located by dimensions on the drawings. Where it may be possible to cast the whole of an element in one continuous operation but the quantity of concrete involved and the height of the element is large, possible construction joints may be shown and marked 'OPTIONAL'. Construction joints may also be required in tall members(i.e. pier columns) to avoid height related access and concrete compaction problems. The aesthetic aspect of construction joints in highly visible members should also be considered.
OTB005
Page 2 of 2
RL 246.450 - ABUTMENT A RL 247.229 - ABUTMENT B CONTROL LINE EXPANSION JOINT FOR DETAILS SEE SHEET No X RL 246.585 - ABUTMENT A RL 246.450 - ABUTMENT A RL 247.364 - ABUTMENT B RL 247.229 - ABUTMENT B
END OF DECK 20 x 300 LONG STAINLESS STEEL DOWEL GRADE 304 TO ASTM A276. X REQUIRED. FOR DOWEL ASSEMBLY DETAILS SEE SHEET No X. 345 300 150 1120 350 B 1180
3%
3%
300
100
300
RL 244.390 - ABUTMENT A RL 245.165 - ABUTMENT B
RL 244.535 - ABUTMENT A RL 245.310 - ABUTMENT B CJ
RL 244.390 - ABUTMENT A RL 245.165 - ABUTMENT B
300 50
BEARING MORTAR PADS AND RECESSES CJ 20
FOR BEARING DETAILS SEE SHEETS No X AND X
OF BEARING 300
RL 242.790 - ABUTMENT A RL 243.565 - ABUTMENT B 50 50 1 400 50 THICK MASS CONCRETE 2 300
RL 241.390 - ABUTMENT A RL 242.165 - ABUTMENT B 50 THICK MASS CONCRETE
ELEVATION SECTION 1 BEARING AND GIRDER 30 NOM DOWEL SPACING: 600 100 ELASTOMERIC 2 10 BEARING STRIP FOR DETAILS SEE SHEET No 47 300 x 300 FILLET CH 26 993.550 - ABUT A CH 27 134.150 - ABUT B 2 650 DIA 45 x 300 DEEP RECESS (TYP) 3770 180 360 180 1 8 SPACES AT 500 = 4 000 250 250 DOWEL SPACING: 8 SPACES AT 500 = 4 000 CONTROL LINE 600 100 180 95 3 10 OF BEARINGS 95 95 MORTAR PAD
0 1000 2000
MAX 1745
MIN 1595
VARIES
F 6
2 054
370
GENERAL NOTES
GENERAL NOTES
3000mm
SCALE
1000 500
OR AS SHOWN.
CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B1. 360 MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 40MPa. EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20x20 AND RE-ENTRANT ANGLES FILLETED 20x20 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. NCF DENOTES NO CHAMFER OR FILLET. DENOTES REDUCED LEVELS AT BACK FACE OF CURTAIN WALL. DENOTES REDUCED LEVELS AT FRONT FACE OF CURTAIN WALL. DENOTES PORTION OF CURTAIN WALLS AND WING WALLS ABOVE CJ SHALL NOT BE CONSTRUCTED UNTIL DECK SLAB CONCRETE IN ADJACENT SPAN IS PLACED. DIMENSIONS AND LEVELS SHALL BE ADJUSTED TO SUIT ACTUAL DECK LEVEL. FOR DETAILS OF EXPANSION JOINT AND COVER PLATE RECESSES, SEE
95
180
1120
SHEETS No XX AND XX.
370
OF BEARINGS 2 300
DETAIL
A -
A 150 150
100 50
100
200
300
400
500mm
FIGURE 22.1
3 BEARING 339%%d 0 0" 2 10 BEARING BEARING 1 10 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH

BEARING BEARING MAIN ROAD No 78 SHIRE OF GUNDAGAI
4 ABUTMENT A
0 ABUTMENT B
BRIDGE OVER MAIN ROAD No 21

2.5
2 000 4 500 5 000
2 000
2 000 4 500
2 000
AT 4km EAST OF COOLAC ABUTMENTS CONCRETE - SHEET A
350 ALUMINIUM 92 EXTRUSION

PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 CLIENT SOUTH WEST REGIONAL OFFICE 1 SIMMONS STREET WAGGA WAGGA PO BOX 484 WAGGA WAGGA NSW 2650 PHONE (02) 6938-1111 FACSIMILE (02) 6938-1183
5 000
5 150 10 300
5 150 C PREPARED
PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
CHECKED
DETAIL
B DETAIL
500mm
C -
DESIGN DRAWING
0078 246 BC 2468

RTA BRIDGE NUMBER
100
200
300
400
2479
NOT TO SCALE

PLAN
100 50
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No kp2f221.dgn
NAME PLATE SET FLUSH RECESS FOR CONNECTION OF THRIE BEAM, FOR DETAILS OF CAST-IN ANCHOR ASSEMBLY SEE RTA DRAWING No RTAB032 RL 248.430 780 65 4 11 3 000 5 11 WITH VERTICAL FACE OF CONCRETE BARRIER 770 1 180
DIA 100 UPVC PIPE 7 FOR DETAILS SEE SHEET No XX 11 6 11 RL 247.630 1 180 770 3 000 780
INCLUDED IN THE TENDER DOCUMENTS - TYP 392 5
1 200 300
29 RL 248.435 RL 247.659 390
1 031
1 745
550
1 820
1 030
275
21
275
710
E -
1 270
1 755
1 815
DETAIL
DIA 100 UPVC PIPE FOR DETAILS 3 050 3 025 3 085 3 120 SEE SHEET No XX
0 500
D 1000 1500mm
500
250
RL 243.565 50 THICK MASS 1 400 1 400 CONCRETE 4 11 780 780
RL 242.790
50 THICK MASS 6 11 5 CONCRETE
5 11
VIEW
2 9
VIEW
3 9
11
DETAIL
E -
ABUTMENT B
ABUTMENT A
0 500 500 250
UNISTRUT CONCRETE INSERTS FOR DRAINAGE PIPE ARE NOT SHOWN, FOR DETAILS SEE SHEETS No XX AND XX.
1000
1500mm
NAME PLATE SET FLUSH 4 11 RL 247.630 780 65 400 29

300 1 200
7 DIA 100 UPVC PIPE FOR DETAILS 11
6 11
5 11 3 000
WITH VERTICAL FACE OF CONCRETE BARRIER
GENERAL NOTES
0 1000 2000 3000mm
SEE SHEET No XX 770 1 180 1 180 770 3 000 780 RL 247.659 RL 248.435 RL 248.430 382 4
SCALE
1000 500
OR AS SHOWN.
DENOTES REDUCED LEVELS AT TOP FRONT EDGE OF WINGWALL. FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET, SEE SHEET No XX.
550
1 030
1 030
1 745
1 815
1 815
710
275
275
D -
1 280
1 745
21
FIGURE 22.2
DIA 100 UPVC PIPE FOR DETAILS
3 085
3 025
3 060
SEE SHEET No XX
3 120
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH

MAIN ROAD No 78 RL 242.790 50 THICK MASS 1 400 1 400 CONCRETE 4 11 780 780 6 11 50 THICK MASS CONCRETE RL 243.565 SHIRE OF GUNDAGAI

AT 4km EAST OF COOLAC ABUTMENTS CONCRETE - SHEET B
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 CLIENT SOUTH WEST REGIONAL OFFICE 1 SIMMONS STREET WAGGA WAGGA PO BOX 484 WAGGA WAGGA NSW 2650 PHONE (02) 6938-1111 FACSIMILE (02) 6938-1183
5 11
PHONE (02) 8837-0802
FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
VIEW
2 9
11
VIEW
3 9
CHECKED
0078 246 BC 2468

RTA BRIDGE NUMBER
ABUTMENT A
ABUTMENT B
2479
ISSUE STATUS: FOR CONSTRUCTION SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No kp2f222.dgn
600 125 90 210 35 5 55 5 175 125
600 175 35 265 175
600 210 90 55 35 5 125 175
600 265 35 125
390
THRIE BEAM CONNECTION RECESS
600
390
50mm DIA x 125 LONG UPVC PIPE 600 FOR ABUTMENT DRAINAGE TYPICAL EACH SIDE 1 745 340
550
550
ANCHOR AND 275 340 1 745 1 745 THRIE BEAM 1 745
ANCHOR AND THRIE BEAM 275
THRIE BEAM CONNECTION RECESS
SIDE WALL
180
180
DIA 100 UPVC PIPE
100 VARIES FROM ???? TO ???? VARIES FROM ???? TO ????
180
DIA 100 UPVC PIPE
180
VARIES FROM ???? TO ????
VARIES FROM ???? TO ????
75
DETAIL
F 4
100
200
300mm
100
50
500
150
150
500
125
375 600
100 1 400
100
375 600
125 1 400
VIEW
4 5
VIEW
6 5
SECTION
5 5
SECTION
7 5
GAPS BETWEEN CONDUITS SHALL BE SEALED WITH SILICONE SEALANT TO
GENERAL NOTES
0 500 1000 1500mm
PREVENT RELATIVE MOVEMENT AND WRAPPED WITH WATERPROOF TAPE TO 200 PREVENT THE INGRESS OF MORTAR - TYP DN 100 (AU) HD RIGID PLAIN INSULATING UPVC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS TO AS/NZS 2053 WITH GALVANISED DRAW WIRE - TYP 50 ABUTMENT END
SCALE
500 250
OR AS SHOWN.
FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET, SEE SHEET No X.
FIGURE 22.3
8 APPROACH END 8 DN 125 (AU) HD RIGID PLAIN INSULATING UPVC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS TO AS/NZS 2053 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH

MAIN ROAD No 78 SHIRE OF GUNDAGAI

AT 4km EAST OF COOLAC ABUTMENT CONCRETE DETAILS - SHEET C
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CLIENT SOUTH WEST REGIONAL OFFICE 1 SIMMONS STREET WAGGA WAGGA PO BOX 484 WAGGA WAGGA NSW 2650 PHONE (02) 6938-1111 FACSIMILE (02) 6938-1183
PREPARED DESIGN
CHECKED
UPVC CONDUIT DETAIL

0
0078 246 BC 2468

RTA BRIDGE NUMBER
DRAWING
100 200 300mm
2479

100 50
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No kp2f223.dgn
3 9 600 4 800 RL 244.770 - PIER 1 RL 245.160 - PIER 2 CONTROL LINE 1 RL 244.915 - PIER 1 RL 245.305 - PIER 2 4 800 RL 244.770 - PIER 1 RL 245.160 - PIER 2 144 1 300 180 DIA 45 x 300 DEEP RECESS (TYP) NCF 180 RL 242.615 - PIER 1 RL 243.005 - PIER 2 3 360 180 OF BEARINGS 370 370 OF BEARINGS 95 95 2 500 OF PIER 1 250 1 250
BEARING AND GIRDER 30 NOM MORTAR PAD
3%
3%
1 240
150 SOFFIT OF HEADSTOCK TYP
916
DETAIL
250 TYP 7 505 - PIER 3 8 115 - PIER 1
100 50
A -
NCF
100
200
300
400
500mm
DIA 2 000
SECTION
3 -
500
1000
1500mm
500
250
2 -
NCF 100 CJ
2 CH 27 028.850 - PIER 1 1 500 CONTROL LINE CH 27 098.850 - PIER 2 SCALE

1000 500
GENERAL NOTES
0 1000 2000 3000mm
OR AS SHOWN.
BEARING 339%%d 0.0 0.0"
RL 234.000 - PIER 2 RL 233.000 - PIER 1 50 THICK TYP MASS CONCRETE 50
CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION FOR HEADSTOCK: A. CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION ELSEWHERE: B1. MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 40MPa. EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20x20 AND RE-ENTRANT ANGLES FILLETED 20x20 4 150 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. NCF DENOTES NO CHAMFER OR FILLET. CJ DENOTES CONSTRUCTION JOINT. DENOTES RL ON TOP OF CONCRETE.
ELEVATION
OF PIER
FIGURE 22.4
8 300
9 600 4 800 4 800
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
180
1 200
1 200
2 300
95
360 PREP CHECK AUTH SHIRE OF GUNDAGAI
DIA 45 RECESS
OF BEARINGS
A -
CH 27 028.850 - PIER 1 CONTROL LINE CH 27 098.850 - PIER 2 4 150

MAIN ROAD No 78
OF PIER

AT 4km EAST OF COOLAC PIERS - CONCRETE
1 250
OF BEARINGS
2 500
OF BEARINGS 1 250
PREPARED BY CLIENT SOUTH WEST REGIONAL OFFICE 1 SIMMONS STREET WAGGA WAGGA PO BOX 484 WAGGA WAGGA NSW 2650 PHONE (02) 6938-1111 FACSIMILE (02) 6938-1183
370
370
95
MORTAR PADS 4 150 BEARING 2 000 BEARING 2 000 BEARING 2 000 BEARING 2 000 BEARING 8 300 4 150 PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING
CHECKED
0078 246 BC 2468

RTA BRIDGE NUMBER
2479
VIEW
1 -
SECTION
2 MANAGER, BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS
ISSUE STATUS: FOR CONSTRUCTION SHEET No
10
ISSUE
CAD No kp2f224.dgn
UPSTREAM
HOLDING DOWN BOLTS DOWNSTREAM CONTROL LINE MCN1 1000
RL 417.120 200 RL 416.802
200
M24 HOLDING DOWN BOLTS SEE SHEET No XX
100
100
PILES
c OF PIER L
ELEVATION SECTION 1 -
CONTROL LINE MCN1 ABUTMENT B SIDE HOLDING DOWN BOLT SPACING 1 B C 10 SPACES AT D APPROX B
OF PIER BEARING 217 38 48"
GENERAL NOTES
0 200 400 600 800 1000mm
SCALE 1 CH x" E
200 100
OR AS SHOWN
CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B1 MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 40 MPa
HOLDING DOWN BOLT SPACING 10 SPACES AT F L A
EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20x20 AND RE-ENTRANT ANGLES FILLETED 20x20 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. CO-ORDINATES SHOWN ARE ABBREVIATED FOR TRUE EASTING ADD 300 000, AND FOR TRUE NORTHING ADD 6 480 000
ABUTMENT A SIDE
FIGURE 22.5
PLAN
MAIN ROAD No 67 SHIRE OF YASS
BRIDGE OVER WET WATER CREEK

AT 34km WEST OF YASS PIER CONCRETE
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 CLIENT INSERT RELEVANT CLIENT DETAILS HERE
TABLE 1
PIER No 1 2 3 CH x 58 128.215 58 140.415 58 152.615 EASTING 986.717 979.027 971.682 NORTHING 1 142.952 1 152.424 1 162.165 L 7980 8050 8130 A 1435 1445 1460 B 215 255 295 C 644 659 676 D 636 642 649 E 506 498 489 F 632 636 642 PAx 1 2 3 PAy 4 5 6 PKx 1 2 3 PEZx 1 2 3
FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
0067 258 BC 1258

10571
PRELIMINARY
7
CAD No kp2f225.dgn
FROM ALBURY 34 910 335 35 000 35 000 34 910
TO CULCAIRN
SPACING OF ANCHOR BOLT GROUPS FOR TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING: 55 SPACES AT 2 530 = 139 150 (TYPICAL BOTH SIDES)
335 ABUTMENT B CH 133.760
ABUTMENT A
END OF S/S
PIER 2
1 CH 26km 993.940 SPAN 1
SPAN 2 CH 27km 028.850
SPAN 3 CH 063.850
PIER 3
PIER 1
SPAN 4 CH 098.850
CONTROL LINE
BEARING 339%%d 00 00.0"
ONLY SHOW km VALUE WHERE THE 1 CHANGE FROM ONE km VALUE TO THE NEXT OCCURS WITHIN THE STRUCTURE
2 -
2 -
PLAN
0 2 4 6 8 10m 2 1
3 -
OF PIER 2
10 200 600 4 500 4 500 600
1 430 40 GAP
1 430
115
CONTROL LINE
115 TOP OF PARAPET
3 75 THICK ASPHALT AND WATERPROOF MEMBRANE 1 2

200
3%
1 145
3%
A 30 GAP 30 GAP
70 THICK TRANSFLOOR TYP 25 TYP 35 PERMANENT FORM WORK PANEL (TYP)
90 TYP 25 30 HAUNCH ON TYP GIRDER (TYP) TYP 35
250
250 CONTACT SURFACES SHALL BE SEALED WITH HIGH DENSITY EXPANDED POLYURETHANE FOAM (WITH A MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 400kPa) COMPLYING WITH ASTM D-1621 OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT 2 000 2 000 2 000 2 000 FORMED RECESSES APPROX 80 70 PROJECTION DEEP TO PERMIT ADJUSTMENT OF RAILING POST. RECESSES SHALL BE FILLED WITH CEMENT GROUT OR MORTAR AFTER FINAL ALIGNMENT OF RAILING 5 125 35 95 600 325 140 115 3 -
VIEW
2 -
500
1000
1500mm
500
250
SECTION
1
435
FIGURE 22.6
ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH
680
0 500 1000 1500mm
340
20 MIN
GAP 890

180 NCF 315 155 1 145 MAIN ROAD No 78 CITY OF ALBURY
500
250
BRIDGE OVER MAIN SOUTHERN RAILWAY AT 27.5km NORTH OF ALBURY
GENERAL NOTES
SCALES AS SHOWN. CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: A 255 MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 40 MPa. EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20x20 AND RE-ENTRANT ANGLES FILLETED 20x20 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. NCF DENOTES NO CHAMFER OR FILLET. S/S DENOTES BRIDGE SUPERSTRUCTURE. CONCRETE IN CROSS GIRDERS AT PIERS AND ABUTMENTS SHALL BE PLACED AFTER 26 250 PREPARED M30 TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING ANCHOR BOLTS SEE SHEET No XX CJ
DECK - SHEET A
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CLIENT INSERT RELEVANT CLIENT DETAILS HERE
CHECKED
SECTION
3 -
PLACEMENT OF BRACING AND PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF DECK FORMWORK. SEE SHEET No ?? FOR REDUCED LEVELS AT POINTS 1-3. DENOTES VALUE AT SUPPORT AND VARIES ELSEWHERE DUE TO VERTICAL CURVE
1500mm 250 125
DETAIL
A -
DESIGN DRAWING
500 750mm
0078 202 BC 2468

RTA BRIDGE NUMBER
END OF S/S
2479
500
1000
250

500
250
SHEET No
16
ISSUE
CAD No kp2f226.dgn
SECTION 23
STEEL REINFORCEMENT DETAILING
Steel Reinforcement Detailing
23
23.1 LAYOUT
STEEL REINFORCEMENT DETAILING
The layout of a reinforcement drawing shall be in accordance with the principles outlined in Section 22 of this Manual. Elevations, Plans and Views of bridge components shall be treated as being transparent with the applicable reinforcement details being added. The prefix 'Sectional' shall not be used with any sub-title.
23.2
BAR AND FABRIC DETAILING

The detailing of reinforcement shall be in accordance with the Authority's Manual "Steel Reinforcement Detailing" (Appendix A to this Section). Irrespective of bar shape, the numbering of reinforcement, whether bars or fabric, shall be in sequential order of bar placement and shall proceed from the bottom to the top of the element under consideration wherever possible and/or practical. Bar marking shall be in accordance with Clauses 2 and 3 of Appendix A to this section. eg 1 In a pier spread footing, where the bar that is placed closest to the bottom face and placed first, shall be numbered P1 with the next bar being placed being numbered P2, P3 etc In bridge decks where cross girders and/or diaphragms are used, the first bars placed will be in the cross girders or diaphragms as these bars must be placed before the main slab reinforcement. Numbering shall start at D1
The location of reinforcing bars in relation to each other, particularly in connection details such as column to headstock, pile to pilecap and footing to column, should be closely examined to ensure that bars may be easily placed and that concrete compaction in that area can be achieved. The location of cast-in metal work i.e. dowels, anchor bolts etc. and the location of formed holes shall also be checked to ensure interference is minimised. Where the location of the cast-in item is critical, reinforcement shall be detailed to suit the particular application. Where interference is of a minor nature only and is not critical e.g. the placing of shear reinforcement, a suitable note to be added to the drawing would be; "the spacing of . . . . . bars may be adjusted slightly where necessary to clear formed holes and dowels." Australian Standard bar shapes, as shown in Tables 3.1 (A) and 3.1(B) of AS 1100 Part 501, have been adopted for use along with bar shapes that are commonly used by RTA Bridge Engineering. See RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB031. Where the shape of a particular bar does not conform to the Standard bar shapes as shown on RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB031, a Z suffix shall be added to the bar shape code with the first non-standard shape being AZ. Variations within a particular non-standard bar shape, ie same general shape with different leg lengths, shall be identified
OTB005
Issue 1 Revision 2 (05 March 2010)
Page 1 of 3
by the use of the next available numerical suffix within that particular bar shape, eg AZ1, AZ2. Any subsequent non-standard bar shapes shall be numbered 'BZ', 'CZ' etc. and all nonstandard shapes shall be clearly defined in the "BAR SHAPES DIAGRAM" so that bending to the correct size and shape can be achieved. Where non-standard bars require fitment bends and hooks, this and any other special features of any non-standard bars shall be specified in the Bar Shapes Diagram.
23.3
23.3.1
DEVELOPMENT AND LAP LENGTHS

General
This Clause provides information on development and lap lengths in common situations. For information not covered by this Clause refer to AS 5100.5, Section 13. 23.3.2 Development lengths for a bar in tension
Formulae for calculation of development lengths of bars in tension are provided in AS 5100.5, Clause 13.1. Tables 1 and 2 in Appendix A to this section, contain deemed-to-comply development lengths for Grade D500N bars to develop the full yield strength of the bar including the conditions for their use. Table 1 contains development lengths of bars in general position, with the exception of bars in a horizontal position with more than 300 mm of concrete cast below the bar. Development lengths for these bars are given in Table 2. As a general rule, the centre to centre spacing of reinforcement in deck slabs is 150mm, which leaves an approximate clear spacing between the bars of 120mm and in most cases, the splice lengths will need to be calculated separately. 23.3.3 Development lengths for a bar in compression Development lengths for Grade D500N bars in compression, Lsy.c, are given in Table 3 of Appendix A to this section. The development length of a bar in compression must be straight. A bend or a standard hook are not considered effective in developing stress in reinforcement in compression. 23.3.4 Splicing of reinforcement. 23.3.4.1 General (i) Where lapped splices are used, the lapped portions of bars shall be in contact.
(ii) Bars in a splice shall provide minimum clear spacing of 1.5 times the diameter of the bar, 1.5 times the maximum nominal size of the aggregate or 40 mm between adjacent parallel bars.
23.3.4.2
OTB005
Lapped splices for bars in tension

Issue 1 Revision 2 (05 March 2010) Page 2 of 3
The lap splice length of bars in tension shall be not less than the development length, Lsy.t, specified in Clause 23.3.2 above. Tensile reinforcement shall not be spliced at points of maximum stress and not more than 50% of the total area of tensile reinforcement shall be spliced in any section. The following note shall be placed in the General Notes on relevant sheets where reinforcement is detailed. Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, laps on adjacent bars on any face shall be staggered (offset) by no less than the lap length. Where bars are spliced at points of maximum stress and it is not possible to stagger the splices, the lap length shall be not less than 1.3 Lsy.t . 23.3.4.3 Lapped splices for bars in compression
For formulae for the length of splices for bars in compression refer to AS 5100.5, Clause 13.2.5. Lap splice lengths for Grade D500N bars in compression shall, for most applications, be not less than values given in Table 3 of Appendix A to this section. In cases where the ratio of cross-sectional area of ties, fitments or helixes to the main compression reinforcement exceeds the limits specified in Clauses 13.2.5 (b) and (c) of AS 5100.5, a reduced lap length of 0.8 times the value provided in Table 3 may be applicable. For identification of bars in compression, the designer may need to be consulted.
OTB005
Issue 1 Revision 2 (05 March 2010)
Page 3 of 3
RTA STRUCTURAL DRAFTING AND DETAILING MANUAL
SECTION 23 - STEEL REINFORCEMENT DETAILING APPENDIX A
Issue 1 - Revision 1 (05 March 2010)
CONTENTS
CLAUSE No TOPIC PAGE No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 22
INTRODUCTION................................................................... 1 DETAILING OF REINFORCEMENT........................................... NOMENCLATURE................................................................ LINE WEIGHTS.................................................................. BASIC PRINCIPLES............................................................ SINGLE BARS OR SETS OF A SMALL NUMBER OF BARS.... 2 6 7 5 8
NUMBER OF BARS IN A SET............................................... 12 COVER TO REINFORCEMENT............................................... LAPS IN REINFORCEMENT.................................................. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH OF REINFORCEMENT...................... DETAILING REINFORCEMENT IN SECTIONS....................... LAYERS OF REINFORCEMENT............................................. SPACING OF BARS............................................................ REINFORCING FABRIC......................................................... LAPPED SPLICES FOR REINFORCING MESH IN TENSION....... DETAILING LARGE AREAS OF REINFORCEMENT................... CONCRETE DETAILING........................................................ ARRANGEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT................................... SIZE AND GRADE OF REINFORCING BAR............................ CLEAR SPACING AT LAPS................................................ ACTUAL COVER TO LAPPED REINFORCEMENT.................... DEVELOPMENT LENGTH FOR A BAR IN TENSION............... LAPPED SPLICE LENGTH FOR A BAR IN COMPRESSION...... 15 16 19 20 23 27 29 30 30 31 31 33 34 35 36 36
TABLE 1 - DEVELOPMENT AND LAP LENGTHS FOR BARS IN TENSION - GENERAL BARS............... TABLE 2 - DEVELOPMENT AND LAP LENGTHS FOR BARS IN TENSION - TOP BARS....................... TABLE 3 - DEVELOPMENT AND LAP LENGTHS FOR BARS IN COMPRESSION................................... TABLE 4 - BAR MASSES.................................................. 38 38 38 37
-1-
INTRODUCTION
Generally, this document has been prepared to conform to the requirements of AS/NZS 1101.501 - Structural Engineering Drawing and Austroads Guide to Bridge Technology - Part 5: Structural Drafting. Steel reinforcement should be generally detailed as set out in this document and in accordance with the requirements of AS 5100-Bridge Design.
The layout of a reinforcement drawing should follow the procedure set out in Section 22 of the RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual. The elevations, views and plans should be treated as "transparent" and the reinforcement added. Sub-titles shall be ELEVATION, VIEW and PLAN. The word "Sectional" shall not be used in any title or sub-title.
-2-
2.
DETAILING OF REINFORCEMENT
A typical example of describing a set of reinforcing bars is:Bar mark
A2 14-N16-S-300EF
Information for placing Spacing of bars along limit line in millimetres Bar shape code Bar size in millimetres Bar structural properties (default grade is D500N) Number of bars in the set Bar number in sequence Structure element denotation
Note:
1. 2.
The annotation "mm" is NOT used. There are NO full stops. Where possible, the standard bar shapes as shown on
3.
RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB031, shall be used. Where a standard bar shape does not suit the application, a non-standard bar shape shall be created in accordance with Clause 23.2 of the RTA Structural Drafting Manual and Detailing Manual. 4. A letter should prefix the bar sequence number to aid in detailing bars in various elements of a bridge. For example, "A" could refer to Abutment A, "B" to Abutment B, "P" to piers and "D" to the deck steel. 5. Where a grade of steel other than D500N (deformed bars, grade 500 steel, normal ductility) is required, the size of bar should be prefixed by a grade designation D250N for Grade 250 deformed reinforcing bar, normal ductility R for plain round reinforcing bar, Grade R250N
W for round reinforcing bar, Grade 500L Where a Grade 250 deformed reinforcing bar with normal ductility is required, it should be indicated as follows: A8 14-D250N12-S-300 Other examples include: A8 14-R12-S-300 (for plain round reinforcing bar, Grade 250N) A8 14-W10-SP-300 (for plain round reinforcing wire, Grade 500L)
-3-
NOMENCLATURE
To facilitate use of the method of detailing given in this Manual, the nomenclature given in Figure 3a shall be used.
6 50
45 3 2 5 D2 10-N12-S-300
45 1 3 4
D1 10-N12-S-300
FIGURE 3a
Typical bar
Limit line
Limit bar - of BAR or of a BUNDLE OF BARS
Detail line
Circle at junction of the typical bar and the limit line
Starting dimension to limit bar. Closing dimension is not given, except where non-nominal cover is required. Starting and closing dimensions are necessary when using "EQUAL SPACES" and an approximate dimension for the equal spaces shall be shown.
-4-
4.
LINE WEIGHTS
To obtain uniformity in detailing of reinforcement on drawings the line thicknesses shown in Figure 4a shall be used.
CONCRETE OUTLINE 0.3mm or 0.5mm
TYPICAL-SINGLE BAR OR GROUP 0.7mm FOR FOR 2 OR MORE BARS IN A BUNDLE 0.5mm LIMIT BAR 0.7mm CIRCLE 3mm DIAMETER 7mm (PREFERRED)
0.25mm
5mm
Use 4mm diameter circle (at Scale 1:1) for bundles of bars.
D1 16-N12-L-300EF
FIGURE 4a
-5-
BASIC PRINCIPLES
The basic principle of detailing reinforcement is that only ONE TYPICAL BAR, or TYPICAL GROUP of any SET of bars is drawn.
For example, the set of bars shown in Figure 5a would be detailed as shown in Figure 5b.
D1
13 SPACES AT 300
60
DECK SLAB ASSUMED
FIGURE 5a
60
D1 14-N12-S-300
FIGURE 5b
-6Figures 5c and 5d show alternative methods for designating the reinforcement. In Figure 5c the bar marking is written on an extension of the limit line, in Figure 5d the bar marking is written directly on the typical bar. However, these methods of detailing should only be considered where overcrowding of the detail would not occur, the preferred method is that which is shown in Figure 5b. D1 13-N12-S-100EF
50
100
60
D3 12-N12-L-100 DECK SLAB ASSUMED
D2 12-N12-S-100EF
FIGURE 5b
60
D1 13-12-S-100EF D3 12-N12-L-100
50 100
D2 12-N12-S-100EF
FIGURE 5C
-760 D3 13-N12-S-100 D2 12-N12-L-100
50 100
D1 12-N12-S-100EF
FIGURE 5D
A5 5-N12-S-100EF
100
A4 12-N12-L-100
100
50
60
A1 5-N12-S-100EF A3 8-N12-S-100EF
A2 7-N12-S-100EF DENOTES VARIABLE LENGTH BAR
FIGURE 5e
-8-
6.
SINGLE BARS OR SETS OF A SMALL NUMBER OF BARS
Where single bars occur they shall detailed as shown in Figure 6a.
A1 1-N12-V
FIGURE 6a
Where a set of a small number of bars occur and space is limited they may be detailed using the most suitable alternative method as shown in Figure 6b.
A1 2-N16-L-200
OR
OR
A1 2-N16-L-200
A1 2-N16-L-200
May be used when bars are too close to enclose
FIGURE 6b
arrowhead
-9-
NOTE: It may be necessary in some instances to detail all the bars for various reasons, eg:a) to ensure that they can be fitted in, OR b) bars are at an irregular spacing. Figure 6c shows an example.
1 70
1 -
100
A25 1-N12-LL
150
A25 1-N12-LL
80
A24 4-N12-T
DETAIL
A -
Number of bars should be shown
A25
Bar mark shown only A24
VIEW
1 -
FIGURE 6c
-10When showing bars in elevation do not show bars in section. Figure 6d shows LL bars as in section but this is not how they appear in elevation. Figure 6e shows the correct method to use. 1 -
P2
P1
NC I
P1 1 -
RR O
CT E
P2
ELEVATION FIGURE 6d
VIEW
1 -
1 -
PIER ASSUMED
P2
P1
70
70
9 BUNDLES OF P1 2-N28-LL-200 (Indicating 9 bundles of 2 bars) 1 -
5 BUNDLES OF P2 2-N28-LL-200 (Indicating 5 bundles of 2 bars)
ELEVATION
VIEW
1 -
FIGURE 6e CORRECT METHOD

PIER ASSUMED
-11The term "equal spaces" shall only be used when the spacing of several (say, 7 bars) is to be indicated. Where the spacing of numerous bars, (say, more than 7) needs to be shown and the overall dimension between the limit bars divided by the number of spaces gives a value not ending in 0 or 5, then one of the alternatives shown in Figure 6f shall be adopted.
A1 16-N16-S-200
A1 1-16-S
ALTERNATIVE 1 (Preferred)
A1 17-N16-S-200 APPROX
DIMENSION REQUIRED IF ALTERNATIVE 2 COVER IS NOT NOMINAL
FIGURE 6f
-12-
7.
NUMBER OF BARS IN A SET
The number of bars in a set of bars (as shown in Clause 5) is detailed as:Bar mark number of bars-bar type bar size-bar shape-spacing eg A1 14-N12-HT-200
The number of bars for any set of bars, as well as the complete bar description shall be shown once and ONCE ONLY on the drawing, preferably in plan or elevation. When reference is made to the bar in any other view or section, only the bar mark shall be shown.
Typical examples are shown in Figures 7a, 7b, 7c and 7d.
Ideally, the total number of bars should be called up in one or two main views. The remaining views and sections should only be used to show the bar marks and the arrangement of the bars.
(a)
A set of bars
A1 14-N12-V-150 (a set of single bars) OR
14 BUNDLES OF A1 1-N12-V-150, A2 1-N12-L-150 (a set of bundles of bars)
FIGURE 7a
-13-
(b)
Bundles of bars
When two or more bars are placed side by side (eg fitments in a parapet, column, etc) they shall be called up in bundles and shown by two lines.
14 BUNDLES OF A1 2-N12-HT-200
14 BUNDLES OF A1 1-N12-HT-200, A2 1-N12-K-200
FIGURE 7b
Note: Where bars are drawn in a bundle a line of thickness of 0.5mm may be used for the typical bars (but not the limit bar). Not all the bars need to be shown where the number within a bundle exceeds a practical pictorial representation. In this case one or two lines are sufficient to represent the bundle.
Figure 7c shows a bundle of bars in section, Figure 7d shows the set of the same bundles of bars in elevation. Figure 7e shows the correct representation of the bars in elevation.
BUNDLE OF BARS
A2
A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 SET OF BARS
FIGURE 7c: SECTION
FIGURE 7d: ELEVATION
-14Allow 1.5mm between bars for clarity. Allowing for scaling eg Scale 1:20 allow 30mm between bars.
10 BUNDLES OF A1 1-N16-HT-200, A2 2-N16-A-200

4mm CIRCLE
FIGURE 7e: CORRECT METHOD
10 BUNDLES OF A2 2-N16-A-200
A1 10-N16-HT-200
FIGURE 7f: ALTERNATIVE METHOD
Where there are several sets of bars or bundles of bars in a small area they are detailed as:-
4 SETS OF 6 BUNDLES OF A1 1-N16-HT-200, A2 2-N16-A-200
FIGURE 7g
-15-
COVER TO REINFORCEMENT
Drawings on which reinforcement is detailed shall contain a note which states the required cover to the reinforcement. Where there is a suite of drawings to depict an element within a set of drawings, the note shall be provided on one sheet only.
Example:"Nominal cover to reinforcement nearest to the concrete surface shall be 50mm, unless specified otherwise."
Figure 8a shows the method of detailing cover on the drawings, where such detailing is necessary.
COVER
65
PREFERRED
65 COVER
ALTERNATIVE, USE WHERE PREFERRED METHOD IS NOT CONVENIENT
FIGURE 8a
-16-
9.
LAPS IN REINFORCEMENT
Straight laps in reinforcement are detailed as shown in Figures 9a and 9b.
ALLOW 1.5mm BETWEEN 600 BARS FOR CLARITY
FIGURE 9a: First preference
A straight line at 600 30 to the bar
FIGURE 9b: Alternative method
The length of lap should only appear on the drawing, as shown in Figures 8a and 8b, if not covered in the General Notes.
-17Laps need not be shown unless they are required in a specific location. In this case different bar marks should be shown. a) When lap location does not matter.
MAXIMUM LENGTH OF BAR
D1
FIGURE 9c: Incorrect method

D1
FIGURE 9d: Correct method

b) Where specific location of laps is required. MAXIMUM LENGTH OF BAR
D1 GIVE DIMENSION
D2
FIGURE 9e OR
D1 (x LONG)
D2
FIGURE 9f: Preferred

As shown in Clause 18.3 of the RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual
-18-
c) Where bars of different diameter lap, the required lap length shall be shown ( the lap length being that required for the smaller sized bar ).
SHOW LAP LENGTH
GIVE DIMENSION
FIGURE 9f
Lap lengths for various size bars that are lapped on a drawing should be shown in General Notes.
Acceptable minimum lap lengths are set out in Tables 1, 2 and 3 on pages 37 and 38.
Where laps in longitudinal bars are not detailed eg in deck slabs, the following notes shall appear in the General Notes.
UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS, LAPS ON ADJACENT BARS ON ANY FACE SHALL BE STAGGERED (OFFSET) BY NO LESS THAN THE LAP LENGTH. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, THE MINIMUM DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS AND LAP LENGTHS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: BAR SIZE (mm): a)HORIZONTAL BARS WITH >300mm OF CONCRETE CAST BELOW THE BAR: b) OTHER BARS: ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 10 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40
DENOTES VARIABLE LENGTH BAR. GIVE VALUES AS APPLICABLE (See AS 5100.5-Clause 13.1)
-19-
10
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH OF REINFORCEMENT
The development length of reinforcement for any bars which are anchored in concrete (as distinct from laps) shall be indicated on the drawings only if different from that shown in the table. Acceptable minimum development and lap lengths are set out in Tables 1, 2 and 3 on pages 37 and 38 of this document.
COVER WHICH IS OTHER THAN NOMINAL MUST BE SHOWN
840
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH
P1 10-N28-S SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION

1 -
FIGURE 10a
-20-
11.
DETAILING REINFORCEMENT IN SECTIONS
Examples of reinforced concrete members are given in Figures 11a 11b and 11c.
The following is to be noted:-
(i)
Bars in section (shown as filled in circles) are indicated by arrows when designating the bar mark. Bars should be approximately in proportion with the scale of drawings.
(ii)
Fitments and other bars shown as a line in section, are indicated by a circle when designating the bar mark.
(a)
When all bars in section are of the same mark
FITMENT HOOKS SHALL BE SHOWN CORRECTLY TO SCALE - THIS WILL ENSURE THEY FIT (REFER TO RTAB031) 3 EQUAL SPACES
P2 SHADED CIRCLE SHALL BE 2mm DIAMETER WHEN PRINTED ON A1 SIZE SHEET 3 EQUAL SPACES P1
FITMENT BENDS SHALL BE DRAWN TO SCALE
FIGURE 11a
Arrows indicate the limits of P2 bars in the section
Note: Sufficient dimensions for the spacing of the reinforcement are necessary in this section to permit dimensions of fitments to be calculated. Dimensions are necessary where bars would foul dowel locations or recesses, etc.
-21-
(b) More than one bar mark in a section
P4
P3
P3
P1
P2 3 EQUAL SPACES
FIGURE 11b
This method may be used where there are only one or two bars of the same mark. Showing the number of equal spaces is optional.
3 EQUAL SPACES
-22-
A9
A10
3 EQUAL SPACES
A8
A7
A5 A6
FIGURE 11c
-23-
12.
LAYERS OF REINFORCEMENT
Where layers of reinforcement are to be detailed, as in the faces of deck slabs or walls, the abbreviations used to denote reinforcement placement information shall be in accordance with AS/NZS 1100.501 - Table 3.2.
It is not necessary to explain the denotations NF etc. in the General Notes, as they are included in Australian Standard terminology. An example of usage is given in Figure 12a.
A2
A3
A1
IN SLABS AND WALLS CHECK
SECTION
1 -
TO ENSURE THE CLEAR DISTANCE IS AT LEAST THAT REQUIRED IN AS 5100-BRIDGE DESIGN
A3 12-N12-S-100NF, A1 12-N16-S-100FF A2 11-N12-S-150EF
1 -
1 -
PLAN FIGURE 12a

Note: In Figure 12a the number of bars shown in the notation "A2 11-N12-S-150EF" applies to each face. Therefore, the total number of A2 bars is 22.
-24-
Where bars such as LL bars are to be placed at near and far faces at equivalent spacing, the upper bars cannot be placed directly over corresponding lower bars. This being due to side legs lapping. In this case it is generally sufficient to show one typical bar to cover both upper and lower bars, as shown in Figure 12b.
D4
D1 AND D2
D3
VIEW
1 -
D4 12-N12-S-100NF, D3 12-N16-S-100FF
DIMENSION SHOULD ALLOW FOR COVER PLUS ONE BAR DIAMETER
1 D1 11-N12-LL-200FF, D2 11-N16-LL-200NF
1 -
PLAN FIGURE 12b
-25-
If bars on the near face and the far face are of different length or shape, then it is necessary to detail each layer separately. Figure 12c shows the detailing of bars of different length or shape.
D2
D1
SECTION
1 -
D2 10-N16-L-100NF
1 -
1 -
D1 10-N20-S-100FF
PLAN FIGURE 12c
-26Sometimes it may be necessary to detail more layers of reinforcement than those on near face and far faces, eg deep pile caps. In this case layers shall be numbered as shown in Figure 12d. P3 P1 P2 NF1 NF2 NF3 P4
FF2 FF1
P2
P4
SECTION
1 -
P1 19-N28-S-150NF1, FF1 P3 10-N24-SP-300NF2, NF3, FF2
1 -
1 -
P2 11-N28-S-150NF1, FF1 P4 6-N24-S-300NF2, NF3, FF2
PLAN FIGURE 12d
-2713 SPACING OF BARS
Spacing of bars shall be as required by AS 5100.5. Minimum spacing centre to centre of parallel bars shall be 2.5 times the diameter and the clear distance shall be not less than 1.5 times the size of the aggregate.
Maximum spacing of temperature and shrinkage reinforcement shall be 200mm for 12 bars and 300mm for 16 bars.
Considerable thought should be given to:a) Ease of placing bars b) Ensuring that bars can fit where they are supposed to be placed. (Large scale details may be of assistance.) c) Fitment type bars have a thickness of 2 diameters where ends overlap at hooks. d) The deformations on deformed bars, see Figure 13a. h
DEFORMED BAR HEIGHT RANGE (h) OF DEFORMATIONS BAR SIZE 10 12 16 20 24 HEIGHT 0.5-1.0 0.6-1.2 0.8-1.6 1.0-2.0 1.2-2.4 BAR SIZE 28 32 36 40 HEIGHT 1.4-2.8 1.6-3.2 1.8-3.6 2.0-4.0
FIGURE 13a - Deformed bars

e) Providing sufficient access between bars to place and vibrate concrete - ESPECIALLY WHERE BARS ARE LAPPED. Concrete pump hoses require an access of 125mm x 125mm, however 200mm x 200mm is desirable to accommodate other discharge tubes etc. These access holes should be spaced at no more than 1500mm centres. Preferably these access holes should continue to the soffit. Vibrator access of 60mm x 60mm at 750mm centres should be provided.
-28f) The location of starter bars in columns should be clearly defined to facilitate lapping with main vertical reinforcement.
g) The arrangement of bars at connections such as piles to pile-caps, columns to headstocks etc. should be checked to ensure no clashes take place.
h) Where cast-in items, eg bolts and dowels, or formed recesses are incorporated, check that bars clear these items.
i) In post-tensioned work special attention should be paid to bars in end-block areas. Every effort should be made to ensure bars fit without clashing and sufficient room is allowed for placing and vibrating concrete.
j) Where closely spaced bars need to be spliced, thought should be given to cranking bars or double splicing so continuing bars shall have the same location. See Figure 13b.
DOUBLE SPLICE
CRANKED BAR
FIGURE 13b - Types of bar splices
-29-
14. REINFORCING FABRIC
Reinforcing fabric is detailed as shown in Figures 14a and 14b. The reference numbers and other details of the fabric are given in AS/NZS 4671. (a) Rectangular or square shaped fabric Indicates the direction of reinforcement nearest to the concrete surface
Direction of main reinforcement
D12 1-R500RL718-F-FF Wire type and strength grade Reference number for mesh
D15 1-R500SL102-F-FF
FIGURE 14a
(b) Trapezoidal shaped fabric
Shape code for fabric
D10 1-R500RL718-CZ-FF
Non standard shape Note: Show cross section of the fabric for non-symmetrical shapes in the Bar Shapes Diagram.
FIGURE 14b
-30-
15.
LAPPED SPLICES FOR REINFORCING FABRIC IN TENSION
A lapped splice for reinforcing fabric in tension shall be made so that the two outermost transverse bars of one sheet of fabric overlap the two outermost transverse bars of the sheet being lapped as shown in Figure 15a.
a)
b)
< 1
FIGURE 15a - LAPPED SPLICES FOR REINFORCING FABRIC
16.
DETAILING LARGE AREAS OF REINFORCEMENT
When detailing large areas of reinforcement and it is impractical to show the plan and/or elevation in full (eg continuous decks), there are several options which can be considered:-
a) The drawing may be drawn not to scale. This is done in order to present a pictorial view of the reinforcement. Although the drawing is not to scale, thought should be given to keeping the drawing in reasonable proportion to actual dimensions.
b) The drawing may be drawn to scale but with break lines. These should be kept to a minimum (say, two or three). Where a drawing necessitates more break lines, consideration should be given as outlined in Option c.
c) The use of match lines. Larger areas are drawn in full but are split into more than one part.
-31-
17.
CONCRETE DETAILING
In more complex reinforced concrete elements such as abutments, it is preferable to show concrete dimensions on a separate view to that showing the reinforcement detail. On simple details the concrete dimensions and reinforcement details can be shown on the same view.
18. ARRANGEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT
The clear arrangement of reinforcement in a view or section is important. A little thought in detailing the reinforcement will ensure a clear picture of the layout of the bars. Reinforcement shall be numbered from the bottom up in sequential order of placement ie the first bar placed, irrespective of shape, shall be P1 with the next bar placed being P2 etc. Figure 17a shows an example of a badly detailed section. Figure 17b shows the same section redetailed in a more orderly fashion.
-32-
A18 A20 A21 VARIABLE LAP 350 min CONSTRUCTION JOINT A17
A19 A16 A12 A12 A15 A14
A13
NOT ACCEPTABLE
FIGURE 17a
A20 A21 A17 CJ A18
A19
A16 A15
A14 A12 A13
ACCEPTABLE
FIGURE 17b
-3319 SIZE AND GRADE OF REINFORCING BAR
19.1
Reinforcing Bar
Reinforcing bars are available as either deformed ribbed (D), deformed Indented (I) or plain round bars (R) to AS/NZS 4671. The standard bar sizes are: Deformed bars:- 10, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36 and 40mm diameter Plain round bars:- 6, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32 and 36 mm diameter
Small diameter bars, both deformed ribbed and plain round, may be hard drawn into bars of smaller diameter for use in the manufacture of reinforcing mesh. Such bars are commonly referred to as hard drawn wire.
19.2
Stocking of Reinforcing Bars
The lengths of Grade D500N deformed reinforcement bars normally stocked by suppliers in Australia are shown in the table below. Grade R250N plain reinforcing bars are available in 6 metre lengths only. BAR SIZE (mm) Grade D500N 10 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 6 9 LENGTH (m) 10 12 15 18
-34-
20
CLEAR SPACING AT LAPS
Where laps in reinforcement are staggered, the clear spacing used in calculations for required lap lengths shall be "S" as shown in Figure 20a.
"S" = Clear Spacing CJ
FIGURE 20a
Where laps in reinforcement are not staggered, the clear spacing used in calculations for required lap lengths shall be "S" as shown in Figure 20b.
"S" = Clear Spacing CJ
FIGURE 20b
-35-
21
ACTUAL COVER TO LAPPED REINFORCEMENT
The figues given in Table 1 on Page 37 are based on the minimum cover to the bar or fitment. For calculation purposes, the actual cover to the bar being lapped, as shown in Figure 20a, shall be used.
65 NOMINAL COVER
ACTUAL COVER TO LAPPED BAR

THE MINIMUM COVER EQUALS THE NOMINAL COVER MINUS A FIXING TOLERANCE OF -5mm
FIGURE 21.a
-36-
22
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH FOR A BAR IN TENSION
The development length (L sy.t ), to develop the yield strength (f ) of a sy deformed bar in tension shall be calculated as follows:
L k F sy.t = k 7 8 sy A b (2a + d ) b f c
Where
k = 1.25 for a horizontal bar with more than 300mm of concrete 7 cast below the bar
= 1.0 for all other bars
k = 1.7 for bars in slabs and walls if the clear distance 8 between adjacent parallel bars developing stress is not less than 150mm
= 2.2 for longitudinal bars in beams and columns with fitments
= 2.4 for any other longitudinal bar
A = cross-sectional area of the reinforcing bar
2a = twice the minimum cover to the deformed bar or the clear distance between adjacent parallel bars developing stress, whichever is less. Minimum cover is nominal cover minus a fixing tolerance of 5mm. L d sy.t shall not be less than 25k 7 b
23
LAPPED SPLICE LENGTH FOR A BAR IN COMPRESSION
The minimum length of a lapped splice for deformed bars in compression (L sy.c) shall be calculated as follows:
L sy sy.c = (0.125f -22)dbfor f sygreater than 400MPa but L sy.c shall not be less than 300mm
-37-
TABLE 1 TENSILE DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS (L sy.t ) FOR DEFORMED BARS - GRADE 500N - GENERAL BARS
Combination of Minimum Values
L (mm) Bar Size 10 12

300
Fc MPa
40 50 40 50 32 40 50 25 32 40 50 40 50
Nominal cover to nearest bar or fitment (mm) 55 50, 70 45 45 45 40 35 35 30, 35 25, 30 25 25 25 300 400 650 250 300 550 250 300 400 250 400
16
20
500
24
600
28
750
32
950
36
1150
40
1400
250
300
400
500
650
850
1100
1300
1600
550
750
950
1200
1500
1750
800
950
1250
1600
NR
NR
900
1200
1500
NR
NR
NR
NR Denotes not recommended Values above the double line are governed by sy.t L is greater than or equal to 25d b
Intermediate values of L sy.t shall not be interpolated
The development length L sy.t given in Tables 1 and 2 shall be deemed to comply with Clause 13.1.2.1 of AS 5100.5 provided that the following conditions are met:
(i)
In slabs and walls, the clear distance between adjacent parallel bars developing stress shall not be less than 150 mm.
(ii)
For beams and columns, fitments are provided and the clear distance between bars shall not be less than twice the nominal cover.
(iii)
The minimum bar size for fitments shall be 6 mm for bars and 10 mm for bars 20 mm.
20 mm
(iv)
Allowances, such as for casting against ground, shall not be included in the nominal cover for the purpose of determination of development lengths.
-38-
TABLE 2 TENSILE DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS (Lsy.t ) FOR DEFORMED BARS - GRADE 500N - TOP BARS
Combination of Minimum Values
L (mm) Bar Size 10 12

400
Fc MPa
40 50 40 50 32 40 50 25 32 40 50 40 50
Nominal cover to nearest bar or fitment (mm) 55 50, 70 45 45 45 40 35 35 30, 35 25, 30 25 25 25 400 500 850 350 400 650 350 400 500 350 500
16
20
650
24
750
28
950
32
1150
36
1450
40
1750
350
400
500
650
800
1050
1350
1650
2000
700
900
1200
1500
1850
2200
950
1200
600
2000
NR
NR
1200
1550
1950
NR
NR
NR
NR Denotes not recommended Values above the double line are governed by L 1.25 x 25 d
Intermediate values of L sy.t shall not be interpolated
Where a bar ends with a standard hook or cog complying with Clause 13.1.2.6 of AS5100.5, the development length at that end of the bar measured from the outside of the hook or cog shall be taken as 0.5 L sy.t .
TABLE 3 DEVELOPMENT AND LAP LENGTHS FOR GRADE D500N BARS IN COMPRESSION
L (mm) BAR SIZE 12 DEVELOPMENT LENGTH (20db ) LAP LENGTH 240 500 16 320 650 20 400 850 24 480 1000 28 560 1150 32 640 1300 36 720 1500 40 800 1650
-39-
TABLE 4 BAR MASSES

BAR SIZE (mm) MASS (kg/m) 10 0.617 12 0.888 16 1.58 20 2.47 24 3.55 28 4.83 32 6.31 36 7.99 40 9.86
SECTION 24
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
Prestressed Concrete
24
24.1 GENERAL
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
In general, drawing practice for the detailing of prestressed concrete items shall be in accordance with the principles outlined in this Manual. In addition to general details, further information relevant to prestressed concrete shall be shown on the drawings and this will include specifying tendon requirements as well as the detailing of appropriate anchorages. See RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB029 for typical 'GENERAL NOTES' for prestressed concrete.
24.2
24.2.1
PRE-TENSIONED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

PSC Planks In simple cases, such as in PSC plank deck designs, no additional detailing of tendons etc. is required, as RTA Standard Bridge Drawings No RTAB060 to RTAB072 inclusive are sufficiently detailed for standard applications. Where RTA Standard Bridge Drawings are used for "non-standard" applications, any modifications to the drawings, such as the inclusion of cast-in items must be carefully considered with respect to strand and/or void locations. If the "Standard Drawing" is altered or added to in any way, except for title block information, the text adjacent to the title block shall be amended to read "MODIFIED RTA DRAWING No. ....". This would include variations for skew angles and reduced span lengths. If the "Standard Drawing" is used on the basis of a one-off design where the span exceeds the standard span and/or the prestress is altered in any way, the drawing is not considered to be an RTA "Standard Drawing" and must be signed by the designer, drafter and the checkers of the design and drafting.
24.2.2
Precast Prestressed Concrete Girders As Precast Prestressed Concrete Girders are individually designed for span requirements, no "STANDARD" drawing for a particular span exists. Standard cross Sections of Precast Prestressed Concrete I-Girders shall conform to details as shown in AS5100 Bridge Design, Section 5 - Appendix H. The method of detailing Precast Prestressed Concrete I-Girders shall be as shown in Figures 24.2.2(a) and 24.2.2(b). RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Number RTAB033 details the adopted standard cross Sections for SUPER-T Girders. The details which are shown on Drawing Number RTAB033 shall be adhered to. Typical details (such as strand and reinforcement layout) for Super-T Girders shall be in accordance with details shown in RTA Standard Bridge Drawings RTAB033A to RTAB033F inclusive.
OTB005
Page 1 of 3
When detailing Precast, Prestressed Concrete items with deflected strands, the following shall be checked thoroughly:That the deflection point of strands is correctly dimensioned. That deflected strands are not fouled by elements cast into the member i.e. ducts for transverse reinforcement, ferrules, anchor bolts for bearings etc.
It should be noted that it is considered to be good practice, where possible, for the designer not to specify one single point where the strands may be deflected but a length range where the deflection is possible. Various prestressed concrete girder manufacturers have different casting beds and providing a range whare the strands may be deflected reduces the need to request variations to the approved design.
24.3
24.3.1
POST-TENSIONED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

General Several post-tensioning systems are currently being used in bridge applications. Bridges are generally detailed for a typical "size" strand prestressing system and any variation to the details as shown shall be covered by an appropriate "PRESTRESSING SYSTEM" note. See RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB029 for typical 'GENERAL NOTES' for prestressed concrete. When detailing post-tensioned prestressed concrete, particular attention must be given to:The physical dimensions of anchorages; The spacing between anchorages; Sufficient space allowed for use of tendon jacks; Arrangement of end block/diaphragm reinforcement with respect to anchorages and tendons to facilitate the placement and vibration of concrete/ (large scale details are appropriate in most cases).
Sample reinforcement drawings, in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 of this Manual are provided as Figures 24.3.1(c) 24.3.1(f) inclusive. 24.3.2 Tendon Profiles Tendon profiles shall be sufficiently detailed to enable correct stressing duct placement and careful attention must be given to minimum bend radii recommendations from posttensioning manufacturers i.e. SHARP BENDS SHALL BE AVOIDED. Comprehensive detailing in both Plan and Elevation/Section shall be provided to ensure correct placement can be achieved and that required clearances for anchorages are maintained. See Figures 24.3.1(a) and 24.3.1(b) for the required level of detailing.
24.3.3
OTB005
Ducts
Ducting detailed on drawings shall be in accordance with stressing system manufacturer's recommendations for the system used. Where misalignment of ducting is possible during construction, appropriate oversize ducts shall be specified on the drawings. Duct supports, whilst not usually detailed, shall be closely examined with regard to placement of non-stressed reinforcement to ensure correct placement is achieved.
OTB005
Page 3 of 3
1 -
2 -
ABUTMENT A END
27 000
ABUTMENT B END
500 6/40 HOLES (GIRDER TYPE A) OR 80 340 6/CAST-IN FERRULES (GIRDER TYPE B)
TOP SURFACE SHALL BE ROUGHENED DURING MANUFACTURE TO EXPOSE THE COARSE AGGREGATE TO AN AVERAGE DEPTH OF 3mm EXCEPT A 50mm EDGE STRIP SHALL BE FINISHED WITH A STEEL FLOAT TO PROVIDE SEATING FOR PERMANENT FORMWORK PANELS - SEE VIEW
1
500
340
80
IF HOLES FOR THE SUPPORT OF DECK AND PARAPET FORMWORK ARE REQUIRED THEY SHALL HAVE 30mm COVER TO REINFORCEMENT AND STRANDS. UPON REMOVAL OF FORMWORK, HOLES SHALL BE FILLED WITH DRY PACK MORTAR. THE SIZE AND LOCATION OF THESE HOLES SHALL BE 1 2 B 3 5 SUBMITTED TO THE PRINICPALS REPRESENTATIVE FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO GIRDER MANUFACTURE THE AREA SHOWN STIPPLED (BOTH ENDS) SHALL BE ROUGHENED TO EXPOSE THE COARSE AGGREGATE, TO AN AVERAGE DEPTH OF 3mm ON THE FACES WHERE EITHER 40 HOLES OR CAST-IN FERRULES ARE SHOWN. THE OUTER FACES OF GIRDERS TYPE B SHALL NOT BE ROUGHENED. THE METHOD OF B -
ELEVATION
GIRDER TYPE A - 6 REQUIRED GIRDER TYPE B - 2 REQUIRED
0 500 1000 1500mm
ROUGHENING SHALL BE PROVIDED TO THE SUPERINTENDENT B A A A INNER GIRDERS A OUTER GIRDERS
40 x 72 LONG STEEL BAR, 95 GRADE 250 TO AS 3679
16 x 190 LONG STEEL BAR, GRADE 250 TO AS 3679
500
250
95
A 50 72 3 M24 TAPPED HOLE A B
ABUTMENT A VIEW
0
ABUTMENT B GIRDER LAYOUT

BDENOTES GIRDER TYPE NOT TO SCALE
DETAIL
0 100
A 200 300mm
3 100 200 300mm
END
END
100
50
100
50
GENERAL NOTES
SCALES AS SHOWN. CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B1 SCHROEDER P21 140 320 CAST-IN SOCKETS MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE SHALL BE 50MPa. MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE AT TRANSFER OF PRESTRESS SHALL BE 35MPa.
FERRULE ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE HOT-DIP GALVANIZED TO AS 1214. AN ALTERNATIVE TO THAT SHOWN MAY BE USED, SUBJECT TO APPROVAL BY THE PRINCIPALS REPRESENTATIVE. 24 ASSEMBLIES REQUIRED
450 EXTENT OF ROUGHENED SURFACE FOR DECK 50 50

100 50
DETAIL
0 100
B 200 300mm
EDGES OF SOFFIT AND ENDS ONLY SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20mm. CONCRETE SHALL NOT BE DRILLED OR OTHERWISE DISTURBED ONCE INITIAL SET HAS OCCURRED. 3 MASS OF EACH GIRDER IS APPROXIMATELY 22t(BASED ON DENSITY 2600kg/m ) DURING STORAGE, TRANSPORT AND HANDLING, GIRDERS SHALL BE IN AN UPRIGHT POSITION AND SUPPORTED NOT MORE THAN 500mm FROM EACH END. GIRDERS SHALL ONLY BE LIFTED USING LIFTING DEVICES WHICH ARE ACCEPTABLE
STEEL FLOAT FINISH - TYP
TO RELEVANT NSW REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. THE DIMENSIONS OF THE GIRDERS CONFORM TO AS 5100.5 TYPE 3 STANDARD PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE BEAM SECTIONS.VARIATIONS IN 300 300 SECTION WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. WELDING SYMBOLS CONFORM TO AS 1101 PART 3.
150
130
1150 545
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH
40 HOLES CAST-IN FERRULES c OF GIRDERS 320 320

30 HOLE
FIGURE 24.2.2(a)
GIRDERS - CONCRETE
20 x 20 CHAMFER 150 500 ON THESE EDGES OF SOFFIT ONLY 77 77
SCHROEDER P21 ELECTROPLATED STEEL CAST-IN SOCKETS: M16 x 100 LONG WITH 12 x 100 LONG DOWELS OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT. 64 REQUIRED PREPARED
CHECKED
VIEW
1 -
SECTION
2 -
SECTION
2 -
DESIGN DRAWING RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS:

500mm
100
200
300
400
500mm
GIRDER TYPE B
0 100 200 300 400 500mm 100 50
GIRDER TYPE A
0 100 200 300 400
100 50 100 50
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
KP2F2422A.dgn
255
175
275
150
275
255
STRAND DEFLECTION POINT 57 BUNDLES OF 1 29 BUNDLES OF 3 BUNDLES OF 1-12-Z-1G, 2-12-L-1G AND 1-12-Z-2G-115 CLOSED END OF BAR 290 100 1-12-Z-1G AND 1-12-Z-2G-200 6-16-S-4G 150 2-12-L-1G-100 18 BUNDLES OF 1-12-Z-1G, 1-12-Z-2G AND 2-12-L-1G-200 13 BUNDLES OF 1-12-Z-1G, 1-12-Z-2G AND 2-12-L-1G-300 230 2 -
MIDPOINT OF GIRDER 2 500 MAX 2 000 MIN
150
6-12-U-1G-130 225 40
18/12.7 LOW RELAXATION SUPER GRADE STRANDS (NON DEFLECTED) 1 -
14/12.7 LOW RELAXATION SUPER GRADE STRANDS (DEFLECTED)
2-28-S-1G, 4-24-S-2G AND 2 OF GIRDER
HALF ELEVATION
INNER CONTOURS OF GIRDER NOT SHOWN
0 500 1000 1500mm
4-20-S-3G SPACED AS SHOWN IN LAYOUT OF S BARS
500
250
= TO BE BENT 45 = 16-S-4G 16-S-4G ON SITE TO BE BENT ON SITE 500 20-S-3G 28-S-1G 24-S-2G
S BARS LAYOUT PRESTRESSING NOTES

STRANDS SHALL BE 7 WIRE, ORDINARY, DIAMETER 12.7mm, TENSILE STRENGTH 1870 MPa, RELAX 2, TO AS/NZS 4672.1 WITH MINIMUM BREAKING FORCE OF 184 kN.
125
125
115
DEFLECTED STRANDS
12-Z-2G
12-Z-2G
THE FORCE REMAINING IN EACH 12.7mm DIAMETER STRAND AT MIDPOINT OF THE GIRDER IMMEDIATELY AFTER RELEASE OF THE TENSIONING JACK SHALL BE 138KN. AFTER TRANSFER OF PRESTRESS, STRANDS SHALL BE CUT FLUSH WITH THE
125
125
12-U-1G
12-L-1G 12-L-1G
ENDS OF GIRDER AND EXPOSED STRANDS SEALED AGAINST CORROSION BY THE APPLICATION OF AN APPROVED EPOXY RESIN. CALCULATED HOG OF GIRDER AT 28 DAYS IS 33mm ASSUMING: -DENSITY=2600kg/m 3 -ELASTIC MODULUS AT TRANSFER=33 700 MPa.
210
125
24-S-2G 70 45 28-S-1G
24-S-2G 28-S-1G
45
-STEAM CURING AT 70 C FOR 8 HOURS AFTER CASTING. -STORAGE IN OPEN AIR, AFTER STEAM CURING, AT 20 C AVERAGE TEMPERATURE AND RELATIVE HUMIDITY IN THE RANGE OF 50%-75%.
100
100
20-S-3G 110
200
150
150
12-Z-1G
12-Z-1G
-NO LOADS EXCEPT GIRDER SELF WEIGHT. -GIRDER SUPPORTED AT 500mm FROM EACH END. HOG OF GIRDER WILL INCREASE TO APPROX 35mm 90 DAYS AFTER TRANSFER
55
= = 55 =
131 =
= = 55
55
= = = 55
= =
= 24-S-2G 24-S-2G IF GIRDER REMAINS UNLOADED. THE CALCULATED DEFLECTION DUE TO THE MASS OF DECK CONCRETE IS....mm. 55
107 = 45
80
126
80
107
83
80
174
80
83
SECTION
1 -
SECTION
2 GENERAL NOTES
SCALES AS SHOWN. NOMINAL COVER TO REINFORCEMENT NEAREST TO THE CONCRETE
500mm
AT ENDS OF GIRDER
AT DEFLECTION POINTS
STRANDS NOT SHOWN
STRANDS NOT SHOWN

0 500mm 100 200 300 400
STRAND PATTERN CROSS SECTIONS

REINFORCEMENT NOT SHOWN
0 100 200 300 400 500mm
GIRDER TYPE B SHOWN GIRDER TYPE A SIMILIAR

0 100 200 300 400 100 50
SURFACE SHALL BE 30mm IF NO DIMENSION SHOWN.
100 50
100 50
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH
BAR SHAPES DIAGRAM S

A

Z
A A
U
B
FIGURE 24.2.2(b)
GIRDERS - REINFORCEMENT
250
C = BEND DIA
250
PARRAMATTA NSW 2150
PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
CHECKED
C A
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
KP2F2422B.dgn
72 950
c PIER L
34 475 END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE ABUTMENT A
38 475
2 3.262%
STRESSING FACE
1 A 2
STRESSING FACE
B 2
Y2
Y3
Y1
Y3
2 820 4 SPACES AT 1000 = 4000 11 SPACES AT 2000 = 22 000 13 SPACES AT 1000 = 13000 13 SPACES AT 2000 = 26 000 820 4 SPACES AT 1000 = 4000
X 1155 - X
1 -
1155 - X
1240
1240
1075
1205
1205
VERTICAL
OFFSET
Y2 AND Y3
1075
945
785
895
1010
990
435
465
485
400
450
525
525
525
525
365
Y1
SEE TABLE I FOR DIMENSION X DIMENSIONS Y1, Y2 AND Y3 ARE THE L VERTICAL HEIGHTS TOc OF DUCT AS SHOWN DENOTES DIMENSIONS FOR DUCT PROFILES 1 AND 3 ONLY DENOTES DIMENSIONS FOR DUCT PROFILES 5 AND 7 ONLY THE BRIDGE SUPERSTRUCTURE HAS BEEN DETAILED FOR A TYPICAL 12.7mm NOT TO SCALE STRAND PRESTRESSING SYSTEM. FULL DETAILS OF THE PROPOSED 4 2 4 2 PRESTRESSING SYSTEM INCLUDING ANY REQUIRED MODIFICATIONS TO THE DESIGN (SEE SPECIFICATION), SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR CONSIDERATION AT THE TIME OF TENDER. 100 ANCHORAGE 16 REQUIRED 1 3 5 7 1 1075 2 2 4 6 8 3 4 6 5 8 Y3 7 1375 1550 1375 100 275 TENDON No (TYP) 1375 1375 1375 100
PRESTRESSING SYSTEM
MULTISTRAND SYSTEM
PRESTRESSING DATA
965 VOIDS EACH TENDON SHALL BE COMPRISED OF 37/7 WIRE, ORDINARY, DIAMETER 12.7mm, TENSILE STRENGTH 1870 MPa, RELAX 2, TO AS/NZS 4672.1 WITH MINIMUM BREAKING FORCE OF 6810 kN PER TENDON. THE JACKING FORCE FOR EACH TENDON SHALL BE 5108kN (75% OF MINIMUM
525
BREAKING LOAD). THE TENDONS SHALL BE STRESSED FROM BOTH ENDS AND THE ORDER OF STRESSING SHALL BE 3,5,2,8,4,6,1,7.
275
1375
1200
1375
275
100
1375
1375
1375
275
115mm ID STEEL DUCT FOR TENDON
THE JACKING FORCE HAS BEEN CALCULATED ASSUMING THE FOLLOWING DESIGN PARAMETERS MODULUS OF ELASTICITY OF TENDONS Es = 193 000MPa
VIEW
1 -
SECTION
2 -
DRAW-IN AT LOCK OFF = 6mm ANCHORAGE FRICTION = 0 COEFFICIENT OF FRICTION BETWEEN TENDON AND DUCT = 0.20
3000mm
1000
2000
3000mm
1000
2000
UNINTENTIONAL ANGULAR DEVIATION OF TENDON PROFILE = 0.008

1000 500 1000 500
525
520
520
520
520
500
515
515
515
DUCT PROFILE
1075
1075
945
1020
1260
1270
1270
1270
1270
1270
1270
1260
1000
640
740
460
430
865
535
575
685
955
795
395
325
365
1140
1015
1150
535
660
550
350
330
315
785
800
730
680
590
530
860
515
515
610
910
Y1
Y2
DUCTS AND GROUTING

TENDON DUCTS SHALL BE SEMI-RIGID STEEL SHEATHING 115mm INSIDE DIAMETER (SEE RTA SPECIFICATION No B113 FOR DETAILED REQUIREMENTS AND PLACING TOLERANCES).
GENERAL NOTES
SCALES AS SHOWN MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE SHALL BE 40MPa MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH AT THE TIME OF STRESSING SHALL BE 35MPa CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION:B1.
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH
TABLE I
TENDON No DIMENSION X ABUTMENT A 505 ABUTMENT B 390
THE METHOD OF FIXING DUCTS AND THE METHOD OF JOINTING AND SEALING OF DUCTS AT CONSTRUCTION JOINTS SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFICATION. THE TENDON DUCT SHALL BE PLACED TO A SMOOTH PROFILE PASSING THROUGH THE SPECIFIED POINTS SHOWN ON DUCT PROFILE.
1,3
GROUT POINTS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT ALL ANCHORAGES. AIR BLEEDER TUBES SHALL BE PROVIDED AT ALL CROWN POINTS AND SAG POINTS OF EACH DUCT
2,4
390
505 (SEE SPECIFICATION FOR DETAILED GROUTING REQUIREMENTS).
5,7
390
505
FRICTION LOSSES AND TENDON ELONGATION

6,8 505 390 THE CALCULATED MAXIMUM FRICTION LOSS FOR TENDONS IS 10%. EXPECTED TOTAL AVERAGE ELONGATION PER TENDON IS 480mm. IF THE CALCULATED ELONGATION IS OBTAINED AT A JACKING FORCE LESS THAN 5108kN, THE STRESSING SHALL CONTINUE TO 5108kN AT EACH END BEFORE LOCKING OFF TENDON. JACKING FORCE PER TENDON MAY BE TAKEN TO A MAXIMUM OF 5789kN (85% OF MINIMUM BREAKING LOAD) IN ORDER TO OVERCOME FRICTION LOSSES HIGHER THAN THE CALCULATED VALUES.
CHECKED
RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: SHEET No
FIGURE 24.3.1 (a)

ISSUE
STRESSING END CAP STRESSING END CAP ANCHORAGES 40 ANCHORAGES 90 100
X X
TABLE II
1075 L TENDON No ABUTMENT A 1 520 ABUTMENT B 430
1075
800
525
525
800
2 40 3 25 115mm I.D. STEEL DUCTS FOR 37/12.7mm DIA 115mm I.D. STEEL DUCTS FOR 37/12.7mm DIA STRAND TENDONS (TYP) 5 4
400
490
520
430
400
490
DETAIL
A 1
STRAND TENDONS (TYP)
405
545
DETAIL
FOR DIMENSION X SEE SHEET No 1
0 200 400 600 800 1000mm
B 1
515
375
405
545
FOR DIMENSION X SEE SHEET No 1

200 100 0 200 400 600 800 1000mm
515
375
200 100
DIMENSION L IS THE HORIZONTAL DISTANCE MEASURED PARALLEL TO CENTRE LINE OF THE BRIDGE FROM THE END OF THE SUPERSTRUCTURE TO CENTRE OF THE ANCHOR STRESSING FACE.
TENDON No 1
TENDON No 2
TENDON No 3
TENDON No 4
(40)
25
15 TYP
GENERAL NOTES
SCALES AS SHOWN END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE DENOTES DIMENSION FOR TENDONS 1 AND 7 DENOTES DIMENSION FOR TENDONS 3 AND 5
(90 OR 100)
40
185 165
350
175
350 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH
BLOCKOUT - TYP L
175 1375
VIEW
4 16
FOR VALUE OF L SEE TABLE II END CAP AND BLOCKOUTS SHALL BE POURED AFTER STESSING AND GROUTING OF TENDONS DENOTES DIMENSIONS BEFORE PRESTRESSING ABUTMENT A END SHOWN ABUTMENT B END SIMILIAR FIGURES SHOWN IN BRACKETS REFER TO ABUTMENT B
0 100 200 300 400 500mm
CHECKED
FIGURE 24.3.1 (b)
100 50
SHEET No
ISSUE
2 SETS OF 14 BUNDLES TYPE E-150 AND 2 SETS OF 7 BUNDLES TYPE F-300
2 SETS OF 24 BUNDLES TYPE C-150 AND 2 SETS OF 12 BUNDLES TYPE D-300
27-16-S-1D FF SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION

2 2
2-16-V-2D FF LAPPED WITH 16-S-1D AND 16-VV-7D
27-16-S-7D FF SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION

2 2
195 BUNDLES TYPE A-150 AND 98 BUNDLES TYPE B-300
168 BUNDLES TYPE A-150 AND 84 BUNDLES TYPE B-300 3 4 905
2-16-V-5D FF LAPPED WITH 16-S-7D AND 16-VV-7D 905 2 2
13-12-S-9D SPACED AS SHOWN IN DETAIL

A 2
ER PI
c L
2820 150 150 150 120
2800
75-16-S-8D SPACED AS 75-16-S-2D SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION

2 2
SHOWN IN SECTION
2 2
1 -
1 -
21-16-V-3D FF LAPPED WITH 16-S-1D AND 16-VV-7D 2-16-V-4D FF LAPPED WITH 16-S-1D AND 16-VV-7D 25-16-VV-7D LAPPED WITH 16-V-2D, 16-V-3D, 16-V-4D, 16-V-5D, 16-V-6D AND 16-V-7D 3 4
2-16-V-7D FF LAPPED WITH 16-S-7D AND 16-VV-7D 21-16-V-6D FF LAPPED WITH 16-S-7D AND 16-VV-7D 77-20-S-6D LAPPED WITH 16-S-1D, 16-S-2D, 16-S-7D AND 16-S-8D. LENGTH OF BAR SHALL BE 12 000mm AND PLACED SYMMETRICALLY ABOUT OF PIER 2 2 13-12-S-9D SPACED AS SHOWN IN DETAIL
A 2
PLAN
16-V-10D, 16-V-11D, 16-D-1D AND 16-D-2D NOT SHOWN
0 1 2 3 4 5m
GENERAL NOTES
SCALES AS SHOWN. NOMINAL COVER TO REINFORCEMENT NEAREST TO THE CONCRETE SURFACE SHALL BE 40mm UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS, LAPS ON ADJACENT BARS ON ANY FACE SHALL BE STAGGERED (OFFSET) BY NO LESS THAN THE LAP LENGTH. 16-V-11D UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, THE MINIMUM DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS AND LENGTHS OF LAPS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:
0 50
BUNDLE TYPE A CONSISTS OF:
1-16-VV-1D FF, 2-16-S-3D FF, 1-20-V-1D NF, 2-16-K-1D AND 2-16-AZ-1D
1 0.5
PI
16-D-1D BUNDLE TYPE B CONSISTS OF: 2-16-HT-1D, 2-16-HT-2D AND 4-12-Q-1D BUNDLE TYPE C CONSISTS OF: 1-16-VV-2D FF, 2-16-S-3D FF, 1-20-V-1D NF, 2-16-V-9D, 2-16-K-1D AND 2-16-AZ-1D
ER
c L
BAR SIZE: a)HORIZONTAL BARS WITH >300mm OF CONCRETE CAST BELOW THE BAR:
N12
N16
N20
N24
N28
N32
N36
... ...
... ...
... ...
... ...
... ...
... ...
... ...
BUNDLE TYPE D CONSISTS OF: 2-16-HT-1D, 2-16-HT-3D AND 4-12-Q-1D b) OTHER BARS:
0 50
BUNDLE TYPE E CONSISTS OF:
1-20-VV-3D FF, 2-16-S-3D FF, 1-24-V-12D NF, 2-16-V-9D, 2-16-K-1D AND 2-16-AZ-1D
DENOTES VARIABLE LENGTH BAR. REINFORCEMENT MAY BE DISPLACED SLIGHTLY WHERE NECESSARY TO CLEAR
BUNDLE TYPE F CONSISTS OF:
2-16-HT-2D, 2-16-HT-4D AND 4-12-Q-1D 16-V-10D PLAN 16-D-2D
STEEL DOWELS, ANCHOR BOLTS, DRAINAGE PIPES, FORMED HOLES AND RECESSES.
* * * * 16-V-10D , 16-V-11D , 16-D-1D AND 16-D-2D LAYOUT DETAIL

NOT TO SCALE 16-S-8D
800 MIN (TYP) LAP
16-S-2D 20-S-6D ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH
FIGURE 24.3.1 (c)

500 500 TYP TYP
DECK REINFORCEMENT - SHEET A

PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING
500
16-S-1D
16-V-2D, 16-V-3D OR 16-V-4D 2-16-V-10D NF AND 2-16-D-1D FF SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION

3 2
TYP
16-VV-7D
16-V-5D, 16-V-6D OR 16-V-7D 2-16-V-11D FF AND 2-16-D-2D NF SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION

3 2
110 GEORGE STREET
16-S-7D
SECTION
1 -
PREPARED DESIGN
CHECKED
AND ARRANGED AS SHOWN IN LAYOUT DETAIL
AND ARRANGED AS SHOWN IN LAYOUT DETAIL
TRANSVERSE BARS NOT SHOWN DRAWING

0 1000 2000 3000mm
1000
500
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
KP2F2431C.dgn
16-S-2D OR 16-S-8D
10 EQUAL SPACES 16-HT-2D 20-V-1D 16-HT-2D
10 EQUAL SPACES
A -
16-HT-1D
16-HT-1D
16-AZ-1D
400 400
LS PA
CE
Q 6E UA
16-S-3D
20-V-1D 12-S-9D 16-S-3D 16-K-1D

300
75
6E Q
8 EQUAL SPACES
8 EQUAL SPACES
12-Q-1D (TIED TO 16-HT-1D AND 16-HT-2D) 16-S-1D OR 16-S-7D 16-S-2D, 20-S-6D OR 16-S-8D
20-V-1D OR 24-V-12D
C PA LS ES
2 EQ 6 EQUAL SPACES 2 EQ SPACES 16-VV-1D 6 EQUAL SPACES 2 EQ SPACES 6 EQUAL SPACES 2 EQ SPACES SPACES
UA
75
300
16-S-3D BENT ON SITE
500
SECTION
2 1
DETAIL
A -
100
200
300
400
500mm
100 50
20-S-6D A 16-HT-2D 16-HT-2D
GENERAL NOTES
16-S-3D 16-S-3D 12-Q-1D (TIED TO 16-HT-2D, 16-HT-D3 AND 16-HT-4D) 16-V-9D 16-D-1D OR 16-V-11D 16-V-9D SCALE
500 250 0 500 1000 1500mm
OR AS SHOWN.
120 0 (T Y
P)
16-D-2D OR 16-V-10D
16-V-2D OR 16-V-5D
AL QU 3E S CE SPA
3E QU AL SPA CE S
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH
300 2 EQ SPACES 16-VV-2D OR 20-VV-D3 16-V-3D OR 16-V-6D (TYP) 2 EQ SPACES
16-V-4D OR 16-V-7D 16-HT-3D OR 16-HT-4D
FIGURE 24.3.1 (d)

DECK REINFORCEMENT - SHEET B
SECTION
3 1
CHECKED
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
KP2F2431D.dgn
16-S-13D
20-V-1D
16-HT-5D AND 16-HT-6D 16-S-13D 16-AZ-1D 20-V-1D 16-K-1D 12-S-9D (TYP) 675 (TYP) 16-HT-6D (TYP) 16-E-2D 16-AZ-1D 12-V-14D 16-HT-5D
920 (TYP) 16-K-1D 12-S-9D 16-S-16D 12-S-17D 20-VV-6D
16-S-3D 500 SQ 16-P-1D 1050 16-P-1D BUNDLE TYPE G CONSISTS OF: 16-S-3D 1-20-VV FF, 2-16-S-3D FF, 1-20-V-1D, 2-16-K-1D AND 2-16-AZ-1D BUNDLE TYPE H CONSISTS OF: 250 16-HT-5D 20-VV-5D BUNDLE TYPE J CONSISTS OF: 16-S-12D 6-16-S-16D -200FF 16-S-13D 16-S-12D 10-20-S-15D FF, 2-16-L-1D, 2-16-S-3D FF, 5-12-S-17D,1-12-V-14D NF, 2-16-K-1D AND 2-16-AZ-1D
1100 (TYP)
(TYP)
20-S-15D 16-S-13D
20-VV-5D
1-20-S-15D FF, 2-16-L-1D, 2-16-S-3D FF, 1-20-V-1D NF, 2-16-K-1D AND 2-16-AZ-1D
SECTION
6 -
16-HT-5D
20-V-1D 16-E-2D
SECTION
6 SETS OF 3-20-BZ-1D SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION
7 -
4 16-S-13D
16-S-13D 12-V-14D 150 100=400 20-VV-6D 20-BZ-1D 4 AT
16-S-16D 1200 20-S-15D 20-VV-5D
3 SETS OF 6-20-VV-6D SPACED AS 16-AZ-1D SHOWN IN SECTION

7 -
12-V-14D 6-20-V-13D SPACED AS 20-VV-6D 20-V-1D SHOWN IN SECTION

7
12-V-14D 16-AZ-1D 6 AT 100 16-S-13D 125
20-BZ-1D
16-S-3D 16-K-1D 12-S-9D
16-K-1D
16-S-3D
12-S-9D
16-N-1D 16-E-1D
16-N-2D 5 AT 200 16-E-1D =1000
=600
SECTION
DISPLACE BAR INWARDS TO CLEAR EXPANSION JOINT ANCHOR BOLT
7 20-V-1D
EQUAL SPACES
12-V-15D-100NF 250
16-S-12D
16-S-13D 20-V-13D 12-V-14D
250
300 (TYP)
250
16-L-1D 20-S-15D
(TYP)
5-12-S-17D-220NF 20-VL-1D
16-S-14D
16-S-13D
16-S-14D
16-L-1D
16-S-3D 12-V-14D 16-S-18D
VIEW
5-16-S-18D-200FF
5 -
5-16-S-18D-200FF
2 SETS OF 3-20-VL-1D SPACED AS 20-BZ-1D IN SECTION

7 -
20-VL-1D 16-N-2D
2 SETS OF 13-16-HT-5D-100 2 SETS OF 13-16-P-1D-100 3 SETS OF 6 BUNDLES OF 4-16-E-2D-100 16-S-16D 7 6 4 SETS OF 1 BUNDLE OF 4-16-E-2D SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION
7 -
72-16-S-13D LAPPED WITH LONGITUDINAL DECK REINFORCEMENT SEE SHEET No 1 16-S-14D 20-S-15D
SECTION GENERAL NOTES

0 500
8 1000 1500mm
SCALE
500 250
OR AS SHOWN.
15-16-S-12D LAPPED WITH LONGITUDINAL DECK REINFORCEMENT SEE SHEET No 1 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH

15-16-S-12D LAPPED WITH LONGITUDINAL DECK
P)
8 -
(T
9 BUNDLES TYPE G-150 16-S-18D 4 5-16-E-1D SPACED AS SHOWN IN VIEW

5 -
REINFORCEMENT SEE SHEET No 3 16-S-18D 4 -
FIGURE 24.3.1 (e)

DECK REINFORCEMENT - SHEET C
10
90
50 0 YP )
00
(T
(T
50 0 YP )
9 BUNDLES OF 2-16-N-2D-215
50
YP
5-16-E-1D SPACED AS SHOWN IN VIEW

5
PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
(T
PREPARED CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS
20-V-15D 5 9-S-14D-215FF 7 BUNDLES OF 2-16-N-215 9 BUNDLES TYPE H SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION

8 -
20-BZ-1D 20-VV-6D 20-VV-6D
20-BZ-1D 2 SETS OF 8 BUNDLES OF
20-VL-1D 20-V-13D
300 (TYP) DESIGN 9-16-S-14D-215 8 ISSUE STATUS:

1 BUNDLE TYPE J 20-BZ-1D 7 6 -
5 DRAWING RTA BRIDGE NUMBER
1-16-HT-5D AND 2-16-HT-6D-100
PLAN
12-S-9D NOT SHOWN
2 SETS OF 8 BUNDLES OF 1-16-P-1D AND 2-16-HT-6D-100

CAD No KP2F2431E.dgn
SHEET No
ISSUE
9 EQUAL SPACES
20-S-11D 20-S-6D 28-V-8D
20-S-11D 16-E-3D 28-V-8D
20-S-6D 16-E-4D
16-S-3D
16-S-3D 16-S-10D 16-E-3D, 16-E-4D AND 16-G-1D
16-D-1D AND 16-V-11D 460
16-D-2D AND 16-V-10D
16-V-2D, 16-V-3D OR 16-V-4D
16-G-1D
16-VV-7D
16-V-7D, 16-V-6D OR 16-V-7D
5-16-S-10D-300EF
20-VV-4D
16-E-3D, 16-E-4D AND 16-G-1D BARS SHALL HAVE LEG LENGTHS OF 1900mm
20-VV-4D
16-VV-7D
SECTION
10 -
SECTION
9 -
10 16-V-5D FF, 16-V-6D FF OR 16-V-D7 FF 7 BUNDLES OF 4-16-E-4D, 2-16-E-3D AND 2-16-G-1D-175 2 SETS OF 3 BUNDLES OF 4-16-E-4D, 2-16-E-3D AND 2-16-G-1D-215 7 BUNDLES OF 4-16-E-4D, 2-16-E-3D AND 2-16-G-1D-215
GENERAL NOTES
0 500 1000 1500mm
SCALE
500 250
OR AS SHOWN.
9 16-VV-7D PIER c L 175 175 175 175 175
9 FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET, SEE SHEET No 1.
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH
20-S-6D
FIGURE 24.3.1 (f)

16-S-10D 16-V-2D FF, 16-V-3D FF OR 16-V-4D FF 10 2 SETS OF 3 GROUPS OF 4/DK4-16, 2/DK3-16, AND 2/DL1-16 AT 175 10 BUNDLES OF 1-20-VV-4D FF, 2-16-S-3D FF, 1-28-V-8D NF, 2-16-K-1D AND 2-16-AZ-1D SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION
10 -
6-20-S-11D SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION

10 -
DECK REINFORCEMENT - SHEET D

PREPARED
CHECKED
PLAN
TENDONS NOT SHOWN 12-S-9D NOT SHOWN DRAWING RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS:
DESIGN
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
KP2F2431F.dgn
SECTION 25
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
Structural Steelwork
25
25.1 GENERAL
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
In all bridge construction and bridge rehabilitation drawings prepared by the Authority, by Consultants for the Authority or for bridges that will become the property of the Authority, where structural steel elements are specified, the material used shall be in accordance with the relevant Australian Standard and this shall be stated on the drawings in the following manner: " Steel plate shall conform to AS/NZS 3678-300 " " Steel sections shall conform to AS/NZS 3679.1-300 " where 300 following the Australian Standard number indicates the grade of the steel in the plate or section. Structural steelwork drawings shall show sufficient detail for the complete fabrication of a particular item or sufficient detail to enable the fabricator to prepare detailed shop drawings for the particular item. For simple fabrication work, such as bridge girders that are made from rolled steel sections, universal beams and built-up plate girders, shop drawings are not usually prepared. Each item of fabricated steelwork shall be detailed in the form that the item is released from the fabrication shop with each and every part that is attached in the fabrication shop shown as part of the total assembly. Fabricated items that form part of the total assembly need not be detailed as separate items nor shall the quantity of those items be shown separately unless unduly complicated and in such a case, the quantity of those items be shown separately with the detail of the item. In the majority of cases, it is sufficient to detail a fabricated item in one or two views, with enlarged details of the more complex portions as necessary eg A normal plate with holes in it would require a plan view only. A tapered plate would require a plan and a section. A universal beam type girder would require an elevation and cross section. A fabricated item with a longitudinal axis of symmetry, such as a built-up plate girder, steel trough girder or steel box girder, would require an elevation and sections to depict different plate sizes and part plans to show all relevant details.
Where items are to be bolted or welded together in the field, eg where steel cross girders are to be attached to the main girders, an assembly drawing showing all components in their final position in the structure shall be provided. Where girders are bolted together in the field, the individual splice plates are supplied separately to the girders. Conventional practice is such that the holes in these plates are match drilled with the hole locations provided at the ends of each girder and in this case the detailing of each splice plate is not required as the assembly of the bolted splice is drawn in elevation, plan and cross section. The spacing of bolt holes and the edge distances to all plates shall be provided on these assembly drawings. Typical steelwork drawings, showing the method of detailing steel girders and their individual elements are shown in Figures 25.1(a), 25.1(b), 25.1(c) and 25.1(d).
OTB005
Issue 1 Revision 2 (18 February 2009)
Page 1 of 3
25.2
STANDARD ITEMS
Standard items, such as bolts, nuts and screws need not be detailed fully. If items are not fully detailed, they shall be sufficiently described to enable correct identification eg M20 x 400 long high strength steel bolt, property class 8.8 to AS/NZS 1252, thread length 150, with nut, property class 8 to AS/NZS 1252 and 2 washers, normal series to AS 1237. Bolts shall not be described on drawings as M20 x 400 8.8/S and nut under any circumstances as the various Australian Standards for the bolts, nuts and the bolting category specified are not the same.
25.3
NON-STANDARD ITEMS
All non-standard items shall be fully detailed with all relevant dimensions, thread length, thread type and surface finish indicated as appropriate.
25.4
CLOSING DIMENSIONS
In accordance with industry practice, overall dimensions of steel items shall be provided to enable the correct manufacture of the items. Dimensions required for the correct positioning of holes etc in items shall be provided from one end only and as such no closing dimensions shall be given on the drawings.
25.5
WEB DIAGRAMS
Web diagrams shall be fully detailed to incorporate any camber requirements. Typical web diagrams are shown in Figure 25.5.1. Vertical dimensions may be related to a horizontal datum as shown in Figure 25.5.1 or alternatively, the web diagram may be detailed with the chord horizontal. Where the appearance of the girder is of aesthetic importance, the top and bottom edges of the web plates shall be cut to form smooth curves to provide for the required camber.
25.6
STUD WELDED SHEAR CONNECTORS

The detailing of each and every shear connector in the plan and elevation of a girder is not necessary. In elevations, shear connectors need only be shown where a change in pitch occurs. In cross sections and enlarged details, all shear connectors shall be shown. The size and length of shear connectors is a design consideration, however care shall be exercised to ensure that the shear connector detailed is appropriate and available.
25.7
WEB STIFFENERS
Where web stiffeners are provided and are not required to be welded to a flange, suitable clearance shall be provided between the web stiffener and the flange to allow for maintenance and painting requirements.
25.8
CORNER CUTS AND CUT-OUTS

When detailing the fabrication and assembly of steel members, radial corner cuts shall be provided to enhance weld clearance and the method of detailing corner cuts shall be as shown in Figure 25.1(d).
OTB005
Page 2 of 3
Where cut-outs are required in steel plates to provide clearance to existing members, the drawing shall clearly detail where the cut-outs are required and shall also include any relevant welding requirements as shown in Figure 25.1(d).
25.9
LIFTING LUGS
Steel girders and any other large fabricated steel item shall be detailed to include the provision of lifting lugs at suitable locations to facilitate the erection of the item. Drawings shall also contain the following note as appropriate: "All lifting lugs shall be cut off by a suitable method after final positioning of the girder and the remaining stub shall be ground flush with the top flange." See Clause 25.10 of this Manual for the details of the renovation of galvanized surfaces where the item provided with lifting lugs has been hot-dip galvanized.
25.10
PROTECTIVE TREATMENT
The required protective treatment shall be specified on the drawings and it shall be appropriate for the item under consideration, ie for large items, it may be inappropriate to specify that the item be hot-dip galvanized after manufacture. In all cases where protective treatment of steelwork is required, the following note shall be included in the General Notes on the drawing: Edges to be protective treated shall be rounded to a radius of 1.5mm unless noted otherwise. Where fabricated steel items have been hot-dip galvanized and the surface of the protective coating has been disturbed or damaged for any reason, the following note shall be included in the General Notes on the drawing: Damaged galvanized surfaces shall be renovated in accordance with RTA Specification B241.
25.11
PLATE NOMENCLATURE
Steel plate sizes shall be shown on drawings using the width, thickness, length method eg 200 x 16 PLATE x 525 Where possible, standard plate widths shall be specified as this will reduce the need for plate stripping etc during fabrication of steel plate items.
25.12
INTERMITTENT WELDS
Where structural steel sections or plates are joined together and the method of joining is by welding, welds shall be continuous for the full length of the interface in order to prevent long term crevice corrosion occurring. Intermittent welds shall not be used in structural applications.
OTB005
Page 3 of 3
2 4 L 16P L 25 P TOP FLANGE
CROSS FRAMES FOR DETAILS, SEE SHEET No 4 DIAPHRAGM AND CROSS FRAMES SHALL BE BEARING ATTACHMENT PLATE FOR GIRDERS 1A AND 1B VERTICAL 200 x 20 P L TYP 6 200 x 20 P L 6 TYP FOR DETAILS OF FLANGE STIFFENERS AT FIELD JOINTS, SEE SHEET R 40 (TYP) 6 25 P BOTTOM FLANGE L HORIZONTAL REFERENCE LINE R40 CORNER CUTS (TYP) T T No 4
2 4
SECTION
1 -
3 VARIES (SEE WEB PLATE DETAILS) L3 (ALONG cOF WEB) L 22 x 150 STUD WELDED SHEAR CONNECTORS (TYP)
cOF BOLTS FOR L
5 VARIES OF ACCESS OPENING, FOR DETAILS SEE SHEET No 4 4 SOUTHERN SIDE
4 4
1920
FOR GIRDER TEMPORARY BRACING DETAILS, SEE SHEET No
1920
c L BOLTS FOR OF
TEMPORARY BRACING
TEMPORARY BRACING
200 x 20 P x 4025 L 1 c OF GIRDER L
1 -
315
560
560
360 x 25 2000
TOP FLANGE L P 2500 2 AT 2000 = 4000
L 200 x 25 P 12 400 x 4 AT 2000 = 8000 2000
L 200 x 25 Px 4400 2000 400
2000
1500
L L2 (ALONG cOF WEB)

c OF BEARING L
NORTHERN SIDE
PLAN
3 CURVATURE NOT SHOWN
5 4
4 4
FIGURE 25. 1(a)
SOUTHERN SIDE 300

c OF GIRDER AND BEARING L
NORTHERN SIDE
GENERAL NOTES
0 500 1000 1500mm
SCALE:
500 250
6 L 120 x 25 P L 200 x 25 P
TYP 25 P DIAPHRAGM L GIRDER No H1 H2
TABLE I
L1 L2 L3 R
FOR GIRDER LAYOUT, SEE SHEET No .. FOR DIMENSIONS OF WEB PLATES SEE SHEET No .. FOR DIMENSIONS OF BOTTOM FLANGE PLATES SEE SHEET No ..
GIRDERS - SHEET A
1A R40 CORNER CUT (TYP) BEARING ATTACHMENT 900 900 PLATE 1B
1000
722
28276
2347
149
500 800
FOR GENERAL DETAILS OF GIRDER SEE SHEET No .. L DENOTES DIMENSIONS ON c GIRDER. OF FOR DETAILS OF BEARING ATTACHMENT PLATES SEE SHEET No .. CROSS FRAMES AND DIAPHRAGMS SHALL BE PLACED RADIALLY IN PLAN. TEMPORARY TOP FLANGE AND CROSS BRACING SHALL BE INSTALLED
TYP
1000
753
27462
2155
156
504 800
1800
PRIOR TO TRANSPORT OF GIRDERS TO SITE. L DENOTES HORIZONTAL DIMENSIONS ALONG c GIRDER. OF
SECTION
3 -
T INDICATES THE POSITION OF TEMPORARY CROSS BRACING. FOR DETAILS SEE SHEET No ..
1
CAD No KP2F251A.dgn
L 16 P
CROSS FRAMES AND DIAPHRAGMS SHALL BE VERTICAL
L 28 P TOP FLANGE
CROSS FRAMES FOR DETAILS, SEE SHEET No 4
TYP 6
200 x 25 P L FOR DETAILS OF FLANGE STIFFENERS AT FIELD JOINTS, SEE SHEET No 4
L 28 P BOTTOM FLANGE
T 8 2 AT 2000 = 4000 2000 2000 2 AT 2000 = 4000 2000
2000
HORIZONTAL REFERENCE LINE
SECTION
6 -
2 4 SOUTHERN SIDE 125
4 4
L 200 x 25 P
L 20 P
c L DIAPHRAGM
FOR GIRDER TEMPORARY BRACING DETAILS, SEE SHEET No 22 x 150 STUD WELDED SHEAR CONNECTORS (TYP)
6 -
c OF GIRDER L
6 -
cOF BOLTS FOR L
TEMPORARY BRACING 1000 1920
300 360 x 28 L P TOP FLANGE
cOF BOLTS FOR L
TEMPORARY BRACING 1920 1000
300
9300
9300
FIGURE 25.1(b)
NORTHERN SIDE 2 4 4 4
PLAN
CURVATURE NOT SHOWN
GENERAL NOTES
0 500 1000 1500mm
TABLE I
GIRDER No H2 H3 R
SCALE:
500 250
GIRDERS - SHEET B
2A
722
617
500 800
2B
753
651
504 800
2
CAD No KP2F251B.dgn
2 L 16P 4 L 25 P TOP FLANGE
CROSS FRAMES FOR DETAILS, SEE SHEET No 4
DIAPHRAGM AND CROSS FRAMES SHALL BE VERTICAL
TYP 6
TYP 6
200 x 20 P L
200 x 20 P L R40 CORNER CUTS (TYP)
FOR DETAILS OF FLANGE STIFFENERS AT FIELD JOINTS, SEE SHEET No 4
T 25 P BOTTOM FLANGE L
R40 CORNER CUTS (TYP) HORIZONTAL REFERENCE LINE 6
BEARING ATTACHMENT PLATE FOR GIRDERS 3A AND 3B
SECTION
7
2
8 -
4 4 SOUTHERN SIDE 125
5 4 OF ACCESS OPENING, FOR DETAILS SEE SHEET No 4 SHEAR CONNECTOR SPACING: 113 SPACES AT 250 = 28 250 GIRDER 3A 112 SPACES AT 250 = 28 000 GIRDER 3B 220 220 L L3 (ALONG cOF WEB)
1920
cOF BOLTS FOR L
200 x 25 P x 12 400 L
FOR GIRDER TEMPORARY BRACING DETAILS, SEE SHEET No

c L BOLTS FOR OF
140 TEMPORARY BRACING
TEMPORARY BRACING
L 200 x 20 Px 4035 7 c OF GIRDER L
7 -
22 x 150 STUD WELDED SHEAR 200 x 25 Px 4400 L 360 x 25 2000 4 AT 2000 = 8000 125 2 AT 2000 = 4000 SHEAR CONNECTOR SPACING: 106 SPACES AT 250 = 26 500 GIRDER 3A 105 SPACES AT 250 = 26 250 GIRDER 3B L L2 (ALONG cOF WEB) 2500 L TOP FLANGE P 2000 560 VARIES CONNECTORS (TYP) 1500 2000
300
400
2000
NORTHERN SIDE 4 4 5 4
c OF BEARINGS L
PLAN
CURVATURE NOT SHOWN 8 -
FIGURE 25. 1(c)
SOUTHERN SIDE
c OF GIRDER AND BEARING L
NORTHERN R 300 SIDE
GENERAL NOTES
6 L 120 x 25 P L 200 x 25 P R40 CORNER CUTS (TYP) BEARING ATTACHMENT 900 900 PLATE 3A 617 561 27 720 250 2047 500 800 TYP 25 P DIAPHRAGM L GIRDER No H3 H4
0 500 1000 1500mm
TABLE I
L1 L2 L3 R
SCALE:
500 250
GIRDERS - SHEET C
TYP
3B
651
517
27 421
255
2025
504 800
1800
SECTION
8 3
CAD No KP2F251C.dgn
BEND FROM 12 BAR 6 THICK COVER PLATE 2mm CHAMFER RUBBER GASKET DRILL 18 HOLE 25 THICK FLANGE GP 3 HEXAGON NUT ISO 4034 M12-10 TO AS 1112.3 12 x 55 LONG PIN THREAD LENGTH 35mm 6 3 6 x 12 LONG SLOT FOR PADLOCK TOTAL OF 4 "LOCKWOOD" PADLOCKS OR EQUIVALENT REQUIRED
10 5
DRILL 4 HOLE 300 TYP
600 11 200 x 25 PLATE
6 THICK COVER PLATE 10 GP - TYP 5 26 200 40 5
6 6
HANDLE
60
0
HINGE PIN
2 REQUIRED PER COVER
10 20 30 40 50mm
50
11 -
SHOP WELDS SHALL STOP 50mm SHORT OF END OF STIFFENER. FIELD WELDS SHALL COMMENCE AT THESE POINTS
DETAIL
0 20 40 60
B 80
ALL PADLOCKS SHALL BE KEYED ALIKE 3 KEYS SHALL BE SUPPLIED FOR EACH PADLOCK
100mm
DRILL 11 HOLE
R10 DRILL 11 HOLE CUT FROM 10 PLATE R10
WELD GROUND FLUSH IN THE VICINITY OF THE STIFFENER ON INSIDE OF GIRDER EXTERNAL FACE OF FLANGE PLATE
SECTION STIFFENERS AT FIELD WELDS
11 -
DETAILS OF LONGITUDINAL FLANGE

CUT FROM 5 PLATE R5 4 1 EXTERNAL FACE OF FLANGE PLATE WEB PLATE
20 10
B -
HANDLE - SEE DETAIL 30
R5
HINGE
HINGE BRACKET
50mm 30 40
INSIDE FACE OF WEB PLATE

50mm
SECTION
0 100 200
9 300 400 500mm
BOTTOM FLANGE
10 5
10
20
3 SPLIT PIN (2 REQUIRED PER COVER)

10 5 0 10 20 30 40
1 4
EXTERNAL FACE OF FLANGE PLATE
GP
100 50
DETAIL OF TRANSITION OF BOTTOM FLANGE

5
DETAIL OF TRANSITION OF TOP FLANGE

GP 5
6 THICK COVER PLATE OF ACCESS OPENING 4 THICK RUBBER GASKET SHALL BE COVER PLATE CUT FROM 6 PLATE GLUED AROUND OPENING 30 60
PLATE THICKNESSES AT FIELD WELDS
PLATE THICKNESSES AT FIELD WELDS

360 180
c OF GIRDER L
360 180 100
25 THICK FLANGE TYP 22
100
100
100
GENERAL NOTES
0 100 200 300mm
SCALE
OR AS SHOWN.
50
SECTION
R100 OF GIRDER AND ACCESS OPENING
0 20 40 60
10 80 100mm
100
TYP
10 10 16 PLATE 6 6 175 x 25 PLATE 16 PLATE
NO MORE THAN TWO FULL PENETRATION BUTT WELD SPLICES SHALL BE USED IN EACH GIRDER WEB TO MAKE UP THE FULL LENGTH SHOWN. DRILLING OF TOP FLANGES IS NOT PERMITTED. THE CONTRACTOR MUST SUBMIT FULL DETAILS OF METHOD OF CLAMPING 200 x 25 PLATE 6 TYP 6 PERMANENT AND TEMPORARY FORMWORK TO TOP FLANGE OF GIRDERS. STEEL IN BOTTOM FLANGES SHALL CONFORM TO AS/NZS 3678-..... STEEL IN THE WEBS, TOP FLANGES, DIAPHRAGMS AND LIFTING LUGS SHALL CONFORM TO AS/NZS 3678-..... ALL OTHER STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO AS/NZS 3678-250.
9 -
9 20 10
TYP
HINGE PIN - SEE DETAIL R130 HINGE BRACKET SEE DETAIL A 10 250 HINGE - SEE DETAIL 350 380 350 380 10 450 TYP
450 C 1800 -
WELDING SYMBOLS COMPLY WITH AS 1101.3. THE WELD CATEGORY SHALL BE ............IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS/NZS 1554.1.
HOT-DIP GALVANIZED SIZE 10 NORMAL SERIES PLAIN WASHERS
R40 CORNER CUTS (TYP)
SECTION
4 1
4 2
600 800
4 3
1000mm
250 x 25 PLATE
DETAIL
A -
TO AS 1237.1 (2 REQUIRED PER COVER)

80 100mm 0 200
PLAN
400
ACCESS OPENING COVER

4 ASSEMBLIES REQUIRED
0 100 200 300 400 500mm 20 10
20
40
60
200 100
360 180 100 100

c OF GIRDER L
360 180 100
FIGURE 25.1(d)
100
100 50
TYP 22 OF GIRDER 10 10 6 6 TYP 200 x 20 PLATE 6 6 TYP
TYP 22
TYP
TYP
10 10 6
175 x 25 PLATE
16 PLATE
TYP
16 PLATE
TYP 250 x 25 PLATE 6
GIRDERS - SHEET D
TYP
TYP
R40 CORNER CUTS-TYP 450 450 C -
PHONE (02) 8837-0802
DETAIL
C -
R40 CORNER CUTS-TYP 1800

80 100mm
FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
C -
SECTION
2 1
2 3
800 1000mm 20 10
20
40
60
SECTION
5 1
5 3
800 1000mm
250 x 25 PLATE
200
400
600
200
400
600
200 100
200 100
CAD No KP2F251D.dgn
A - REFER TO TABLE II A - REFER TO TABLE II L1

300
A - REFER TO TABLE II
L2 c OF L DIAPHRAGM 16 THICK PLATE 16 THICK PLATE 16 THICK PLATE
L2
L1
300
1500
1500
1500
X
90
X
90
90
B - REFER TO TABLE III HORIZONTAL REFERENCE LINE

90
90
90
GIRDERS 1A AND 1B DEVELOPED ELEVATION

FOR VALUES OF D AND X REFER TO TABLE I FOR VALUES OF L1 AND L2 REFER TO TABLE IV

FOR VALUES OF D AND X REFER TO TABLE I

FOR VALUES OF D AND X REFER TO TABLE I
FOR VALUES OF L1 AND L2 REFER TO TABLE IV
TABLE I - WEB OFFSETS - GIRDERS 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 3A AND 3B

GIRDER 1A DISTANCE X OFFSET D SOUTHERN WEB 2665 2637 2618 2608 2603 2593 2579 2564 2548 2532 2513 2495 2475 2454 2433 2412 2396 0 2782 4343 5025 6350 8357 10364 12370 14377 16384 18391 20398 22404 24411 26418 28016 NORTHERN WEB 0 2301 5072 6628 7304 8628 10627 12627 14627 16626 18626 20625 22625 24625 26624 28624 30216 2846 2829 2821 2813 2801 2789 2777 2764 2750 2735 2719 2702 2684 2664 2650 2645 2625 2606 OFFSET D SOUTHERN WEB 0 1335 3358 5381 7404 9427 11449 13472 15495 17518 19541 21563 23174 23586 25609 27618 NORTHERN WEB 0 1569 2253 3584 5600 7615 9631 11647 13662 15678 17693 19709 21725 23740 25345 25756 27771 29773
GIRDER 1B DISTANCE X OFFSET D
GIRDER 2A DISTANCE X OFFSET SOUTHERN WEB 2396 2372 2352 2352 2337 2322 2312 2305 2300 2298 2297 2297 0 2416 4049 4423 6430 8436 10443 12450 14457 16464 18470 18633 NORTHERN WEB 0 2407 4393 4407 6406 8406 10406 12405 14405 16404 18404 18567 2606 2606 2587 2569 2554 2541 2530 2523 2517 2517 2514 2511 D
GIRDER 2B DISTANCE X OFFSET SOUTHERN WEB 0 13 2036 4059 6082 8105 10128 12150 14173 14338 16196 18633 NORTHERN WEB 0 13 2029 4045 6060 8076 10191 12107 14123 14287 16138 18567 2297 2296 2296 2295 2294 2291 2287 2282 2274 2267 2257 2247 2237 2225 2215 2215 D
GIRDER 3A DISTANCE X OFFSET SOUTHERN WEB 0 1844 4262 5857 7864 9870 11876 13882 15887 17892 19897 21092 23907 25911 28053 29767 NORTHERN WEB 0 1837 4246 5836 7836 9836 11835 13835 15835 17834 19834 21833 23833 25833 27970 2511 2508 2505 2501 2495 2488 2478 2469 2455 2441 2425 2407 2388 2372 2353 2347 D
GIRDER 3B DISTANCE X SOUTHERN WEB 0 1608 3630 5650 7670 9690 11708 13726 15743 17759 19775 21789 23942 25664 27751 29446 NORTHERN WEB 0 1602 3617 5631 7645 9658 11671 13683 15695 17706 19716 21726 23875 25593 27676 -
GENERAL NOTES
NOT TO SCALE. ALL DIMENSIONS HAVE BEEN DEVELOPED INTO THE PLANE OF THE WEB. DIMENSION D INCLUDES AN ALLOWANCE FOR THE CALCULATED DEFLECTIONS SHOWN ON SHEET No ..
FIGURE 25.5.1
ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH
TABLE III - DIAPHRAM OFFSET TABLE II - PLATE LENGTHS

A GIRDER SOUTHERN WEB 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 28425 27618 18633 18633 29767 29446 NORTHERN WEB 30623 29773 18567 18567 27970 27676 2A 2B GIRDER
TABLE IV - WEB DIMENSIONS GIRDERS 1A, 1B, 3A AND 3B

L1 L2 NORTHERN WEB 895 884 757 752 SOUTHERN WEB 485 479 412 409 NORTHERN WEB 487 481 413 410 DESIGN DRAWING RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS:
GIRDERS 2A AND 2B
B SOUTHERN WEB 9317 9317 NORTHERN WEB 9283 9284
GIRDER WEB PLATES

GIRDER
SOUTHERN WEB
1A 1B 3A 3B
890 879 754 749
FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
PREPARED
CHECKED
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
KP2F2551.dgn
SECTION 26
BARRIER RAILINGS
Barrier Railings
26
26.1 GENERAL
BARRIER RAILINGS
The standard barrier types in current use by the RTA include: Steel Traffic Barrier Railings Steel Pedestrian Railings Aluminium Pedestrian Railings
26.2
DIMENSIONS
26.2.1 Traffic Barrier Railings Refer to RTA Standard Bridge Drawings RTAB051 and RTAB052 for general details of Traffic Barrier Railings for Regular and Medium Performance Levels. 26.2.2 Pedestrian Barrier Railings Refer to RTA Standard Bridge Drawings RTAB018 and RTAB019 for details of Steel and Aluminium Pedestrian Barrier Railings. Blank spaces are provided on these detail sheets for the addition of relevant information, ie numbers of items required.
26.3
GEOMETRY
26.3.1 Grades and Vertical Curves Posts for all types of traffic barrier railings shall be perpendicular to the top of the concrete parapet or footway surface on which they are located in all cases where the grade of the structure does not exceed 4%. Posts for all types of traffic barrier railings that are located on a structure where the grade of the structure exceeds 4% at any point, shall be detailed to be truly vertical for the full length of the structure. Detailing of traffic barrier railings in this instance will entail the calculation of vertical offsets from a given datum for each panel type as shown in Figure 26.3.1. End posts and balusters for pedestrian barrier railings shall be detailed to be truly vertical in all instances. 26.3.2 Horizontal Curves All types of barriers on structures which are set out on a curved horizontal alignment need careful examination to ensure that the angular variation between panels can be accommodated at rail splices. Straight panels shall be used for structures set out on horizontal curves where the radius of curvature is greater than or equal to 150 x the panel length for the longest panel used. Where the radius of curvature of the structure is less than 150 x the panel length for the longest panel used, the panels shall be detailed to suit the radius as appropriate however, where the mid-ordinate offset for any panel is calculated to be less than 5mm, the panel shall be detailed as being straight.
OTB005
Page 1 of 3
Barrier Railings
Figure 26.3.2 shows the correct method for the detailing of curved traffic barrier railing panels and also illustrates the method used to calculate the mid-ordinate offset for all types of curved railing panels.
26.4
JOINTS
Bolted rather than welded joints between panels in traffic barrier railings should be used for maintenance and tolerance reasons. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB053 provides details of joints for Regular Performance Traffic Barrier Railings and RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB054 provides details of joints for Medium Performance Traffic Barrier Railings. On continuous bridges, joints between panels in traffic barrier railings may be placed at the most convenient locations, however as a general rule, joints between adjacent panels shall occur at approximately the quarter point of the span between adjacent posts in the direction of travel as shown in Figure 26.4. On simply supported bridges and continuous bridges where expansion and or contraction joints are detailed, a joint in the railing (all types) shall be provided between the posts located either side of the joint in the deck. Joints provided at these locations shall be detailed with a rail splice that is sufficient in length to accommodate the expected range of movement of the joint in the deck.
26.5
POST SPACING
26.5.1 Traffic Barrier Railings In all cases, the form and geometry of all traffic barrier railings shall conform to the requirements of AS 5100.1 Bridge Design. For aesthetic considerations, post spacing in barrier railings shall be as even as is practical to suit the particular application and to reduce the number of different panel types to be used. Where post spacing at the ends of structures is different to that adopted for the majority of the structure, the post spacing shall be reduced rather than increased and if necessary an intermediate post spacing shall be used to reduce the visual impact of the change in spacing. Where a reduction in post spacing is required, the post spacing adopted should, in most cases, not be less than two-thirds of the post spacing used for the remainder of the structure. 26.5.2 Pedestrian Railings The maximum centre to centre spacing for supports in pedestrian railings shall be 1500mm. The maximum clear spacing between balusters in pedestrian railings shall be 130mm as defined in Clause 12.1(b) of AS 5100.1 Bridge Design.
26.6
PANEL LENGTHS
26.6.1 Traffic Barrier Railings For ease of manufacture, protective treatment, handling and erection, panel lengths should not exceed 5500mm and should not contain more than two railing posts.
26.6.2 Pedestrian Railings

Barrier Railings
Panel lengths for pedestrian railings shall not exceed 2990mm.
26.7
TERMINATION OF RAILINGS AT ENDS OF STRUCTURES

Where traffic barrier railings terminate at a concrete end post/wing wall arrangement they shall be connected to that concrete end post or wing wall with a socket and spigot type joint. For skewed bridges, the ends of the rails shall be cut to match the skew. Where traffic barrier railings are provided on top of an 820mm high Type F profile concrete safety barrier terminate, the rails shall be curved or sloped down. Other types of traffic barrier railing terminations are under investigation by the Authority.
OTB005
Page 3 of 3
3280 220 2445 615 2015
5370 2690 665 1965
4630 2445 220
172
281
243
PANEL
A PANEL B
PANEL
INSIDE ELEVATION
PANEL A - 1 REQUIRED
PANEL B - 8 REQUIRED
PANEL C - 1 REQUIRED
PLAN
4735 220 2550 1965 665
5370 2690 2015 615
3385 2550 220
248
281
PANEL
D PANEL E
PANEL
INSIDE ELEVATION
PANEL D - 1 REQUIRED
PANEL E - 8 REQUIRED
PANEL F - 1 REQUIRED
PLAN
GENERAL NOTES
SCALE
200 100 0 200 400 600 800 1000mm
FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET, SEE SHEET No...
177
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH
FROM
EN
TU C U R ST T A ER EN P SU TM F U B O A D
E TU C U R ST T B ER EN P SU TM F U B O A D

TO
EN
TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING PANELS

PANEL LAYOUT
NOT TO SCALE PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING
FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
CHECKED
FIGURE 26.3.1
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
KP2F2631.dgn
3540 220 2600 720 2210
5870 2700 760 2170
4990 2600 220
PANEL
A PANEL B
PANEL
ELEVATION
CALCULATION OF MID-ORDINATE OFFSET

X
PANEL A
1 REQUIRED
PANEL B -
REQUIRED 13
PANEL C-
REQUIRED 1
C
PLAN
2 2 OFFSET X = R-1/2 4R - C
3530 220 2600 710 2130
5530 2700 700 2140
4960 2600 220
EXAMPLE : 2 2 FOR PANEL TYPE B : X = 234 300 - 1/2 4x234 300 - 5760 = 18
PANEL
PANEL
PANEL
ELEVATION
GENERAL NOTES
X
X
SCALE REQUIRED 1
200 100
200
400
600
800
1000mm
OR AS SHOWN
PANELD -
1 REQUIRED
PANEL E- 14 REQUIRED
PANEL F -
PANELS SHALL BE BENT ON A CIRCULAR CURVE.
PLAN
FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET, SEE SHEET No ....
R ON INSID E FACE OF R AIL
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH

A
B
ENT A
C
B
WEST
FROM
B
ENT B ABUTM
TO
TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING PANELS

F
E
E
E
PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
E
E
E
EAST
CHECKED
PANEL LAYOUT
NOT TO SCALE
FIGURE 26.3.2
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
KP2F2632.dgn
R240 000
ABUTM
PIER
c L
DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC
SPAN BETWEEN ADJACENT POSTS = L 0.25L APPROX 0.75L APPROX
c OF JOINT L
NOMINAL JOINT GAP
PANEL TYPE ..
PANEL TYPE ..
INSIDE ELEVATION
FIGURE 26.4
SECTION 27
BEARINGS
Bearings
27
27.1 GENERAL
BEARINGS
Bearings are provided in bridge structures to enable: the transmission of forces between the superstructure and the substructure relative movement between the superstructure and substructure without creating additional stresses.
Bearings are normally referred to as either "fixed", "restrained" or "expansion" and are denoted on General Arrangement drawings by the letters F, R and E. Fixed Bearings allow transfer of vertical and/or horizontal loads as well as rotational movement. Restrained Bearings allow transfer of vertical loads, minor rotational movement and minor horizontal movement Expansion Bearings allow transfer of vertical loads as well as rotational and horizontal movement. Bearing types, other than elastomeric strip bearings, shall be sufficiently detailed to allow for full inspection, maintenance and replacement. The design position for the jacks required for the future lifting of the superstructure to replace the bearings shall be shown on the drawings. The calculated jacking loads and method of jacking (simultaneous) shall also be also specified on the drawings.
27.2
REDUCED LEVELS OF BEARINGS

Where bearings are to be set on nominal thickness mortar pads, the reduced level for the top of the bearing shall be given so that any variation of design levels may be "taken out" in the thickness of the mortar pad. Where bearings are to be set on concrete plinths or where elastomeric pad/strip bearings are used and are set directly on the concrete surface, the reduced level for the concrete surface shall be given.
27.3
BEARING TYPES
The main types of bearings commonly used are: Elastomeric Bearing Strips and Pads Laminated Elastomeric Bearings Proprietary types such as confined Elastomers, Spherical and Pot
27.3.1 Elastomeric Bearing Strips and Elastomeric Bearing Pads Sizes of these types of bearings shall conform to details given in AS 5100.4. Elastomeric Bearing Strips shall be detailed complete with width, thickness, length, hole size and spacing for dowels where applicable. (See Figure 27.3.1)
OTB005
Page 1 of 3
Bearings
Nominal bearing strip sizes are: 65 x 20mm Thick, 95 x 20mm Thick and 125 x 25mm Thick
Reference should be made to RTA Bridge Policy Circular 98/15 Multi Span Plank Bridges with Link Slabs Guidelines for Bearing Selection for guidance on the appropriate size to be used for each application. Elastomeric Bearing Pads do not normally require detailing, however, length, width and thickness shall be given in all instances. Bearings should be shown in sufficient detail to enable correct orientation and placement within the structure. 27.3.2 Laminated Elastomeric Bearings Generally Laminated Elastomeric Bearings shall conform to AS 5100.4 with Part Numbers from AS 5100.4 being quoted on the drawings. Standard bearings require no specific detail except where holes are required for dowel pins etc. Any modifications to 'standard' bearings shall be sufficiently detailed to enable manufacture, i.e. size, location and depth of required holes. Non-Standard Bearings, where used shall be sufficiently detailed to enable manufacture. The following information shall be given: Overall physical dimensions Number and thickness of internal rubber layers Number, size and thickness of steel plates Cover thickness to steel plates Hole details (including location and depth) Cover thickness to holes for steel plates (where hole detailed) Table of bearing performance requirements.
Figure 27.3.1 shows required detailing and performance table for Non-Standard Elastomeric Bearings. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB033G shows the required level of detailing for the installation of Elastomeric Bearings where used with PSC Super T girders. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB050 shows the required level of detailing for the installation of Elastomeric Bearings where used with PSC I girders. 27.3.3 Proprietary Bearing Types Several different types of proprietary bearings are extensively used in bridge designs. These include confined elastomer ('POT TYPE') as well as spherical which have a combination of elastomeric, metal and/or PTFE components. Other types of proprietary bearings have combinations of metal elastomeric and/or PTFE components arranged in different forms to cater for the necessary restraints and movements. Brand names for proprietary bearings shall not be shown on the drawings and proprietary bearings shall not be fully detailed. However, it is necessary to draw the outline of the bearing based on the dimension shown in the manufacturer's catalogue. Figures 27.3.3(a) and 27.3.3(b) show the typical level of detailing required. The only dimensions given on the drawings shall be: OTB005
bearing height (excluding additional attachment plates) overall height of the bearing assembly including necessary attachment plates.
Bearings
plan dimensions of the upper and lower surfaces in contact with the attachment plates, or with the bridge structure where attachment plates are unnecessary. spacing of bearing anchor bolts.
Attachment plates are required to be provided to allow for the future removal or replacement of the bearings. Attachment plates shall be shown as separate items and shall be fully detailed to enable fabrication. (See Clause 29.5 of this Manual). All necessary bolts, nuts, washers, screws, dowels and other attachment devices for fastening bearings to attachment plates and for anchoring the bearings or attachment plates to the bridge structure shall be called up in detail. Standard bolts, screws etc. shall not be detailed separately but must be fully described. Non-standard fasteners shall be drawn in detail with all necessary dimensions to enable fabrication. In addition to the above, bearing performance requirements for each size and type of bearing used in the bridge structure shall be provided in a table format as shown in Figure 27.3.3(b). General notes relating specifically to bearing drawings are shown on RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB029 and where applicable, shall be used.
OTB005
Page 3 of 3
9140 605 13 AT 610 = 7930 65 605
25 HOLES 65 x 20 ELASTOMERIC BEARING STRIP
PLAN
ELASTOMERIC BEARING STRIP

REQUIRED NOT TO SCALE 8 LAYERS OF 5mm THICK STEEL PLATE 38 x 10 DEEP RECESS 10 7 STEEL PLATE TYP 7 38 x 10 DEEP RECESS 10 7 7 TYP TYP 5 7 INTERNAL RUBBER LAYERS 10
124
129
SECTION
NOT TO SCALE
1 -
SECTION
NOT TO SCALE
2 -
380 190 190 STEEL PLATES 190
380 190 STEEL PLATES
38 x 10 DEEP REC ESS IN ELASTOMER 240
38 x 10 DEEP REC ESS IN ELASTOMER 240
480
480
1 240
1 -
2 240
2 -
ELASTOMERIC BEARING (MODIFIED STANDARD)

AS PART NUMBER 070908R AS SPECIFIED IN AS 5100.4 MODIFIED AS SHOWN .. REQUIRED
0 150 300 450mm
ELASTOMERIC BEARING (NON STANDARD)

FOR BEARING PREFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS SEE TABLE I .. REQUIRED
0 150 300 450mm
150
75
150
75
BEARING PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

CALCULATED COMPRESSIVE No OF INTERNAL RUBBER LAYERS OVERALL HEIGHT mm 10 kN/m
3
MEAN SHEAR STIFFNESS

3
CALCULATED ROTATIONAL STIFFNESS
SHEAR DEFLECTION CAPACITY
RATED LOAD AT ZERO ROTATION AT MAX SHEAR AT ZERO SHEAR kN kN
RATED LOAD AT MAX ROTATION AS AT MAX SHEAR AT ZERO SHEAR kN kN PART No
STIFFNESS AT ZERO SHEAR
10 kN/m
kNm/rad
mm
THIS TYPE OF TABLE IS REQUIRED FOR STANDARD MODIFIED ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS AND NON-STANDARD ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS WHERE THE EXTENT OF THE MODIFICATION ALTERS THE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE BEARINGS
FIGURE 27.3.1
CAD No KP2F2731
c OF BEARING L
c OF BEARING L
c OF BEARING L
RL X ATTACHMENT PLATE 167 HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS ISO 4017 - M30 - 8.5 AND WASHERS - TYP 8 ASSEMBLIES REQUIRED ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE T1 179 ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE B1 RL X TYPE T3 ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE T2 ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE B4 RL X MORTAR 30 NOM 92 (SKEWED)
ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE B2 (RADIAL) MORTAR PAD

PAD
HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS ISO 4017 - M30 - 8.5 AND WASHERS - TYP MORTAR 30 NOM 8 ASSEMBLIES REQUIRED PAD 90 FORMED HOLES SHALL BE GROUTED AFTER FINAL ALIGNMENT OF BEARING HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS ISO 4017 - M20 - 8.5 AND WASHERS - TYP 8 ASSEMBLIES REQUIRED 90 FORMED HOLES SHALL BE GROUTED AFTER FINAL ALIGNMENT OF BEARING
BEARING 4 ELEVATION BEARING 1 ELEVATION
BEARING 2 ELEVATION
DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC (TYP)

c OF BEARING L
c OF BEARING L
c OF BEARING L
ATTACHMENT PLATE 92 TYPE T5 (SKEWED) RL X ATTACHMENT PLATE 129 TYPE T4 (SKEWED) ATTACHMENT PLATE 30 NOM RL X PLINTH MORTAR TYPE B3 (RADIAL) 137 ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE T6 (SKEWED)
ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE B5 (RADIAL) RL X
ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE B4 (RADIAL) PLINTH
30 NOM
MORTAR
PAD
HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS PAD HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS ISO 4017 - M20 - 8.5 AND WASHERS - TYP 8 ASSEMBLIES REQUIRED 90 FORMED HOLES SHALL BE GROUTED AFTER FINAL ALIGNMENT OF BEARING ISO 4017 - M20 - 8.5 AND WASHERS - TYP 8 ASSEMBLIES REQUIRED
HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS ISO 4017 - M20 - 8.5 MORTAR 30 NOM AND WASHERS - TYP PAD 8 ASSEMBLIES REQUIRED
90 FORMED HOLES SHALL BE GROUTED AFTER FINAL ALIGNMENT OF BEARING
BEARING 6 ELEVATION
BEARING 3
ELEVATION
BEARING 5
ELEVATION
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH

GENERAL NOTES
0 c OF BEARINGS ABUT A L c OF BEARINGS ABUT B L c OF BEARINGS AND PIER L 100 200 300mm
SCALE
100 50
OR AS SHOWN.
FIGURE 27.3.3(a)
4 FROM BANGALOW
6 TO TWEED HEADS
TABLE I BEARING LEVELS

LOCATION ABUTMENT A 3 ABUTMENT A PIER PIER ABUTMENT B BEARING RL X
MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF MORTAR SHALL BE 40MPa. MORTAR SHALL BE DRY PACKED. DENOTES DIMENSIONS BASED ON THE NOMINAL HEIGHTS OF BEARINGS. ACTUAL DIMENSIONS TO BE ASCERTAINED FROM THE BEARING MANUFACTURER BEFORE ABUTMENT HEADSTOCK AND PIER COLUMN CONSTRUCTION, AND THE 1 4 2 5 3 6 102.666 102.689 104.728 104.727 105.235 105.242 DIMENSIONS OF THE MORTAR PADS AND/OR CONCRETE SURFACES ADJUSTED ACCORDINGLY. HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS SHALL CONFORM TO AS 1110.2.
L BASE c 1 2 DENOTES FIXED BEARING DENOTES GUIDED SLIDING BEARING DENOTES FREE SLIDING BEARING DENOTES DIRECTION OF MOVEMENT
FLAT ROUND WASHERS FOR HIGH STRENGTH STRUCTURAL BOLTING SHALL CONFORM TO AS/NZS 1252. SCREWS AND WASHERS SHALL BE HOT-DIP GALVANIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS 1214.
CHECKED
BEARING LOCATION LAYOUT

NOT TO SCALE
ABUTMENT B
THE LENGTH OF HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS AS DETERMINED BY THE BEARING MANUFACTURER AND SHALL PROVIDE FOR FUTURE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF BEARING. FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET SEE SHEET No XX.
CAD No
SHEET No
ISSUE
KP2F2733A.dgn
30 NOM
785 320 L 32 P 320
DRILL AND TAP FOR M30 HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS FOR TYPE B2 AND M20 HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS FOR TYPE B5 220 220 32 P L 360 285 L 32 P 220 180 130 570 DRILL AND TAP FOR M20 HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS DRILL AND TAP FOR M20 HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS 335 130 L 32 P
2 320 275
2 -
785
570
100
130
320
275
220
100
335
180
DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC
285
360
1 -
1 -
1 100 100
1 -
1 -
130
100
100
1 100 100
180 DRILL AND TAP FOR M30 275 275 HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS
180
ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPES B2 AND B5 ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE B1

1 REQUIRED 1 REQUIRED TYPE B2, 1 REQUIRED TYPE B5
ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE B3

1 REQUIRED
ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE B4

2 REQUIRED
TAPPED HOLES FOR ATTACHMENT TO BEARING BOTTOM PLATE MAY VARY TO THAT DETAILED DEPENDING ON BEARING MANUFACTURER (TYP)
6/
32 x 350
TYP 3
40 x 3 FLAT x 40 (TYP)
GENERAL NOTES
0 100 200 300 400 500mm
LONG GRADE 350 BARS TO AS/NZS 3679 WITH 45mm M30 THREAD AT ONE END TYP 10 32 x 350 LONG GRADE 350 STEEL BARS TO AS/NZS 3679
SCALE
100 50
OR AS SHOWN.
STEEL PLATES AND FLATS SHALL CONFORM TO AS 3678 GRADE 350. THE WELD CATEGORY SHALL BE GP IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS/NZS 1554 PART 1. WELDING SYMBOLS COMPLY WITH AS 1101 PART 3. ALL ATTACHMENT PLATES SHALL BE HOT-DIP GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION. STEEL FLATS SHALL BE WELDED TO ATTACHMENT PLATES PRIOR TO PROTECTIVE TREATMENT.
SECTION
2 -
SECTION
1 -
100
200
300mm
100
200
300mm
5 0048"
10 3350" BOTTOM PLATE BOTTOM PLATE OF BEARING
EDGES TO BE PROTECTIVE TREATED SHALL BE ROUNDED TO A RADIUS OF 1.5mm IF NO DIMENSION SHOWN. FOR DETAILS OF TOP ATTACHMENT PLATES, SEE SHEET No XX. OF BEARING
100
50
100
50
90 0000"
BOTTOM PLATE OF BEARING
INSTALLATION NOTES
FROM TO THE TOP OF THE BEARING SHALL BE SET LEVEL TO RLS SHOWN ON SHEET No XX AND BEARING SUPPORTED ON STEEL PACKING PRIOR TO THE PACKING OF MORTAR. SUPPORTS SHALL NOT BE REMOVED UNTIL MORTAR REACHES A STRENGTH OF 40MPa. THE BEARING ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE HELD TOGETHER WITH TRANSIT BOLTS TO PREVENT MISALIGNMENT AND DAMAGE TO THE COMPONENTS DURING TRANSIT AND TOP PLATE OF BEARING ERECTION. THE TRANSIT BOLTS SHALL NOT BE REMOVED UNTIL AFTER FINAL
c OF BEARING L
TOP PLATE TOP PLATE OF BEARING

c OF BEARING PIER L
ABUTMENT A
OF BEARING
c OF BEARING L
INSTALLATION. THE PTFE/STAINLESS STEEL INTERFACES OF ALL BEARINGS SHALL BE HEAVILY LUBRICATED WITH AN APPROVED LUBRICANT AT TIME OF ASSEMBLY.
ABUTMENT B
HORIZONTAL ROTATION OF TOP PLATE OF BEARING

NOT TO SCALE
TABLE II BEARING PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

BEARING No LOCATION TYPE AND DESCRIPTION OF BEARING FIXED POT TYPE 1 ABUTMENT A LONGITUDINALLY AND TRANSVERSELY RESTRAINED 2 GUIDED SLIDING POT TYPE PIER TRANVERSELY RESTRAINED 2000 650 VERTICAL LOADS (kN) MAX MIN HORIZONTAL LOAD (kN) HORIZONTAL MOVEMENT LONGIT TRANS MAXIMUM ROTATION (RADIANS) No REQUIRED
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH
385 TRANS 900 LONGIT
.007
FIGURE 27.3.3(b)
6500
3300
870
+ 21 -
.007
1
PREPARED BY
GUIDED SLIDING POT TYPE 3 ABUTMENT B TRANVERSELY RESTRAINED 2500 900
415
+ 45 -
.007
TYPICAL POT-TYPE BEARINGS AND ASSOCIATED ATTACHMENT PLATES ARE DETAILED ON THE DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT DETAILS OF PROPOSED BEARING MANUFACTURER AS REQUIRED BY THE SPECIFICATION. ANY BEARING TYPE PROPOSED SHALL COMPLY
ABUTMENT A
FREE SLIDING POT TYPE
2000
450
.007
WITH THE FOLLOWING: a) THE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS SHOWN IN TABLE II. b) THE VARIATIONS OF THE PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS OF THE BEARINGS, INCLUDING THE PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING
CHECKED
PIER
6500
3250
+ 21 -
.007
ATTACHMENT PLATES, FROM THOSE DETAILED ARE SUCH THAT THE ALTERNATIVE BEARING ASSEMBLY CAN BE ACCOMMODATED WITHIN THE STRUCTURE. c) THE REQUIREMENT TO DESIGN AND DETAIL THE BEARING FOR FUTURE REMOVAL
ABUTMENT B
2000
450
+ 45 -
.007
AND REPLACEMENT.
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No KP2F2734B
SECTION 28
DECK JOINTS
Deck Joints
28
28.1 GENERAL
DECK JOINTS
Joints in bridge decks are provided to perform one or more of the following functions: to allow the deck to expand and contract in length due to changes in temperature and loading or due to the shrinkage and residual creep of the concrete to allow the ends of the deck to rotate as the deck deflects under load to allow for transverse movements on skewed and/or curved bridges to allow for any differential settlement of the substructure
The majority of expansion joints consist of the joint gap, the armour of its edges and a seal or cover for the joint gap. The armour of the joint edges and the joint seal can be supplied either as separate items or as a combined joint system. The edges of small movement deck joints on bridges do not usually have armouring. The function of the joint seal is to provide one or more of the following: to provide a smooth riding or walking surface across the joint gap to prevent penetration of solids into the joint gap to prevent penetration of water through the joint gap
When the specified joint system to be used is not fully waterproof, provision shall be made for the protection of all elements below the joint gap, ie metal parts of girders and/or bearings from corrosion and concrete surfaces from staining.
28.2
DETAILING OF JOINTS
Deck joints currently used by the Authority may be divided into the following various categories:
28.2.1 Small Movement Joints The presentation of these types of joints shall be in accordance with the details shown in RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Numbers RTAB035 and RTAB035A. 28.2.2 Compression Seal Joints The presentation of these types of joints shall be in accordance with the details shown in Figure 28.2.2. 28.2.3 Steel Fabricated Interlocking Finger Joints Generally, where a proprietary item is not used and this type of joint is required, the joint shall be presented on the drawings in a detailed format to facilitate manufacture and installation. Where proprietary items are detailed, the drawings shall include a suitable note to allow the Contractor to use an alternative type of joint providing that all the performance requirements, as stipulated on the drawing, are met.
OTB005
Deck Joints
Figures 28.2.3(a), (b) and (c) illustrate the correct method for detailing steel fabricated interlocking finger joints and associated concrete safety barrier cover plates.
28.2.4 Elastomeric Strip Seal Joints The presentation of these types of joints shall be in accordance with Figure 28.2.4. 28.2.5 Proprietary Aluminium Saw Tooth Joints This type of joint incorporates a compressed rubber seal below the saw teeth to seal the joint gap and examples of this type of joint are CIPEC Wd and ETIC EJ. Use of this type of joint is limited to straight and square bridges as the angles of the fingers are fixed. Use of this type of joint on skewed bridges may present a hazard to traffic. 28.2.6 Modular Joints Modular type joints provide for large movements on larger bridges. The design of the joint must conform to the requirements of RTA Specification B316 and the joint recess shall be detailed completely to suit the type of joint used. Access must be provided beneath the joint for maintenance purposes. If there is insufficient space beneath the joint to provide for access, steel interlocking finger type joints should be used. 28.2.7 Other Joint Types Joints covered by this category include moulded neoprene joints reinforced by plates and angles (Waboflex, Transflex, ICL-NR), combined steel fingers and neoprene support systems (PSC-FT). Presentation of these types of joints shall be in accordance with Figure 28.2.5. In all cases where joint systems are required to be anchored into the concrete by the use of anchor bolts, dowels, cast-in anchors or other similar devices, the details for the location of such anchoring devices shall be clearly shown on the relevant concrete detail sheet. Where the location of anchoring devices causes interference with the desired location of reinforcement in the concrete member, the reinforcement shall be adjusted slightly to accommodate the anchoring devices where appropriate. In all cases, where there exists the possibility that water has the potential to pond behind a joint gap, provision shall be made to drain the ponding water so that the integrity of the joint is not compromised.
28.3
REHABILITATION OF JOINTS
28.3.1 Small Movement Joints The method of rehabilitation of these types of joints shall be in accordance with the details shown in RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Number RTAB035B Repair of Small Movement Joints with Sealants and RTA QA Specification B312. 28.3.2 Other Joint Types The rehabilitation of all bridge deck joints requires careful consideration. In all instances, the relevant WAE drawings for the bridge and the original joint should be obtained prior to the detailing of any joint rehabilitation or replacement and the WAE drawings used when undertaking a detailed inspection of the joint(s) in question and when calculating joint movements taking into account bridge configuration and articulation. Where WAE drawings for the existing joint installation are not available, the joint or joints shall be fully inspected and all necessary site measurements obtained prior to the detailing of
OTB005
Deck Joints
any joint rehabilitation or replacement. Items to be measured accurately include span lengths and material type, location of fixed and expansion bearings, joint opening width, width of joint recess on both sides of the joint and the location of any fixtures used to anchor the joint as appropriate. Careful consideration should also be given to the condition of the fixtures used to anchor the joint as well as the condition of the material immediately adjacent to the joint recess as rehabilitation works to these items may be required to ensure that the joint replacement or rehabilitation will ensure satisfactory operation of the joint for the remaining design life of the bridge.
OTB005
Page 3 of 3
HEAVY DUTY OPEN-CELL COMPRESSION SEAL OR EQUIVALENT
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: INSTALLATION WIDTH = mm mm mm mm
COMPRESSION MOVEMENT = 10mm DEEP RECESS AT END OF DECK TO END OF COMPRESSION MIN 80 SEAL SHALL BE SEALED BEFORE INSTALLATION 5 ACCOMMODATE COMPRESSION SEAL EXPANSION MOVEMENT LENGTH = =
1 -
R300 TYP
EXPANSION JOINT ANGLES SHALL BE DETAILED IN ACCORDANCE WITH FIGURE 28.2.1 WITH THE LOCATIONS OF THE SEAL SUPPORTS BEING ADJUSTED TO SUIT THE PROPOSED SEAL 225 MIN 10 FRONT FACE OF END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE 10 ABUTMENT CURTAIN WALL
SECTION
1 -
1 -
100
200
300mm
SECTION THROUGH EXPANSION JOINT

0 100 200 300 400 500mm
100
50
DENOTES DIMENSION AT 16 C. THE CALCULATED TEMPERATURE

100 50
MOVEMENT OF THE JOINT GAP IS APPROX
mm PER
C.
GENERAL NOTES
SCALES AS SHOWN. INSTALLATION OF SEAL SHALL BE CARRIED OUT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS. ABUTMENTS A AND B
10
FIGURE 28.2.2
2 0
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH
EXPANSION JOINT ANGLES
SPANS ? AND ?
PLAN OF DECK JOINT AT ABUTMENTS A AND B

COMPRESSION JOINT SEAL NOT SHOWN
0 100 200 300 400 500mm
100 50
CHECKED
ISSUE STATUS:
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No KP2F2822
M10 x 110 LONG HILTI HIS-RN ANCHOR (STAINLESS STEEL) OR EQUIVALENT, M10 x 20 LONG STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERSUNK HEAD MACHINE SCREWS INSERTED INTO DIA 18 x 110 DEEP PRE-DRILLED HOLE FILLED WITH HIT-HY INJECTION MORTAR M10 x 20 LONG STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERSUNK HEAD MACHINE SCREWS
ANCHOR BOLT ASSEMBLY SPACING : 59 SPACES AT 180 = 10 620
1 090 1 000 90 810

PARAPET TO BE LEVEL
65
M10 x 20 LONG
130
60 10
STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERSUNK HEAD MACHINE SCREWS
10
ENT B) 6.53% (ABUTM ENT A) 2.33% (ABUTM
10 DEEP RECESS 300
FOOTWAY
COVER PLATE TYPE A 410
45
ANCHOR SPACING: 16 AT 200 = 3 200 3 290
45
15
100 x 16 PLATE ATTACHED
ELEVATION
APPROACH SLAB
TO EVERY SECOND FINGER
CJ
USING M8 x 28 LONG FLAT HEAD CAP SCREWS
CJ CJ
ANCHOR BOLT ASSEMBLY 3 COVER PLATE TYPE C COVER PLATE TYPE B STEEL FABRICATED INTERLOCKING 1 FINGER PLATES COVER PLATE TYPE A 2 DECK ABUTMENT
COVER PLATE TYPE E DECK
5 TYP
3mm THICK STAINLESS STEEL DRAINAGE TROUGH
COVER PLATE AND SPLASH PLATE TYPE D
SECTION
2 -
250
500
750mm
M10 x 20 LONG STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERSUNK HEAD MACHINE SCREWS ABUTMENT M10 x 20 LONG STAINLESS STEEL APPROACH SLAB COUNTERSUNK HEAD MACHINE SCREWS 10 STEEL FACRICATED INTERLOCKING FINGER PLATES AT 1 080 3 SCALE
0
250
125
GENERAL NOTES
200 400 600 800 1000mm
OR AS SHOWN.
PLAN
ABUTMENT B SHOWN, ABUTMENT A SIMILAR
1 -
200 100
2 DENOTES NOMINAL DIMENSIONS AT 16%%dC AT INSTALLATION. THE CALCULATED TEMPERATURE MOVEMENT OF THE JOINT GAP IS APPROX + 13mm PER 5%%dC. DECK EXPANSION JOINT PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR MOVEMENT: 109mm (BRIDGE EXPANSION) 171mm (BRIDGE CONTRACTION) TOP SURFACE OF FINGER PLATES SHALL BE FINISHED WITH 2 COATS OF ANTI-SLIP, COVER PLATE TYPE E
270 70 140 110
830 190 110 140 70 ENT B) 6.53% (ABUTM ENT A) 2.33% (ABUTM
FOOTWAY RECESS TO BE LEVEL
TWO PACK POLYAMIDE CURED HIGH BUILD EPOXY COATING. FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET, SEE SHEETS No ... AND ...
635 445 140 50
90
5
ENT B) 6.53% (ABUTM ENT A) 2.33% (ABUTM
APPROACH SLAB
APPROACH SLAB
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH

M20 x 300 LONG GALVANIZED HIGH STRENGTH STEEL ANCHOR BOLTS TO AS/NZS 1252 WITH SUITABLE FERRULES, PLASTIC SLEEVES AND 130 DECK ABUTMENT CORONET WASHERS. BOLTS SHALL BE GREASED PRIOR TO PLACEMENT. FERRULES MUST BE FINGER TIGHT AND FIRM AGAINST PLASTIC SLEEVE PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE. AFTER CONCRETE HAS ACHIEVED MINIMUM 28 DAY STRENGTH BOLTS SHALL BE TENSIONED TO 145kN. DECK
FIGURE 28.2.3(a)
130
ABUTMENT
EXPANSION JOINTS AND COVER PLATES - SHEET A
SECTION
1 -
SECTION
3 -
PREPARED DESIGN
500 750mm
CHECKED
0 125
250
500
750mm 125
250
DRAWING
250
250
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
KP2F2823A.dgn
75
600
802 (717)
270
3 800 230 20
65 ANCHOR BOLT SPACING: 59 SPACES AT 180 = 10 620 65
330 70
70
477 (388)
75
10 750
350
75
150
323
ANCHOR BOLTS 380

455
168 43
75
166
25
180
M20 x 300 LONG ANCHOR BOLTS DECK ABUTMENT
CHAMFER LAST FERRULE LOCALLY TO SATISFY 350 15 150 COVER REQUIREMENT 350 IF NEEDED
ELEVATION - DECK SIDE
SECTION
4 -
0 125
250
500
750mm
250
4 10 DEEP RECESS 75 DEEP RECESS ANCHOR BOLTS -
DECK 70
GENERAL NOTES
0 200 400 600 800 1000mm
600
SCALE
200 100
OR AS SHOWN.
330
CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B1. MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 50MPa. 330 EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20x20 AND RE-ENTRANT ANGLES FILLETED 20x20 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. (717) 802 70 NCF DENOTES NO CHAMFER OR FILLET. NOMINAL COVER TO REINFORCEMENT NEAREST TO THE CONCRETE SURFACE SHALL BE 35mm UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS LAPS ON ADJACENT BARS ON ANY ABUTMENT FACE SHALL BE STAGGERED (OFFSET) BY NO LESS THAN THE LAP LENGHT. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, THE MINIMUM DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS AND ANCHOR BOLTS 4 BAR SIZE: a) HORIZONTAL BARS WITH >300mm OF CONCRETE CAST BELOW THE BAR: ... b) OTHER BARS: ... 500 400 ... ... 875 700 ... ... ... ... ... ... N12 N16 N20 N24 N28 N32 N36
75 DEEP RECESS
LENGTHS OF LAPS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:
PLAN
ABUTMENT B, SHOWN, ABUTMENT A SIMILAR EXCEPT WHERE IN BRACKETS
REINFORCEMENT MAY BE DISPLACED SLIGHTLY WHERE NECESSARY TO CLEAR ANCHOR BOLTS, GIRDER REINFORCEMENT AND RECESSES. DENOTES DIMENSIONS MEASURED ON GRADE. FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET, SEE SHEET No ...
455
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH

10 750
FIGURE 28.2.3 (b)

ANCHOR BOLTS 75
EXPANSION JOINTS AND COVER PLATES - SHEET B

PREPARED BY
380
11 420
PREPARED DESIGN
CHECKED
ELEVATION - ABUTMENT SIDE
DRAWING
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
KP2F2823B.dgn
DIA 11 HOLE COUNTERSUNK TO 11 SUIT M10 ISO METRIC MACHINE SCREW 70 165 1 000
8 -
130
60
11 10 PLATE 635 CUT FROM 10mm 200 THICK FLOOR PLATE 140
875
200
875
11 -
11 -
50 45
DIA 11 HOLE SPACING: 16 SPACES AT 200 = 3 200 3 290
45 200 DIA 11 HOLE COUNTERSUNK TO SUIT M10 ISO METRIC MACHINE SCREW
PLAN
COVER PLATE TYPE E

2 REQUIRED
98
SECTION
8 -
ELEVATION
8 -
COVER PLATE TYPE C

1 REQUIRED 1 REQUIRED OPPOSITE HAND 10 1 075 85 180 180 180 180 180 90 70 SCALE
100 50
GENERAL NOTES
0 100 200 300 400 500mm
OR AS SHOWN.
DRILL AND TAP 230 210 30 DEEP HOLE TO SUIT M8 ISO METRIC MACHINE SCREW 510 ON EVERY SECOND FINGER FOR BEARING PLATE ATTACHMENT 200 300 70 60 20 240
STEEL PLATE SHALL BE GRADE 250 TO AS/NZS 3678. 510 200 300 10 65 1 075 3 5 SPACES AT 180 = 900 110 50 20 HIGH STRENGTH STEEL NUTS SHALL BE PROPERTY CLASS 8 TO AS/NZS 1252. HIGH STRENGTH STEEL WASHERS SHALL CONFORM TO AS/NZS 1252. 8 COUNTERSUNK HEAD ISO METRIC MACHINE SCREWS SHALL BE PROPERTY CLASS 4.8 TO AS/NZS 1427. 5 BOLTING CATEGORY FOR HIGH STRENGTH STEEL BOLTS SHALL BE 8.8/TF IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS 5100.6. HIGH STRENGTH STEEL BOLTS SHALL BE PROPERTY CLASS 8.8 TO AS/NZS 1252.
22
60
50
75
15
100
230
DIA 10 HOLES DIA 8 TAPPED HOLE

20
100 x 16 PLATE x 1075 LONG
50
R 25
SECTION
11 -
ALL WELDING SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF AS/NZS 1554.1. WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS AS GIVEN IN RTA SPECIFICATION B204. THE WELD CATEGORY SHALL BE SP IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS/NZS 1554.1
40 50mm
45
50 TYP
40 TYP
10 -
SECTION
10 -
PLAN
0 10 20 30 10 5
PLAN
IF NO OTHER CATEGORY SPECIFIED. WELDING SYMBOLS COMPLY WITH AS 1101.3. EDGES TO BE PROTECTIVE TREATED SHALL BE ROUNDED TO A RADIUS OF 1.5mm UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. ALL COMPONENTS, EXCEPT STAINLESS STEEL ITEMS, SHALL BE HOT-DIP
FINGER PLATE
20 REQUIRED PER EXPANSION JOINT 40 TOTAL REQUIRED
BEARING PLATE
20 REQUIRED PER EXPANSION JOINT 40 TOTAL REQUIRED
11 -
GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH RTA SPECIFICATION B241. DAMAGED GALVANIZED SURFACES SHALL BE RENOVATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
6 1 000 130 60 125 60 90 510 325 125 110 60 130
7 1 000 160 90 345 60 125
DIA 11 HOLE COUNTERSUNK TO SUIT M10 ISO METRIC MACHINE SCREW 635 11 -
RTA SPECIFICATION B241. BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS SHALL BE HOT-DIP GALVANIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS 1214. COVER PLATES TYPE A TO D FOR ABUTMENT B SHOWN. COVER PLATES FOR ABUTMENT A SIMILAR EXCEPT OPPOSITE HAND. FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET, SEE SHEET No ...
140
9 50
9 -
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH
559
559

PLAN FIGURE 28.2.3(c)
218 19
805
805
805
180
180
10 PLATE
10 PLATE
805
11
11
11
11
60
100
EXPANSION JOINTS AND COVER PLATES - SHEET C

PREPARED BY
146
DIA 11 HOLE COUNTERSUNK TO SUIT M10 ISO METRIC MACHINE SCREW 6 -
DIA 11 HOLE COUNTERSUNK 7 TO SUIT M10 ISO METRIC MACHINE SCREW
10 PLATE
SECTION ELEVATION
6 -
SECTION
7 -
SECTION
9 -
CHECKED
ELEVATION
COVER PLATE TYPE A

1 REQUIRED 1 REQUIRED OPPOSITE HAND
COVER PLATE TYPE B

1 REQUIRED 1 REQUIRED OPPOSITE HAND
COVER PLATE TYPE D

1 REQUIRED
SHEET No
ISSUE
1 REQUIRED OPPOSITE HAND

177
177
275
275
75
75
9 11
67
11 9
67
AUSFLEX SERIES RECESS TO SUIT DECK JOINT ALUMINIUM EXTRUSION AC-AR TYPE 100F JOINT EXPANSION JOINT WITH 52 ALUMINIUM SIDE RETAINERS AND ELASTOMERIC GLAND OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT 40 INSTALLATION GAP
R
COVER PLATE TYPE A SEE SHEET No
M20 x 180 LONG GALVANIZED HIGH STRENGTH STRUCTURAL ANCHOR BOLTS TO AS 1252 WITH SUITABLE FERRULES.
0 15
COVER PLATE TYPE B SEE SHEET No
100
THREADS OF BOLTS SHALL BE 90 LUBRICATED WITH GREASE PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF FERRULES. PLASTIC SLEEVE FERRULES MUST BE FINGER TIGHT AND FIRM AGAINST PLASTIC SLEEVE PRIOR TO DIA 16 BARS RUNNING LONGITUDINALLY WITH JOINT (TYPICAL PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE. BOLTS SHALL BE TIGHTENED VIA THE SNUG TIGHT PLUS PART TURN METHOD IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS 1511 AFTER ADEQUATE CONCRETE
M10 x 40 LONG HILTI HKD-SR ANCHOR (STAINLESS STEEL) OR EQUIVALENT, TAPPED INTO DIA 12 x 43 DEEP PRE-DRILLED HOLE AND EXPANDED USING THE CORRECT SETTING TOOL AND HAMMER 4 REQUIRED PER COVER PLATE
ANCHOR BOLTS
BOTH SIDES)
SECTION
1 10 RECESS FOR 40 CELLULAR POLYSTYRENE
STRENGTH HAS BEEN ACHIEVED. MINIMUM BOLT TENSION SHALL BE 145kN. BOLTS SHALL BE SET IN PLACE USING A TEMPLATE.
ANCHOR BOLT SPACING: 23 SPACES AT 200 = 4 600 APPROACH SLAB
100 100
ANCHOR BOLT SPACING 23 SPACES AT 200 = 4 600
COVER PLATE (TYP) M10 x 20 LONG STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERSUNK HEAD MACHINE SCREWS
0 100
SECTION
2 200 300mm
2 5 40 35
4 REQUIRED PER COVER PLATE
100
50
COVER PLATE 125 ABUTMENT TYPE B 300
COVER PLATE 300 595 TYPE A 125
1 -
595
35
40
1 -
240
10 CHAMFER
OF TRAFFIC
DIRECTION
10 RECESS
10 RECESS DECK
10 CHAMFER
240
40
40
GENERAL NOTES
2 SCALES
250 125 0 250 500 750mm
OR AS SHOWN.
75 THICK ASPHALT
PERMANENT SEAL ELEMENT TO BE INSTALLED IN ONE LENGTH.
PLAN
ABUTMENT A SHOWN, ABUTMENT B SIMILAR
STEEL PLATES SHALL BE GRADE 250 TO AS 3678. SLOTTED COUNTERSUNK HEAD SCREWS SHALL CONFORM TO AS/NZS 1427. ALL STEEL COMPONENTS EXCEPT STAINLESS STEEL ITEMS SHALL BE HOT-DIP GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SPECIFICATION. EDGES TO BE PROTECTIVE TREATED SHALL BE ROUNDED TO A RADIUS OF 1.5mm UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. DENOTES NOMINAL DIMENSION AT 20 C. THE CALCULATED TEMPERATURE MOVEMENT OF THE JOINT GAP IS APPROX 1mm PER 3 C . JOINTS SHALL BE INSTALLED STRICTLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS. + -
FIGURE 28.2.4
ISSUE
DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH
EXPANSION JOINT DETAILS

CHECKED
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
KP2F2824.dgn
END OF WING WALL 7/12 D500N BARS EXTENDING ALONG FULL LENGTH OF JOINT RECESS 12 D500N BAR AT 150 EXTENDING ALONG FULL LENGTH OF JOINT RECESS 12 D500N BAR AT 150 EXTENDING ALONG FULL LENGTH OF JOINT RECESS WHERE CONTROL BOXES ARE LOCATED THIS BAR SHALL BE CUT MODULAR OR MULTI-ELEMENT 6/12 D500N BARS EXTENDING ALONG FULL LENGTH OF JOINT RECESS
100
END OF PARAPET RECESS SHALL BE FILLED TO DECK

380
TYPE DECK JOINT
LEVEL WITH 50MPa CONCRETE WHERE CONTROL BOXES ARE LOCATED THESE BARS SHALL BE CUT ASPHALT
ABUTMENT REINFORCEMENT
DECK REINFORCEMENT
ABUTMENT 280 ABUTMENT DECK
DECK
SECTION
2 -
ANCHOR BARS WELDED TO JOINT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE JOINT MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATION
DECK REINFORCEMENT EXTENDING INTO DECK JOINT RECESS SHOWN ONLY

0 100 200 300 400 500mm
SECTION
1 -
100 50
GENERAL NOTES
SCALES AS SHOWN. A TYPICAL MODULAR TYPE DECK JOINT HAS BEEN DETAILED. ANCHORAGE DETAILS, INCLUDING ANCHOR BARS, PLATES AND REINFORCEMENT 200 85
DECK REINFORCEMENT EXTENDING INTO DECK JOINT RECESS SHOWN ONLY

0 100 200 300 400 500mm
WITHIN THE DECK JOINT RECESS AND CAST-IN SUPPORTS FOR CONTROL BOXES, MAY BE VARIED TO SUIT THE PROPOSED JOINT, HOWEVER THE ANCHORAGE CAPACITY SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN THAT DETAILED. DETAILS OF ANY PROPOSED ALTERNATIVE MODULAR JOINT SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE PRINCIPAL AT THE TIME OF TENDER.
100 50
NORTHERN SIDE 1 TYPE DECK JOINT
SOUTHERN SIDE 200
DENOTES NOMINAL DIMENSIONS ASSUMED FOR A TYPICAL MODULAR TYPE JOINT. THESE DIMENSIONS MAY VARY, DEPENDING ON THE PROPOSED JOINT. DENOTES NOMINAL DIMENSION AT 16 200 C. THE WIDTH OF THE JOINT SHALL
MODULAR OR MULTIELEMENT
c OF CONTROL BOXES L
2 -
A -
285
BE ADJUSTMENT FOR THE SUPERSTRUCTURE DURING INSTALLATION. + CALCULATED JOINT MOVEMENTS ARE 2.75mm PER+ C. 1 MODULAR DECK JOINT PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR MOVEMENT: (i) +120mm (JOINT EXPANSION) RELATIVE TO DIMENSIONS AT TIME OF JOINT INSTALLATION
465
3% 3%
185
-120mm (JOINT CONTRACTION)
(ii) MAXIMUM CLEAR GAP BETWEEN TRANSVERSE RAIL MEMBERS = 85mm. DECK JOINT ANCHORAGE REINFORCEMENT EXTENDING FROM THE DECK AND 285 DECK JOINT RECESS ABUTMENT INTO THE RECESS SHALL BE DETAILED BY THE DECK JOINT MANUFACTURER TO SUIT THE PROPOSED DECK JOINT. DETAILS OF THE BAR DIMENSIONS AND ARRANGEMENT IN RELATION TO THE JOINT ANCHOR BARS AND
DETAIL
A -
PLATES SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE PRINCIPAL PRIOR TO CASTING ABUTMENT SEGMENTS. STEEL PLATE SHALL CONFORM TO AS 3678 GRADE 250.
1 -
SOUTHERN PARAPET ABUTMENT A AND B
STEEL BAR SHALL CONFORM TO AS 3679 GRADE 250. ALL STEEL SURFACES OF THE DECK JOINT (INCLUDING ANCHOR BARS AND PLATES) SHALL BE COATED WITH AN INORGANIC ZINC SILICATE PRIMER AFTER
DECK JOINT AT ABUTMENT A

0 1000 2000 3000mm
2 200 100
200
400
600
800
1000mm
FABRICATION (SEE SPECIFICATION). 85 200

1000
500
FIGURE 28.2.5
SOUTHERN SIDE MODULAR OR MULTI-ELEMENT TYPE DECK JOINT A 1 2 6% 6% 465
cOF CONTROL BOXES L
NORTHERN SIDE ISSUE B DATE
REVISION
PREP CHECK AUTH

200 200 185 285
EXPANSION JOINTS
285 DECK JOINT RECESS
DETAIL
1 2 -
B PREPARED DESIGN CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS
DECK JOINT AT ABUTMENT B

0 1000 2000 3000mm
NORTHERN PARAPET ABUTMENT B

0 200 400 600 800 1000mm
DRAWING ISSUE STATUS:

1000
500
200 100
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No KP2F2825
SECTION 29
MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK
RTA Structural Drafting Manual and Detailing Manual
Miscellaneous Metalwork
29 MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK
29.1 GENERAL
Miscellaneous metalwork items used in bridge construction include : Protection Angles (at abutments and approach slabs) Expansion Joint Angles Dowels Anchor Bolt Assemblies Bearing Attachment Plates Bearing Cover Plates Concrete Safety Barrier Cover Plates (for expansion joints) Each of the above items requires adequate detailing for both fabrication and installation and as such, provision shall be made on the relevant concrete detail sheet, or, if required, on a separate sheet. When detailing items for fabrication, care shall be taken to observe the following : Materials shall be designated in accordance with the relevant Australian Standard eg Steel plate shall be to AS/NZS 3678-300 Steel sections shall be to AS/NZS 3679.1-300 Overall dimensions, as well as dimensions for location of holes, hole diameters, corner radii and the thicknesses of plates etc shall be shown. Metalwork dimensions shall be given to the nearest 0.1mm for cross section dimensions and to the nearest 1mm for length. Welding symbols comply with with AS 1101.3 All welding shall comply with the requirements of AS/NZS 1554.1 Weld category shall be SP in accordance with AS/NZS 1554.1 unless GP welds are specified by the designer A suitable note to describe the required protective treatment of items eg Protection angle assemblies shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. The total number required of each item shall be shown.
General Notes for the fabrication and protective treatment of minor fabricated steel items are provided on RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB029 and where appropriate, shall be used. These notes shall be supplemented by additional notes, if required, located on the sheet where these items are detailed. Specific requirements for each of the above items are described in the following sub-clauses.
29.2
PROTECTION ANGLES AND EXPANSION JOINT ANGLES

The outline of protection angles and expansion joint angles shall be shown in-situ on the various views and sections on the relevant concrete detail sheets. Ideally, the fabrication details for the angle assemblies should be shown on the sheet for that part of the structure
OTB005
Page 1 of 4
that the assembly will be located on. Where the detailing of the assembly is not included on the relevant concrete detail sheet a suitable note shall be placed on the concrete detail sheet to reference the detailing of the assembly eg For details of protection angles see Sheet No 12. Figure 29.2.1 shows the correct method for the detailing of protection angles and and expansion joint angles. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Number RTAB030 provides details of the correct size and location for shear connectors, holes for formwork attachment and air holes (in accordance with Chief Bridge Engineer Circular Number 90/7). In the case of skewed bridges, the ends of the protection angles and expansion joint angles shall be carefully examined to ensure that they do not interfere with the correct placement of concrete safety barrier reinforcement. Where interference is caused by leaving the ends of protection angles square, the ends of protection angles shall be cut to match the skew angle.
29.3
DOWELS AND DOWEL CAP ASSEMBLIES

Dowel bars shall be fully detailed on the concrete drawing for that part of the structure in which they will be located. The location and projection of the dowel bar in relation to the concrete surface shall be detailed. Alternatively, dowel bars may be fixed into formed holes and in these cases the diameter, depth and location of the holes shall be clearly detailed in conjunction with the details of the dowel bars themselves. Where dowel bars are fixed into formed holes, a suitable note referring to the filling of the holes shall also be included. The correct method of detailing dowel bar cap assemblies for plank deck bridges with spans up to and including 18.0 metres and standard approach slab applications is shown in RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB036 and it must be used where appropriate. For other applications, refer to Chief Bridge Engineer Circular 98/15.
29.4
BOLT ASSEMBLIES
Bolt assemblies need not be fully detailed where the assembly being used is comprised of standard components, provided that all the necessary details of the assembly, ie thread length, nut or nuts and washers etc are stated on the drawing with the component that they are required to anchor or fix. Where non standard bolt assemblies are used and cannot be adequately described, a general view of the assembly shall be shown with all components fully labelled, in close proximity to the item that they are required to anchor or fix, where this is possible. Where this is not possible, a suitable note referencing the location of the bolt assembly detail shall be given and a general view of the assembly shall be shown. eg For details of anchor bolt assembly, see Sheet No 12
Where bolts are cast into the concrete, the location, length and projection of the bolt with relation to the concrete surface shall be shown on the concrete detail sheet for that part of the structure that the assembly is located in..
OTB005
Page 2 of 4
In the case of anchor bolts, they can be either cast-in or placed in formed holes. Where anchor bolts are to be placed into formed holes, the location, diameter and depth of the holes shall be clearly detailed on the concrete drawing together with a suitable note referring to the filling of the formed holes subsequent to bolt placement. Where there are a large amount of differing bolt types and lengths required, it is preferred that a Bolting Schedule (in the form of a table) be included in the drawings. The Bolting Schedule should contain all necessary information about all of the bolt assemblies required, including Property Class, Bolting Category, length, thread length if non standard, nut type or types, washer type and the number required for each complete assembly. Where this method is used it is appropriate to refer to bolt assemblies on the drawings as Bolt Assembly Type A etc.
29.5
BEARING ATTACHMENT PLATES

Fabrication details for both top and bottom attachment plates shall be detailed with the bearing to which they will be attached. The method of fixing bottom attachment plates to the structure varies and may be any of the following: Cast directly into the concrete Fixed into formed holes by the use of dowels welded to the bottom surface Fixed to cast-in anchor bolts In each of the above cases, the anchorage requirements shall be shown and a suitable reference shall be made on the concrete detail sheet.
The fixing of top attachment plates is dependant upon the type of structure in which they will be located and may be grouped into two broad categories: For concrete bridges, the top attachment plate is normally bolted to the bearing and fixed directly into that part of the structure immediately above the bearing by the use of dowels attached to the top of the plate. For steel girder bridges, the top attachment plate may be either welded or bolted to the girder and in this case the attachment shall be fully detailed on the girder sheets.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the holes provided in the attachment plates for the attachment of the bearings match those of the bearing to be used. In all cases where attachment plates are used, the reinforcement in the substructure or superstructure item, as appropriate, shall be carefully examined to ensure the placing of both the attachment plate and the reinforcement can be achieved.
29.6
BEARING COVER PLATES

Where bearing cover plates are used, fabrication and erection details should generally be shown on the relevant concrete detail sheet. Where this is not possible, a suitable cross reference shall be given eg For details of bearing cover plates, see Sheet No 15
29.7
OTB005
CONCRETE SAFETY BARRIER COVER PLATES FOR EXPANSION JOINTS

Concrete safety barrier cover plates for expansion joints shall be provided where the expansion joint gap, due to calculated ultimate effects, is greater than 50mm. Where possible, the cover plates shall be detailed on the same sheet as the expansion joint to which they relate and as a general rule they shall be detailed to be fixed normal to the concrete safety barrier regardless of the grade on the deck. Fabrication details for concrete safety barrier cover plates shall include all the necessary dimensions and bend radii together with hole diameters for the selected method of fixing cover plates to the structure. Details for the fixing of the cover plates to the structure ie cast-in ferrules, cast-in anchors etc shall be provided on the appropriate concrete detail sheet. Cover plates shall be detailed to ensure that once fitted, the top surface of the cover plate is flush with the concrete surface on each side of the joint which it covers. Recesses provided in the concrete for cover plates shall be deep enough to accommodate the plate thickness used. The minimum plate thickness for expansion joint cover plates shall be 10mm unless a thicker plate is specified by the design engineer. See Figure 28.2.3 (c) for the required level of detailing for concrete safety barrier cover plates.
OTB005
Page 4 of 4
1 -
105
SPACING OF STUDS AND10 AIR BLEED HOLES : 17 SPACES AT 250 = 4250
90 50
90 x 90 x 10 ANGLE
10 AIR BLEED HOLES
25
10 AIR HOLE ROUNDED TO R10
40
50
150mm
16 x 150 LONG 16 FORMWORK ATTACHMENT HOLES 170 230 16 HOLE SPACING : 2 SPACES AT 2125 = 4250 SPACING OF STUDS : 16 SPACES AT 250 = 4000 4465 STUD WELDED SHEAR CONNECTORS 16 FORMWORK ATTACHMENT HOLE
SECTION
1 -
1 -
PLAN
0 50
100
PROTECTION ANGLE
..REQUIRED 2 -
50
25
105
SPACING OF STUDS, MACHINE SCREWS AND10 AIR BLEED HOLES : 17 SPACES AT 250 = 4250 90 50 25 10 AIR HOLE ROUNDED TO R10
90 x 150 x 10 ANGLE
10 AIR BLEED HOLES
40
60 120
90 16 FORMWORK ATTACHMENT HOLES 170 230 16 x 150 LONG 16 HOLE SPACING : 2 SPACES AT 2125 = 4250 STUD WELDED SPACING OF STUDS : 16 SPACES AT 250 = 4000 4465 SHEAR CONNECTORS MACHINE SCREWS TO AS/NZS 1427 2 16 FORMWORK ATTACHMENT HOLE 20 x 6 FLAT x 4465
PLAN
M6 x 35 - 4.8 SLOTTED CSK HEAD, HEXAGON NUT ISO 4032-M6-8 AND
EXPANSION JOINT ANGLE

.. REQUIRED AT ABUTMENT A .. REQUIRED AT ABUTMENT B
6mm STEEL WASHER
SECTION
2 -
DIMENSION IS BASED ON 100 HIGH COMPRESSION JOINT SEAL. ACTUAL DIMENSIONS SHALL BE ADJUSTED IF NECESSARY TO MATCH THE ACTUAL HEIGHT OF SEAL BEFORE FABRICATION OF THE EXPANSION JOINT ANGLE.
0 50 100 150mm
50
25
150
FIGURE 29.2.1
CAD KP2F2921
SECTION 30
BRIDGE WIDENINGS
Bridge Widenings
30 BRIDGE WIDENINGS
30.1 GENERAL
Drawings for bridge widenings prepared by the Authority or by Consultants for Authority shall follow the same format as that for a new bridge with the set of drawings being in the order as stated in Clause 4.4 of this Manual. The description of the work on the cover sheet and in the title block on each sheet shall include the word "WIDENING" as shown in figures 30.1.1 and 30.1.2 respectively. The orientation of the General Arrangement sheet for a structure that is widened on one side only shall be such that the widening is shown on the Elevation face. In some cases this will necessitate reversing the conventional rules of orientation as stated in Clause 18.5 of this Manual and it is as illustrated in Figure 30.1.2. . When detailing bridge widenings, it is unnecessary to fully detail the existing structure, however sufficient detail shall be shown and the treatment fully described in order that the extent of the works can be clearly ascertained.
30.2
DRAWINGS
The General Arrangement shall be prepared in accordance with Section 21 of this Manual. Dimensioning of the widened work shall be shown in relation to a Control Line and NOT from the centreline of the existing bridge or any part thereof. Detail drawings shall show the following : All necessary details for the construction of the new work Details of the joint between the existing structure and the new work All sections of the existing structure which are to be demolished as well as the dimensions for and extent of the demolition A note stating that all dimensions shall be verified on site and that they shall be adjusted to suit the actual Work-as-Executed dimensions of the existing structure Stages of construction and widths available for traffic at each stage Provision and removal of any temporary barriers
30.3
LINEWORK AND SHADING

The existing structure shall be depicted by a thin double dashed line and the extent of the widening shall be depicted by a thick continuous line as defined in Section 7 of this Manual. Parts of the existing structure to be demolished shall be depicted by hatching. The method of depicting work to be demolished shall be noted on the General Arrangement sheet under the General Notes and shall be consistent throughout the entire set of the drawings.
OTB005
Page 1 of 1

MAIN ROAD No 220 ALLANDALE ROAD
USE 10mm TEXT
CITY OF CESSNOCK
USE 20mm TEXT CLOSED TEXT
BRIDGE OVER POKOLBIN CREEK

AT 5.0km NORTH OF CESSNOCK
WIDENING
USE 10mm TEXT
USE 5mm TEXT
1 2 COVER SHEET GENERAL ARRANGEMENT PILES AND PILE LAYOUT ABUTMENTS CONCRETE - SHEET A ABUTMENTS CONCRETE - SHEET B ABUTMENTS CONCRETE - SHEET C ABUTMENT A REINFORCEMENT - SHEET A ABUTMENT A REINFORCEMENT - SHEET B ABUTMENT A REINFORCEMENT - SHEET C ABUTMENT B REINFORCEMENT - SHEET A ABUTMENT B REINFORCEMENT - SHEET B 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 ABUTMENT B REINFORCEMENT - SHEET C PIERS
USE 5mm TEXT
100
3 4 5 6 7
9m SPAN PSC PLANK DECK - SHEET A DECK - SHEET B DECK - SHEET C DECK - SHEET D CYCLIST RAILING - PANELS CYCLIST RAILING - DETAILS BAR SHAPES DIAGRAM WIDENING: 2006 DESIGN FILE No: 6M2049 DESIGN STANDARD: AS 5100 - BRIDGE DESIGN TRAFFIC BARRIER PERFORMANCE LEVEL: REGULAR EXISTING BRIDGE: 1964 BRIDGE No: 1656 REGISTRATION No OF PLANS: 0220 085 BC 0111
Penguin under Licence to RTA by Lands Department NSW
8 9
100
10 11
USE 3.5mm TEXT
BRIDGE SITE
5mm DIA MIN
FIGURE 30.1.1
LOCALITY PLAN
USE 5mm TEXT THE BRIDGE SITE IS APPROXIMATELY 220km BY ROAD FROM SYDNEY USE 3.5mm TEXT
USE 7mm TEXT
USE 5mm TEXT USE 2.5mm TEXT
CAD No KP2F3011.dgn
0220 085 BC 0956
TO BRANXTON
W BEAM TO THRIE BEAM TRANSITION IN ACCORDANCE WITH RTA DRAWING No MD.R132.B04.A (TYP) 9 450
28 050 9 150 9 450
FROM CESSNOCK
UPSTREAM 0.067% 500 6 105
12 630 11 630 5 525 CONTROL LINE MC00
DOWNSTREAM 500
2 160 NOM
3 945 NOM
VARIES OF EXISTING BRIDGE 970 TO 1015
1.
TO
R 2 000 YEAR HFL RL 58.420
100 YEAR HFL RL 57.206 (INCLUDING AFFLUX)
R
1. 5 T O
WIDENING
RLs ALONG EXISTING
EXISTING GUARD RAILS AND KERB TO BE DEMOLISHED
APPROX
EXISTING
SURFACE
DECK GUTTER FLOW LINE
LEVEL
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC BARRIER 75 THICK 100 CONDUIT ASPHALT 3.0% STAGE 2 650
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC BARRIER STAGE 1 NEW CONCRETE
3.0%
2.5%
OVERLAY
CONTRACT LEVEL RL 47.500 END OF DECK 59.445 END OF DECK ABUTMENT B ABUTMENT B OF PIER 2 OF PIER 1 WIDENING EXISTING
CONTRACT LEVEL RL 47.500 END OF DECK 59.463 END OF DECK ABUTMENT A ABUTMENT A WIDENING EXISTING
VARIES 10 TO 45
CONTRACT LEVEL RL 45.000 SPAN 3 59.451
PSC PLANKS
DATUM RL 44.000 DESIGN SURFACE LEVEL ON CONTROL LINE MC00 APPROX EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL ON CONTROL LINE MC00
SPAN 2 59.457
SPAN 1
COLUMN STAGE 1 STAGE 2
59.444
56.5
56.5
54.9
53.5
56.5
59.464
56.5
APPROX
SURFACE
LEVEL
5km 232.820
232.565
223.370
214.220
205.000
CHAINAGE IN CONTROL LINE MC00
204.770
PILE
ELEVATION
58.00 57.00 56.00 55.00 54.00 54.00 55.00 56.00 57.00 58.00
SECTION
1 -
1000
2000
3000mm
G GASMAIN
1000
500
WATERMAIN W W W W W W W 1 W W W W W W W W W W
GENERAL NOTES
0 1 2 3 4 5m
SCALE
1 0.5
OR AS SHOWN.
DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES
59.00
59.00
CHAINAGES AND REDUCED LEVELS ARE IN METRES REDUCED LEVELS ARE RELATED TO AUSTRALIAN HEIGHT DATUM. COMBINED SYSTEM OF WEARING SURFACE AND SUITABLE BITUMINOUS
EXISTING GUARD FENCE
WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE. CH 5 205.000 RL 59.464 CH 5 214.220 CH 5 232.820 RL 59.444 CH 5 232.565 RL 59.445 CH 5 223.370 RL 59.457 RL 59.451 N 6 371 036.335 E 345 285.734 OF EXISTING BRIDGE
NAME PLATE FOR EXISTING UTILITIES SEE DRAWING REGISTRATION No 0220 085 BA 3799. CH 5 204.770 RL 59.463
FOR CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE SEE SHEET No 6
CONTROL LINE MC00
BEARING 338%%d 43 44.1" ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH
CONTROL LINE MC01

RL 59.068 RL 59.100 RL 59.094 RL 59.087
EXISTING MEMORIAL CROSS TO BE RELOCATED

MAIN ROAD No 220 CITY OF CESSNOCK
BRIDGE OVER POKOLBIN CREEK AT 5.0 km NORTH OF CESSNOCK

59.00
NAME PLATE
59.00
WIDENING GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

PREPARED BY CLIENT HUNTER REGIONAL OFFICE 59 DARBY STREET NEWCASTLE LOCKED BAG 30 NEWCASTLE NSW 2300 PHONE (02) 4924-0240 FACSIMILE (02) 4924-0344
POKOLBIN CREEK
2 TO 1
1.5 T O1
S
2 TO 1
1.5
TO
EXISTING BRIDGE S S S S S
58.00
S SEWERMAIN
PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055
58.00
W
1 W W W W W W W W
PREPARED DESIGN
CHECKED
WATERMAIN W W W W W W W W
0220 085 BC 0956

RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: FOR CONSTRUCTION
DRAWING
1656
57.00
56.00
55.00
54.00
54.00
55.00
56.00
57.00
SEWER MANHOLE
PLAN
FIGURE 30.1.2
SENIOR MANAGER, BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS MANAGER, BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No KP2F3012.dgn
SECTION 31
BRIDGE SAFETY SCREENS
Bridge Safety Screens
31
31.1 GENERAL
BRIDGE SAFETY SCREENS
The bridge safety screen types in current use by the Authority include: Vertical or Curved Outwards - placed behind traffic barrier railings close to the traffic face Curved Inwards- placed behind pedestrian barrier railings on bridges with footways Enclosed - used on pedestrian bridges over roads and railways as required by RTA Technical Direction No TD 2002/RS02 and may incorporate handrailings. A typical example is shown in Figure 31.1. The minimum requirements for safety screens are set out in AS 5100.1 Clause 12.3 and in RTA Technical Direction No TD 2002/RS02. Safety screens can be included in either the design of new bridges or specifically designed for retro-fitting to existing bridge stocks. Typical examples of retrofitting safety screens to existing structures are shown in Figure 31.4.1.
31.2
GEOMETRY
31.2.1 Grades and Vertical Curves Posts for all types of bridge safety screens shall be perpendicular to the top of the concrete safety barrier or footway surface on which they are located in all cases where the longitudinal grade on the structure does not exceed 4% at any point. Posts for all types of bridge safety screens that are located on a bridge structure where the longitudinal grade on the structure exceeds 4% at any point, shall be detailed to be truly vertical for the full extent of the safety screen. Posts for all types of bridge safety screens that are located on pedestrian structures shall be detailed to satisfy the client's requirements with respect to shape, height and orientation, however the requirements of RTA Technical Direction TD 2002/RS02 and AS 5100.1 shall be strictly adhered to in all cases. 31.2.2 Height Height requirements shall be in accordance with AS 5100.1 Clause 12.3 and RTA Technical Direction No TD 2002/RS02. 31.2.3 Horizontal Curves As safety screens are made up of individual posts or frames, to which moderately flexible mesh panels are attached, the necessity to allow for offsets in panels around large radius curves is not usually warranted. 31.2.4 Curvature of Posts and Screens Safety screen adjacent to carriageways must provide clearances as specified in Section 6 of the RTA Road Design Guide. This may be achieved by curving the posts and mesh panels outwards. Excessive curvature of posts and panels shall be avoided so that the functionality of the safety screen is not compromised.
OTB005
Page 1 of 4
31.3
JOINTS
Where top steel mesh panels overlap bottom steel mesh panels, the minimum lap shall be 150 millimetres. Adjacent mesh panels shall be affixed to each other using suitable stainless steel ties or equivalent, at 300 mm maximum centres. The preferred method of interconnecting mesh panels at posts, in the longitudinal direction, is shown in Figure 31.3. A typical lap detail is shown in Figure 31.3. On simply supported bridges and continuous bridges where expansion and or contraction joints are detailed, a joint in the safety screens shall be provided at each and every joint in the deck. Joints between mesh panels, provided at these locations shall be detailed in accordance with the example shown in Figure 31.3.
31.4
POST SPACING
Post spacing for bridge safety screens shall not exceed 3 metres under any circumstances.
31.4.1 Retrofitting application requirements Where safety screens are retrofitted to existing bridge structures, safety screen elements shall not be connected to any existing bridge furniture (ie traffic barrier railings or pedestrian railings). See Figure 31.4.1. For aesthetic considerations, post spacing for bridge safety screens shall be as even as is practical to avoid clashing with any existing bridge furniture. The location of all existing bridge furniture shall be obtained from Work-As-Executed drawings for the subject structure. Where Work-As-Executed drawings for the subject structure are not available, the approved design drawings for the structure shall be used to locate existing bridge furniture and an appropriate note added to the drawing stating that the location of existing bridge furniture shall be confirmed on site prior to the commencement of fabrication and installation of the safety screen posts. Should there be any doubt regarding the location of existing bridge furniture, the client shall be requested to provide an electronic site survey of the structure, at their cost, to enable posts to be located appropriately. Survey items should include: Existing anchor bolt locations for both traffic and pedestrian railings Inside and outside top edge of concrete parapets Outside top edge of concrete at footways (if applicable) Existing lighting column locations (if applicable) Expansion joint locations and open width Safety screen posts shall be located to ensure that the minimum clear distance between existing bridge traffic barrier railing and/or pedestrian barrier railing base plates and the safety screen post base plate is not less than 75mm. Safety screen furniture installed along the outer edge of bridge structure adjacent to pedestrian barrier railings shall be placed to ensure that the minimum clear distance between the pedestrian barrier railing and the safety screen is not less than 80mm.
OTB005
Page 2 of 4
The base plate for safety screen posts shall not protrude any further into the footway area than existing bridge furniture to ensure that they do not cause a trip hazard to pedestrian traffic. Where post spacing at the ends of structures is different to that adopted for the majority of the structure, the post spacing shall be reduced rather than increased and if necessary an intermediate post spacing shall be used to reduce the visual impact of the change in spacing.
31.5
STEEL MESH PANEL SIZES

A typical top steel mesh panel, incorporating transom beams, is detailed in Figure 31.3. A typical bottom steel mesh panel, incorporating transom beams and an added leg to enable the attachment of the panel to the concrete surface, is detailed in Figure 31.3. Railway authorities may require a 25mm x 25mm mesh at certain locations on bridges over railways, rather than the typical 50mm x 50mm mesh shown in Figure 31.3.
31.6
FIXING OF STEEL MESH PANELS

Mesh panels shall be affixed to posts at a spacing not exceeding 300mm using Smorgon ARC product code CLUG fasteners or suitable equivalent. Fasteners shall be affixed to posts using Vandal Proof Stainless Steel Self Drilling Fasteners, 6mm diameter or as requested by the client. Mesh panels shall be affixed to the top concrete surface of parapets or footways at a spacing not exceeding 300mm using Panduit Stainless Steel Ties, product Code MLT1S-CP or suitable equivalent. Stainless steel ties shall be affixed to concrete surfaces using M6 x 50 Dynabolts, Mushroom Head Stainless Steel Spikes 6.5mm diameter x 50 long or suitable equivalent.
31.7
TERMINATION OF SAFETY SCREENS AT ENDS OF STRUCTURE

The termination point for bridge safety screens is dependent upon actual site conditions and client requirements. Consideration shall be given to road/bridge geometry, proximity to road or railway beneath structure, other structures landing on the bridge (eg stairs and ramps) as well as any other consideration requested or directed by the client. Clause 1.1 of RTA Technical Direction TD 2002/RS02 states that the barriers on the overbridge shall extend at least 6m beyond the width of the underlying roadway pavement and shoulders. Consideration may be given to enclosing the full length of the overbridge. For skewed bridge crossings, the 6m minimum extension of the safety screens beyond the road shoulder is measured perpendicular to the road shoulder and not along the safety screen.
31.8
END TREATMENT
The end treatment of the safety screen shall be in accordance with client requests where it is possible and practical within the overall design of the safety screen.
The preferred method of attachment of end mesh panels to end posts is shown in Figure 31.3.
31.9
APPLICATION OF DECORATIVE PANELS

Bridge safety screens may, at the client request, carry additional steel mesh panels for decorative purposes. Where decorative screens are to be added to safety screens, additional design and detailing of posts and connections are required as nominal standard designs do not allow for the additional loading caused by the attachment of decorative steel mesh panels. Each case shall be examined separately and detailed accordingly.
31.10
ALTERNATIVE SAFETY SCREENS

The requirements in this section refer to typical galvanised mesh screens used by the Authority. Urban design requirements may require alternative screens to be used. Where applicable, the requirements for these alternative screens shall generally be in accordance with information provided in this section.
OTB005
Page 4 of 4
CRADLE CUT AND BENT FROM 25 x 5 FLAT x 90 LONG
HANDRAIL
25
90 40 25
M10 x 25 LONG TEK SCREW 2 -
DIA 12 HOLES ON OF CRADLE
TO TOP OF DECK
1 000
151
14
90%
%d
65
21 6
87
211
1 510 1 500
1 510 1 500
211
STEEL MESH SHALL BE AFFIXED TO THE CONCRETE SURFACE AT 300 MAXIMUM CENTRES USING DIA 6 x 50 DYNABOLTS OR EQUIVALENT AND PANDUIT STAINLESS STEEL TIES, PRODUCT CODE MLT1S-CP
CUT FROM 59 x 8 FLAT x 216 LONG
DETAIL
B 20 THICK MOTAR PAD
NAME PLATE 1480 ATTACHMENT PLATE B ON LAST FRAME
OR EQUIVALENT, BENT AS REQUIRED
1 233 (TYP)
FRAME CUT AND BENT FROM 999 (TYP) 125 BT 18.7
550
1 -
1 -
A ANCHOR BOLT SEE DETAIL
FRAME ASSEMBLY - ELEVATION

0 125 250 500 750mm
FORMED RECESSES APPROX 80 DEEP TO ALLOW ADJUSTMENT OF SAFETY SCREEN FRAMES. RECESSES SHALL BE FILLED
250
WITH CEMENT GROUT OR MORTAR AND 15 NOM DEEP MORTAR PAD CONSTRUCTED AT BASE PLATE AFTER FINAL ALIGNMENT OF SAFETY SCREEN FRAMES
100 50
DETAIL
130 65 GP 22 HOLES 220 x 6 PLATE x 320 LONG 20 ATTACHMENT PLATE FOR NAME PLATE 90 65
16 PLATE SAFETY SCREEN FRAME 30 3 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH
FIGURE 31.1
70
PREPARED BY
20
125BT18.7 DRILL AND TAP 20 140 320 140 20 30 4 HOLES TO SUIT M10 BRASS SCREWS TYP
CHECKED
ATTACHMENT PLATE DETAIL

1 REQUIRED
0 100 200 300mm
SECTION
1 MANAGER, BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS
SHEET No
ISSUE
100
50
CAD No KP2F311.dgn
220
90
70
200
24 59
R 1 0 75
TYP
FRAME
BRACKET ARM 2 73 73
TYP
OF FRAME
VIEW
2 -
M20 HIGH-STRENGTH STEEL NUT PROPERTY CLASS 8 TO AS/NZS 1252
FLAT ROUND WASHER FOR HIGH-STRENGTH M20 BOLT TO AS/NZS 1252
M20 ISO METRIC HEXAGON THIN NUT PROPERTY CLASS 04 TO AS 1112.4
M20 x 200 HIGH-STRENGTH STEEL BOLT PROPERTY CLASS 8.8 TO AS/NZS 1252 THREAD LENGTH 80
ANCHOR BOLT ASSEMBLY

584 REQUIRED
0 100 200 300mm
GENERAL NOTES
0 50 100 150mm
A -
SCALE
50 25
OR AS SHOWN.
FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET SEE SHEET No 45.
MESH PANELS SHALL BE AFFIXED TO POSTS 3000 45 PANDUIT STAINLESS STEEL 5 TIES AT 300 CTS SPACING OR SUITABLE EQUIVALENT INSIDE FACE OF STRUCTURE END PANELS SHALL BE 250 MESH PANEL 5 CUT ON SITE TO SUIT END STEEL MESH SHEETS SHALL BE FINISHED AS SHOWN AT 300mm (MAX) CENTRES USING SMORGAN ARC PRODUCT CODE CLUG OR SUITABLE EQUIVALENT.
4 WIRES AT 50 x 50 SPACING
185
20(200)
50 x 50 x
4 STEEL MESH STRIP 200 WIDE
TO BE FILLET WELDED TO INSIDE FACE 1570 700 OF 50 x 50 x 5 SHS
TYPICAL CONNECTION AT INTERMEDIATE POSTS

0 50 100 150mm
MESH TERMINATION AT ENDS TYPICAL CONNECTION
50
25
185
TOP STEEL MESH PANEL VANDAL PROOF STAINLESS STEEL SELF DRILLING FASTENERS ALL POSTS SHALL BE FITTED WITH A SUITABLE UV RESISTANT
c OF SHS L
250
POLYPROPYLENE CAP 150 LAP - TYP
5 -
SECTION
5 50 x 50 x 4 STEEL MESH PANEL
WIRES OF MESH TO BE FIXED USING PANDUIT STAINLESS STEEL TIES
ELEVATION
TOP STEEL MESH PANEL DETAIL

?? REQUIRED
FASTENER
OR EQUIVALENT BOTTOM STEEL MESH PANEL
TOP OF POST
BOTTOM OF POST SIMILAR
MIDDLE OF POST STEEL MESH PANEL ATTACHMENT DETAIL AT POST TYPE TPA AND TPB
POST TYPE TPA SHOWN POST TYPE TPB SIMILAR
0 50 100 150mm
STEEL MESH PANEL ATTACHMENT DETAIL

3000 45 6 -
50
25
PANDUIT STAINLESS STEEL 250 TIES AT 300 CTS SPACING OR SUITABLE EQUIVALENT FIXED LOOSELY TO ALLOW 185 MOVEMENT OF PANELS THE VERTICAL LEG OF MESH PANELS MAY BE REMOVED LOCALLY AT FIXTURE LOCATION TO ALLOW MOVEMENT. BURRS WITH RTA SPECIFICATION B241. SHALL BE REMOVED FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET, SEE SHEET No 2. MESH PANEL ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH
4 WIRES AT 50 x 50 SPACING
GENERAL NOTES
THE HORIZONTAL LEG OF MESH PANELS SHALL BE AFFIXED TO POSTS AT 300mm (MAX) CENTRES USING SMORGAN ARC PRODUCT CODE CLUG OR SUITABLE EQUIVALENT SCALE
100 50 0 100 200 300mm
OR AS SHOWN.
DENOTES END PANELS SHALL BE CUT ON SITE TO SUIT DAMAGED GALVANIZED SURFACES SHALL BE RENOVATED IN ACCORDANCE
1570
700
FIGURE 31.3
185 50 x 50 x 4 STEEL MESH STRIP 200 WIDE WELDED TO INSIDE FACE OF SHS
250
PREPARED BY
TYPICAL CONNECTION AT EXPANSION JOINTS

132
0 50 100 150mm
6 50 25
CHECKED
SECTION ELEVATION
6 -
BOTTOM STEEL MESH PANEL DETAIL

?? REQUIRED
SHEET No
ISSUE
CAD No
KP2F313.dgn
POST 100 100
1 -
POST
1 -
POST 100 100
2 -
POST
2 -
E 4
12 VENT HOLE
TYP 12 VENT HOLE SPACER PLATE 12 VENT HOLE
TYP 12 VENT HOLE SPACER PLATE
SPACER PLATE L 200 x 50 x 12 F
CUT AND BENT FROM 50 x 50 x 5.0 SHS x 3310 LONG
SPACER PLATE L 200 x 50 x 12 F CUT FROM 50 x 50 x 5.0 SHS
CUT AND BENT FROM 50 x 50 x 5.0 SHS x 3238 LONG
TYP
IP SPACER PLATE
TYP
x 3090 LONG
SPACER PLATE D 12 VENT HOLE 12 VENT HOLE
TYP
B 4
CUT FROM 50 x 50 x 5.0 SHS x 1533 LONG
TYP
C 4
TYP
TYP
ANCHOR PLATE 1 350 125 125 100 1 CUT FROM 50 x 50 x 5.0 SHS x 310 LONG 125 125 SEE DETAIL 500 2 250 2 -
ANCHOR PLATE SEE DETAIL CUT FROM 50 x 50 x 5.0 SHS x 745 LONG
POST TYPE
?? REQUIRED
POST TYPE
?? REQUIRED
VIEW
1 -
POST TYPE
?? REQUIRED
POST TYPE
?? REQUIRED
VIEW
2 -
POST TYPES ADJACENT TO FOOTWAYS
POST TYPES ADJACENT TO TRAFFIC FACE

50 x 50 x 4 STEEL MESH SAFETY SCREEN INCORPORATING TRANSOM BEAM
50 x 50 x 4 STEEL MESH SAFETY SCREEN INCORPORATING TRANSOM BEAM
EXISTING PEDESTRIAN RAILING
EXISTING TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING
STEEL MESH SHALL BE AFFIXED TO THE CONCRETE SURFACE AT 300 MAXIMUM CENTRES USING POWERS MUSHROOM HEAD STAINLESS STEEL SPIKES SCALE: 6.5 x 50 LONG AND STAINLESS STEEL STRAPS, 20MM WIDE x 2MM THICK WITH SHAPE SIMILAR TO SMORGON ARC PRODUCT CODE CLUG, BENT AS REQUIRED AND WITH LENGTH TO SUIT CORNER POINT IP
200 100 0 200 400 600 800 1000mm
GENERAL NOTES
OR AS SHOWN.
TYP
12 VENT HOLE 20 NOMINAL MORTAR PAD 20 NOMINAL PROVIDE NOMINAL SPACER AS REQUIRED AND MORTAR PAD AFTER ERECTION DRILL 24 HOLE FOR AFTER ERECTION NOMINAL 150 EMBEDMENT FOR M20 CHEMSET CARBON STEEL ANCHORS OR M20 HILTI HVA-HAS ANCHORS
100 50 0 100
200 x 50 x 12 P SPACER PLATE
MORTAR PAD
PROVIDE NOMINAL SPACER AS REQUIRED AND MORTAR PAD
DETAIL
D 200 300mm
TYPICAL RETRO-FIT APPLICATIONS
DETAIL
A -
FIGURE 31.4
500mm
100
200
300
400
100 50
CAD No KP2F3122

Drafting

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationDrafting

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drafting

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drafting

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RTA STRUCTURAL DRAFTING AND DETAILING MANUAL

STRUCTURAL DRAFTING AND DETAILING MANUAL

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Figures revised for new title block information

Issue 1 Revision 6 (05 May 2011)

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Issue 1 Revision 2 (05 May 2011)

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

5.9 5.10 5.11

5.4 5.6 5.8

Issue 1 Revision 2 (05 May 2011)

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Issue 1 Revision 2 (05 May 2011)

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Issue 1 Revision 2 (05 May 2011)

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

21.6 21.7 21.8

21.3 21.3 21.4

Issue 1 Revision 2 (05 May 2011)

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Issue 1 Revision 2 (05 May 2011)

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Issue 1 Revision 2 (05 May 2011)

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Issue 1 Revision 2 (05 May 2011)

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Issue 1 Revision 0 (09 July 2007)

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Approaches Approach Slab Asphalt

Australian Height Datum Bailey Bridge

Base Centreline Batter Bearing (structural)

Issue 1 - Revision 0 (09 July 2007 )

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Bituminous CAD Carriageway Cast-in-Place (Cast-in-situ) Column

Contours Contract Documents

Contract Level Control Line

Issue 1 - Revision 0 (09 July 2007 )

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Corbel Cover (nominal)

Datum Deck Designed Surface Level

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Invert Kerb Mass Concrete

Pile Pile Cap Post-tensioning

Prestressed Concrete (PSC) Pretensioning

Protection Angle Public Utilities

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Reduced Level Reinforced Concrete Reinforcement Reinforced Soil

Road Safety Screens

Setting Out Line

Skew Angle Right Left Span Length -

Superelevation Superstructure Tender Documents

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Traffic Barrier Railing

Truss Waterway Area Waterway Calculations Widening Width of Carriageway

NOMINAL JOINT GAP

NOMINAL JOINT GAP

APPROACH SLAB OR APPROACH PAVEMENT

OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK